[go: up one dir, main page]

CN107864679B - System and method for commercializing electronic displays - Google Patents

System and method for commercializing electronic displays Download PDF

Info

Publication number
CN107864679B
CN107864679B CN201680041389.1A CN201680041389A CN107864679B CN 107864679 B CN107864679 B CN 107864679B CN 201680041389 A CN201680041389 A CN 201680041389A CN 107864679 B CN107864679 B CN 107864679B
Authority
CN
China
Prior art keywords
display
shelf
product
electronic
label device
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Expired - Fee Related
Application number
CN201680041389.1A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
CN107864679A (en
Inventor
J.斯瓦福德
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
RTC Industries Inc
Original Assignee
RTC Industries Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from US14/713,809 external-priority patent/US10357118B2/en
Application filed by RTC Industries Inc filed Critical RTC Industries Inc
Publication of CN107864679A publication Critical patent/CN107864679A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of CN107864679B publication Critical patent/CN107864679B/en
Expired - Fee Related legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09FDISPLAYING; ADVERTISING; SIGNS; LABELS OR NAME-PLATES; SEALS
    • G09F3/00Labels, tag tickets, or similar identification or indication means; Seals; Postage or like stamps
    • G09F3/08Fastening or securing by means not forming part of the material of the label itself
    • G09F3/18Casings, frames or enclosures for labels
    • G09F3/20Casings, frames or enclosures for labels for adjustable, removable, or interchangeable labels
    • G09F3/208Electronic labels, Labels integrating electronic displays
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06QINFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES; SYSTEMS OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • G06Q30/00Commerce
    • G06Q30/02Marketing; Price estimation or determination; Fundraising
    • G06Q30/0241Advertisements
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/14Digital output to display device ; Cooperation and interconnection of the display device with other functional units
    • G06F3/147Digital output to display device ; Cooperation and interconnection of the display device with other functional units using display panels
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06QINFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES; SYSTEMS OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • G06Q30/00Commerce
    • G06Q30/06Buying, selling or leasing transactions
    • G06Q30/0601Electronic shopping [e-shopping]
    • G06Q30/0631Recommending goods or services
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06VIMAGE OR VIDEO RECOGNITION OR UNDERSTANDING
    • G06V40/00Recognition of biometric, human-related or animal-related patterns in image or video data
    • G06V40/10Human or animal bodies, e.g. vehicle occupants or pedestrians; Body parts, e.g. hands
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09FDISPLAYING; ADVERTISING; SIGNS; LABELS OR NAME-PLATES; SEALS
    • G09F3/00Labels, tag tickets, or similar identification or indication means; Seals; Postage or like stamps
    • G09F3/08Fastening or securing by means not forming part of the material of the label itself
    • G09F3/18Casings, frames or enclosures for labels
    • G09F3/20Casings, frames or enclosures for labels for adjustable, removable, or interchangeable labels
    • G09F3/204Casings, frames or enclosures for labels for adjustable, removable, or interchangeable labels specially adapted to be attached to a shelf or the like
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/14Digital output to display device ; Cooperation and interconnection of the display device with other functional units
    • G06F3/1423Digital output to display device ; Cooperation and interconnection of the display device with other functional units controlling a plurality of local displays, e.g. CRT and flat panel display
    • G06F3/1446Digital output to display device ; Cooperation and interconnection of the display device with other functional units controlling a plurality of local displays, e.g. CRT and flat panel display display composed of modules, e.g. video walls
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09FDISPLAYING; ADVERTISING; SIGNS; LABELS OR NAME-PLATES; SEALS
    • G09F27/00Combined visual and audible advertising or displaying, e.g. for public address
    • G09F2027/001Comprising a presence or proximity detector
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2380/00Specific applications
    • G09G2380/04Electronic labels

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Business, Economics & Management (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Accounting & Taxation (AREA)
  • Finance (AREA)
  • Development Economics (AREA)
  • Strategic Management (AREA)
  • Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
  • Economics (AREA)
  • General Business, Economics & Management (AREA)
  • Marketing (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Multimedia (AREA)
  • Entrepreneurship & Innovation (AREA)
  • Game Theory and Decision Science (AREA)
  • Management, Administration, Business Operations System, And Electronic Commerce (AREA)
  • Display Racks (AREA)

Abstract

用于与由沿着产品货架嵌入的电子显示器和存储在产品货架上的包装形成的连续显示有关的商品化显示的系统和方法。电子标签装置可以检测到顾客的存在,并发送触发到其产品货架上的包装。电子标签装置还可以发送触发到周围电子标签装置。然后可以在电子标签装置和包装上的显示器之间分配流式视频。显示器中的每个可同时输出流式视频的不同部分。

Figure 201680041389

Systems and methods for merchandising displays associated with continuous displays formed from electronic displays embedded along product shelves and packaging stored on product shelves. Electronic tagging devices can detect the presence of customers and send triggers to their product shelves for packaging. Electronic tag devices can also send triggers to surrounding electronic tag devices. The streaming video can then be distributed between the electronic label device and the display on the package. Each of the monitors can output a different portion of the streaming video at the same time.

Figure 201680041389

Description

用于商品化电子显示的系统和方法System and method for commercializing electronic displays

相关申请的交叉引用CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

本申请要求于2015年5月15日提交的美国申请No.14/713,809的优先权,其是2015年1月7日提交的美国申请No.14/591,421的部分继续申请,美国申请No.14/591,421要求于2014年11月12日提交的美国申请 No.62/078,809的优先权。本申请涉及2014年6月19日提交的美国申请 No.14/308,989,美国申请No.14/308,989是2011年7月29日提交的美国申请No.13/194,649的分案申请,美国申请No.13/194,649要求2010年8月6 日提交的美国临时申请No.61/371,417的优先权并且是于2010年9月7日提交的美国申请No.12/876,919的继续申请,美国申请No.12/876,919是2004 年2月3日提交的美国专利申请No.10/772,010(现为美国专利No.7,792,711) 的部分继续申请。本申请还涉及于2013年3月15日提交的美国申请 No.13/836,680,其是2011年7月29日提交的美国申请No.13/194,649的部分继续申请,美国申请No.13/194,649是于2010年9月7日提交的美国申请 No.12/876,919的继续申请,美国申请No.12/876,919是于2004年2月3日提交的美国申请No.10/772,010(现为美国专利No.7,792,711)的部分继续申请。美国申请No.13/836,680还要求于2010年8月6日提交的美国临时申请 No.61/371,417的优先权,并且是2013年3月5日提交的美国申请 No.13/785,082的部分继续申请。这些申请中的每一个的内容通过引用以其整体并入本文。This application claims priority to US Application No. 14/713,809, filed May 15, 2015, which is a continuation-in-part of US Application No. 14/591,421, filed January 7, 2015, US Application No. 14 /591,421 claims priority from US Application No. 62/078,809, filed November 12, 2014. This application relates to US Application No. 14/308,989 filed on June 19, 2014, US Application No. 14/308,989 is a divisional application of US Application No. 13/194,649 filed on July 29, 2011, and US Application No. .13/194,649 claims priority to US Provisional Application No. 61/371,417, filed August 6, 2010 and is a continuation of US Application No. 12/876,919, filed September 7, 2010, US Application No. 12/876,919 is a continuation-in-part of US Patent Application No. 10/772,010 (now US Patent No. 7,792,711), filed February 3, 2004. This application is also related to US Application No. 13/836,680, filed March 15, 2013, which is a continuation-in-part of US Application No. 13/194,649, filed July 29, 2011, US Application No. 13/194,649 is a continuation of US Application No. 12/876,919, filed September 7, 2010, which is a continuation of US Application No. 10/772,010, filed February 3, 2004 (now US Patent No. 7,792,711) part of the continuation application. US Application No. 13/836,680 also claims priority to US Provisional Application No. 61/371,417, filed August 6, 2010, and is a continuation-in-part of US Application No. 13/785,082, filed March 5, 2013 Application. The contents of each of these applications are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.

技术领域technical field

本公开涉及一种商店智能系统,其可以被配置为用于例如提供以下中的一个或多个:交互式电子价格显示,提供营销消息传送,以及跨电子价格显示、包装和/或产品提供连续显示。The present disclosure relates to a store intelligence system that can be configured to, for example, provide one or more of: interactive electronic price displays, provide marketing messaging, and provide continuous delivery across electronic price displays, packaging, and/or products show.

背景技术Background technique

零售商店运营的主要成本与库存管理有关,库存管理包括库存的追踪和存储。该成本的很大一部分与商店销售区域中的产品库存管理有关。库存管理成本的相当一部分是商店货架上产品的周期性计数。这种计数对于确定货架上产品的数量以及帮助确保货架被完全备货是必要的。The main cost of operating a retail store is related to inventory management, which includes the tracking and storage of inventory. A large portion of this cost is related to product inventory management in the store's sales area. A considerable part of the cost of inventory management is the periodic counting of products on store shelves. This count is necessary to determine the quantity of product on the shelf and to help ensure that the shelf is fully stocked.

历史上,商店货架上的库存计数是手工完成的,结果记录在纸上。然而,最近,库存已经在使用小型手持式计算机的情况下被手动计数,该小型手持式计算机可以被配置为将所输入的数据传送到编译数据的中央计算机,并且可以被编程以做出关于购买用于为货架补货的产品的决定。这些最新进展有助于降低库存管理的成本;然而,对库存计数仍然需要大量的手工劳动。减少库存计数所需的手工劳动量可以是有益的。Historically, inventory counts on store shelves were done by hand and the results were recorded on paper. More recently, however, inventory has been manually counted using a small handheld computer that can be configured to transmit the entered data to a central computer that compiles the data, and can be programmed to make decisions about purchases Decisions on products used to restock shelves. These latest advances help reduce the cost of inventory management; however, counting inventory still requires a lot of manual labor. It can be beneficial to reduce the amount of manual labor required for inventory counting.

与库存管理有关的另一重要成本是产品盗窃。某些物品相对较小,但是对潜在的窃贼来说具有高价值,窃贼或者可以转售物品或将它们用于其他非法目的,如在某些药物产品的情况中那样。由这样的盗窃产生的损失对零售店的盈利能力有负面影响。Another significant cost associated with inventory management is product theft. Certain items are relatively small but of high value to potential thieves who may either resell the items or use them for other illegal purposes, as in the case of certain pharmaceutical products. Losses resulting from such theft have a negative impact on the profitability of a retail store.

盗窃可能是顾客和员工行为的结果,并难以消除。试图阻止和防止盗窃已被证明只是部分有效的。例如,店内照相机通常不会足够清楚地观察到盗窃事件,以抓住或起诉窃贼。另外,店内安保人员很少在正确的位置中以实际观察到正在行动的窃贼。结果,盗窃仍然是库存管理中的重大问题和成本。因此,在监控盗窃方面提供援助可以是有益的。Theft can be the result of customer and employee behavior and is difficult to eliminate. Attempts to deter and prevent theft have proven to be only partially effective. For example, in-store cameras often do not observe theft clearly enough to catch or prosecute the burglar. Additionally, in-store security is rarely in the correct location to actually observe a burglar in action. As a result, theft remains a significant problem and cost in inventory management. Therefore, assistance in monitoring theft can be beneficial.

目前,零售店可以根据在结帐柜台处扫描的多个物品来追踪销售的产品量。虽然这种能力已被证明是有用的,但使用这种系统会造成某些固有的缺点。一个固有的缺点是,扫描仪只计算合法购买的产品数量。因此,如果产品从货架上被取走而没有被购买,商店在没有目视检查或检测的情况下不能确定产品被错置或被偷的事实。将货架上产品水平的变化与销售的产品量进行比较将是有用的。Currently, retail stores can track the amount of product sold based on multiple items scanned at the checkout counter. While this capability has proven useful, the use of such a system creates certain inherent disadvantages. An inherent disadvantage is that the scanner only counts the number of products that were legally purchased. Therefore, if a product is removed from the shelf without being purchased, the store cannot determine the fact that the product has been misplaced or stolen without visual inspection or inspection. It would be useful to compare changes in product levels on shelves with the volume of product sold.

第二个固有的缺点涉及商店经营的产品促销。一个典型的促销活动将把产品置于通道的端部处或提高顾客对产品的认知度的某类促销位置处。通常,产品也放置在其传统位置中的货架上,使得熟悉商店产品布局的顾客可以在没有过度搜索的情况下找到产品。因此,顾客可以在多个地方获得正被促销的产品,并且可能难以确定特定促销陈列的有效性,即,对产品提供的促销折扣对比产品的正常购买的效果。因此,更准确地确定店内促销的有效性可以是有益的。The second inherent disadvantage involves store-operated product promotions. A typical promotion will place the product at the end of the aisle or some type of promotional location that increases customer awareness of the product. Often, products are also placed on shelves in their traditional locations, allowing customers familiar with the store's product layout to find products without undue searching. As a result, a customer may obtain a product being promoted in multiple places, and it may be difficult to determine the effectiveness of a particular promotional display, ie, the effect of a promotional discount offered on a product versus a normal purchase of the product. Therefore, it may be beneficial to more accurately determine the effectiveness of in-store promotions.

库存管理的另一主要成本与必须在商店中维持比实际需要更多的库存以满足客户需求相关联。由于目前的库存系统不自动指示货架是空的,所以零售商店倾向于依靠通过结账测量的输出、或者替代地通过目视检查测量的输出来确定是否需要将额外的产品放置在货架上。为了确保货架备有产品,经常将比在给定的时间段内通常需要的更多的产品放置在货架上,有时在每个货架上的多个饰面(facing)中。使用多个饰面倾向于占用宝贵的货架空间,所述货架空间否则可能会被分配到额外的产品选择,以最大化顾客满意度。因此,减少零售商店中特定产品的库存量可以是有益的。Another major cost of inventory management is associated with having to maintain more inventory in the store than is actually needed to meet customer demand. Since current inventory systems do not automatically indicate that a shelf is empty, retail stores tend to rely on output measured by checkout, or alternatively by visual inspection, to determine whether additional products need to be placed on the shelf. To ensure that the shelves are stocked with product, more product is often placed on the shelves than is normally required in a given period of time, sometimes in multiple facings on each shelf. Using multiple finishes tends to take up valuable shelf space that might otherwise be allocated to additional product selections to maximize customer satisfaction. Therefore, it may be beneficial to reduce the inventory of a particular product in a retail store.

减少所需货架空间的量的方法是已知的。例如,Hardy的美国专利 No.6,041,720和Breslow的美国专利No.4,830,201(其通过引用以其整体并入本文)教导了一种通过使用推动器组件在货架上组织和陈列物品的系统。Methods of reducing the amount of shelf space required are known. For example, U.S. Patent No. 6,041,720 to Hardy and U.S. Patent No. 4,830,201 to Breslow, which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety, teach a system for organizing and displaying items on a shelf through the use of pusher assemblies.

此外,零售业务经常要负责顾客产品兴趣的快速变化以及实施内部变更来应对客户产品兴趣的快速变化。随着新产品在顾客中越来越受欢迎,零售商要负责改变产品的货架边缘标签,以便吸引顾客到其他产品、销售特定产品、或者尽快更新诸如定价等的产品信息。In addition, retail operations are often responsible for rapidly changing customer product interests and implementing internal changes in response to rapid changes in customer product interest. As new products become more popular with customers, retailers are responsible for changing the shelf edge labels of products in order to attract customers to other products, sell specific products, or update product information such as pricing as quickly as possible.

电子货架边缘标签装置允许零售商手动地将表示一个单个产品的一个装置替换为表示另一单个产品的另一装置,或者甚至改变装置以提供关于单个产品的不同信息,或者从关于一个单个产品的输出数据改变为关于另一单个产品的数据。然而,期望进一步的技术改进和零售空间的创新。Electronic shelf edge label devices allow retailers to manually replace one device representing a single product with another device representing another single product, or even change devices to provide different information about a single product, or from The output data is changed to data about another single product. However, expect further technological improvements and innovations in the retail space.

发明内容SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

提供本概述以用简化的形式介绍将在以下详细描述中进一步描述的概念选集。本概述并非旨在确定所要求保护的主题的关键特征或重要特征,也并非旨在用于限制所要求保护的主题的范围。This Summary is provided to introduce a selection of concepts in a simplified form that are further described below in the Detailed Description. This Summary is not intended to identify key features or important features of the claimed subject matter, nor is it intended to be used to limit the scope of the claimed subject matter.

附图说明Description of drawings

通过示例的方式示出了本发明的几个实施例,但是所述几个实施例不限于附图,在附图中相同的附图标记表示相似的元件,并且在附图中:Several embodiments of the invention are shown by way of example, but not limited to the accompanying drawings, in which like reference numerals refer to similar elements, and in the drawings:

图1a示出了包括推动器组件和传感器组件的本发明的实施例的等距视图。Figure 1a shows an isometric view of an embodiment of the invention including a pusher assembly and a sensor assembly.

图1b示出了包括推动器组件和传感器组件的本发明的实施例的另一等距视图。Figure lb shows another isometric view of an embodiment of the invention including a pusher assembly and a sensor assembly.

图2a示出了与本发明一起使用的传感器组件的实施例的示意图。Figure 2a shows a schematic diagram of an embodiment of a sensor assembly for use with the present invention.

图2b示出了与本发明一起使用的传感器组件的替代实施例的示意图。Figure 2b shows a schematic diagram of an alternative embodiment of a sensor assembly for use with the present invention.

图2c示出了与本发明一起使用的传感器组件的另一替代实施例的示意图。Figure 2c shows a schematic diagram of another alternative embodiment of a sensor assembly for use with the present invention.

图3示出了本发明的实施例的示意图,其包括天线、接入点和商店计算机。Figure 3 shows a schematic diagram of an embodiment of the present invention including an antenna, an access point and a store computer.

图4示出了本发明的实施例的示意图,其包括接入点、商店计算机和安全照相机。Figure 4 shows a schematic diagram of an embodiment of the present invention including an access point, a store computer and a security camera.

图5示出了展示从标记带向商店计算机提供数据的方法的流程图。Figure 5 shows a flow chart illustrating a method of providing data from a marker tape to a store computer.

图6示出了展示经由从商店计算机的查询来确定货架上的产品量的方法的流程图。FIG. 6 shows a flowchart illustrating a method of determining the amount of product on a shelf via a query from a store computer.

图7示出了展示更新特定产品与特定货架位置的关联的方法的流程图。FIG. 7 shows a flowchart illustrating a method of updating the association of a particular product with a particular shelf location.

图8示出了展示更新特定产品与特定货架位置的关联的替代方法的流程图。FIG. 8 shows a flowchart illustrating an alternative method of updating the association of a particular product with a particular shelf location.

图9示出了本发明的替代实施例的等距视图。Figure 9 shows an isometric view of an alternative embodiment of the present invention.

图10示出了本发明的替代实施例的局部分解视图。Figure 10 shows a partial exploded view of an alternative embodiment of the present invention.

图11示出了本发明的替代实施例的等距视图。Figure 11 shows an isometric view of an alternative embodiment of the present invention.

图12示出了本发明的另一替代实施例的等距视图。Figure 12 shows an isometric view of another alternative embodiment of the present invention.

图13示出了本发明的又一替代实施例的等距视图。Figure 13 shows an isometric view of yet another alternative embodiment of the present invention.

图14示出了本发明的又一替代实施例的等距视图。Figure 14 shows an isometric view of yet another alternative embodiment of the present invention.

图15A示出了本发明的又一替代实施例的等距视图。Figure 15A shows an isometric view of yet another alternative embodiment of the present invention.

图15B示出了根据图15A所示的实施例的推动器组件、光束和固定镜的示意图。Figure 15B shows a schematic diagram of the pusher assembly, beam and stationary mirror according to the embodiment shown in Figure 15A.

图16A示出了本发明的又一替代实施例的等距视图。Figure 16A shows an isometric view of yet another alternative embodiment of the present invention.

图16B示出根据图16A所示的实施例的推动器组件、光束和固定镜的示意图。Figure 16B shows a schematic diagram of the pusher assembly, beam and stationary mirror according to the embodiment shown in Figure 16A.

图17A示出了本发明的又一个替代实施例的等距视图。Figure 17A shows an isometric view of yet another alternative embodiment of the present invention.

图17B示出了根据图17A中所示的实施例的推动器组件、光束和固定镜的示意图。Figure 17B shows a schematic diagram of the pusher assembly, beam and stationary mirror according to the embodiment shown in Figure 17A.

图18A-18C描绘了陈列管理系统的替代实施方式。18A-18C depict an alternate embodiment of an exhibit management system.

图19A和19B示意性地描绘了陈列管理系统的替代实施方式的平面图。19A and 19B schematically depict plan views of alternative embodiments of an exhibit management system.

图20A示意性地描绘了电容式传感器。Figure 20A schematically depicts a capacitive sensor.

图20B示意性地描绘了控制电路。Figure 20B schematically depicts the control circuit.

图21A和21B描绘了陈列管理系统的替代实施方式。21A and 21B depict an alternate embodiment of an exhibit management system.

图22A示意性地描绘了集成加速度计装置。Figure 22A schematically depicts an integrated accelerometer device.

图22B示意性地描绘了与控制电路通信的集成加速度计装置。Figure 22B schematically depicts an integrated accelerometer device in communication with a control circuit.

图23描绘了陈列管理系统的替代实施方式。Figure 23 depicts an alternate embodiment of an exhibit management system.

图24示意性地描绘了被配置为结合一个或多个陈列管理系统实现一个或多个库存管理、安保和/或识别功能的传感器网络。Figure 24 schematically depicts a sensor network configured to implement one or more inventory management, security and/or identification functions in conjunction with one or more display management systems.

图25示意性地描绘可由陈列管理系统控制器装置执行以确定从配备有传感器的陈列管理系统移除的产品的数量的过程的流程图。25 schematically depicts a flow diagram of a process that may be performed by an exhibit management system controller device to determine the number of products removed from a sensor-equipped exhibit management system.

图26是用于计算从陈列管理系统移除的产品的数量的过程的流程图。26 is a flowchart of a process for calculating the number of products removed from the display management system.

图27示出了根据本公开的一个或多个说明性方面的用于传送和分发内容的设备的示例框图。27 shows an example block diagram of an apparatus for transmitting and distributing content in accordance with one or more illustrative aspects of the present disclosure.

图28A-28B示出了根据本发明的一个或多个说明性方面的用于传送和分发内容的系统的示例框图。28A-28B illustrate example block diagrams of systems for delivering and distributing content in accordance with one or more illustrative aspects of the invention.

图29示出了根据本公开的一个或多个说明性方面的用于传送和分发内容的设备的示例框图。29 shows an example block diagram of an apparatus for transmitting and distributing content in accordance with one or more illustrative aspects of the present disclosure.

图30A-30B示出了根据本公开的一个或多个说明性方面的改变连续显示器的示例。30A-30B illustrate an example of changing a continuous display in accordance with one or more illustrative aspects of the present disclosure.

图31A-31C示出了根据本公开的一个或多个说明性方面的具有锁定机构的示例连续显示器。31A-31C illustrate an example continuous display with a locking mechanism in accordance with one or more illustrative aspects of the present disclosure.

图31D-31F示出了根据本公开的一个或多个说明性方面的改变具有锁定机构用户界面的连续显示器的示例。31D-31F show examples of changing a continuous display with a locking mechanism user interface in accordance with one or more illustrative aspects of the present disclosure.

图32A-32B示出了根据本发明的一个或多个说明性方面的改变用户界面的大小的示例。32A-32B illustrate an example of changing the size of a user interface in accordance with one or more illustrative aspects of the invention.

图33A-33B示出了根据本公开的一个或多个说明性方面的改变用户界面的形状的示例。33A-33B illustrate an example of changing the shape of a user interface in accordance with one or more illustrative aspects of the present disclosure.

图34A-34B示出了根据本公开的一个或多个说明性方面的改变用户界面的位置的示例。34A-34B illustrate an example of changing the position of a user interface in accordance with one or more illustrative aspects of the present disclosure.

图35示出了根据本公开的一个或多个说明性方面的分发内容的示例方法。35 illustrates an example method of distributing content in accordance with one or more illustrative aspects of the present disclosure.

图36示出了根据本公开的一个或多个说明性方面的分发内容的另一示例方法。36 illustrates another example method of distributing content in accordance with one or more illustrative aspects of the present disclosure.

图37示出了根据本公开的一个或多个说明性方面的用于传达和分发内容的系统的示例框图。37 shows an example block diagram of a system for communicating and distributing content in accordance with one or more illustrative aspects of the present disclosure.

图38描绘了根据本文描述的一个或多个说明性方面的可以使用的说明性计算机系统架构。38 depicts an illustrative computer system architecture that may be used in accordance with one or more illustrative aspects described herein.

图39描绘了设施智能系统的示例示意图。39 depicts an example schematic diagram of a facility intelligence system.

图40描绘了可以被配置为集线器的示例性计算装置的示例示意图。40 depicts an example schematic diagram of an example computing device that may be configured as a hub.

图41-44d描绘了示例交互式显示。41-44d depict example interactive displays.

具体实施方式Detailed ways

在详细解释本发明的实施例之前,应当理解的是,本发明的应用不限于以下描述中所阐述的或附图中所示的部件的构造和布置的细节。本发明能够具有其他实施例并且能够以各种方式实践或执行。而且,应该理解,本文使用的措辞和术语是为了描述的目的,而不应该被认为是限制性的。“包括”和“包含”及其变体的使用意味着包括其后列出的项目及其等同物以及附加项目及其等同物。Before embodiments of the invention are explained in detail, it is to be understood that the invention is not limited to the details of construction and the arrangement of components set forth in the following description or illustrated in the accompanying drawings. The invention is capable of other embodiments and of being practiced or carried out in various ways. Also, it is to be understood that the phraseology and terminology used herein is for the purpose of description and should not be regarded as limiting. The use of "including" and "comprising" and variations thereof is meant to include the items listed thereafter and equivalents thereof as well as additional items and equivalents thereof.

本发明可以与Hardy的美国专利No.6,041,720或Breslow的美国专利 No.4,830,201中描述的货架和推动器组件系统一起使用。本公开还可以与本领域中已知的其他推动器组件和货架配置一起使用。The present invention can be used with the racking and pusher assembly systems described in U.S. Patent No. 6,041,720 to Hardy or U.S. Patent No. 4,830,201 to Breslow. The present disclosure may also be used with other pusher assemblies and rack configurations known in the art.

图1a示出了本公开的实施例。货架壁1被构造成支撑货架5。货架5 具有前侧6和后侧7,前侧6通常面向顾客在购物时行走的通道。安装在货架上的是推动器组件15。如所描绘的,推动器组件15包括偏置机构,诸如包含标记带21的片状螺旋弹簧20。推动器组件15还包括在分隔壁22的一侧上的整体分隔壁22和地板部分23以及在分隔壁22的另一侧上的地板部分24。片状螺旋弹簧20可操作地连接到推动器25,并且可以用于将推动器 25和相关联的产品推向货架5的前侧6。推动器组件15可以是模块化的,并且可以包括适配或配合就位的分隔壁或附加的地板部分。Figure 1a shows an embodiment of the present disclosure. The shelf wall 1 is configured to support the shelf 5 . The shelf 5 has a front side 6 and a rear side 7, the front side 6 generally facing the aisle through which customers walk while shopping. Mounted on the shelf is the pusher assembly 15 . As depicted, the pusher assembly 15 includes a biasing mechanism, such as a leaf coil spring 20 containing a marker band 21 . The pusher assembly 15 also includes an integral dividing wall 22 and a floor portion 23 on one side of the dividing wall 22 and a floor portion 24 on the other side of the dividing wall 22 . A leaf coil spring 20 is operably connected to the pusher 25 and can be used to push the pusher 25 and associated product towards the front side 6 of the shelf 5. The pusher assembly 15 may be modular and may include dividing walls or additional floor sections that fit or fit in place.

如图1a所示,传感器组件30可以安装到地板24的下侧或货架5,并被构造成读取标记带21,推动器25在地板24的该下侧之上行进。传感器组件 30可以位于沿着地板24的任何位置处并且优选靠近螺旋弹簧20。标记带21 被配置为提供包括与推动器25的位置相关联的表示的图案。因此,当推动器25尽可能远地朝向后侧7移动时(即,布满产品的饰面),传感器组件30 可以扫描标记带21上的反映推动器25正处于该位置的表示。As shown in FIG. 1 a , the sensor assembly 30 may be mounted to the underside of the floor 24 or shelf 5 and configured to read the marking tape 21 over which the pusher 25 travels. The sensor assembly 30 may be located anywhere along the floor 24 and is preferably near the coil springs 20. The marker strip 21 is configured to provide a pattern that includes a representation associated with the position of the pusher 25 . Thus, when the pusher 25 is moved as far as possible toward the rear side 7 (ie, full of product veneer), the sensor assembly 30 can scan the marking tape 21 for an indication that the pusher 25 is in that position.

标记条21在图1a中被描绘成安装在片状螺旋弹簧20上的带。标记带 21可以被印刷在可以附接到螺旋弹簧20的纸上,并且可以以已知的方式是白纸黑字、黑纸白字或一些其它的颜色。替代地,取决于用于读取标记带21 的传感器组件30,标记带21可以以已知的方式印刷或酸蚀刻或激光蚀刻。而且,标记带21可以与螺旋弹簧20分离。在这个实施例中,标记带21可以安装在螺旋弹簧20的旁边或附近。The marking strip 21 is depicted in FIG. 1 a as a band mounted on the leaf coil spring 20 . The marking tape 21 may be printed on paper that may be attached to the coil spring 20, and may be black on white, white on black, or some other color in a known manner. Alternatively, the marking tape 21 may be printed or acid etched or laser etched in a known manner, depending on the sensor assembly 30 used to read the marking tape 21 . Also, the marker tape 21 can be separated from the coil spring 20 . In this embodiment, the marker band 21 may be mounted beside or near the coil spring 20 .

包含在标记带21上的图案中的表示可以是光学可读的,或者可以基于其他方法来读取,其他方法包括但不限于无源可变电容、电感、电阻、或磁性、或有源信号检测。The representation contained in the pattern on the marker tape 21 may be optically readable, or may be read based on other methods, including but not limited to passive variable capacitance, inductance, resistance, or magnetic, or active signals detection.

图1b描绘了本发明的替代实施例,其中传感器组件30安装在推动器25 的前侧上,传感器组件30被配置成读取标记带21。在替代实施例中,传感器组件30可以安装在推动器25的后面。取决于螺旋弹簧20的位置,传感器组件30可以安装在不同的地方。优选地,传感器组件30将被以这样的方式安装,使得避免与货架上的产品的直接接触,从而使对传感器组件30的损害最小化。FIG. 1 b depicts an alternative embodiment of the present invention in which a sensor assembly 30 is mounted on the front side of the pusher 25 , the sensor assembly 30 being configured to read the marker tape 21 . In alternative embodiments, the sensor assembly 30 may be mounted behind the pusher 25 . Depending on the position of the coil spring 20, the sensor assembly 30 can be installed in different places. Preferably, the sensor assembly 30 will be mounted in such a way that direct contact with products on the shelf is avoided, thereby minimizing damage to the sensor assembly 30 .

在另一个替代实施例中,传感器组件30可以安装在推动器25内或上,并被配置为读取标记带21。在这个实施例中,标记带21不安装到螺旋弹簧或螺旋弹簧的一部分;相反,标记带21可以沿着地板24的顶部或沿着地板 24的下侧定位,并由传感器组件30读取。在该实施例的一个方面中,标记带21是可以具有可变磁性或电容特性的类型。传感器组件30可以包括模拟振荡器,其频率由在推动器25的特定位置处的标记带21的磁性或电容确定。振荡器可以直接调制射频信号并将该信号发送到中央接入点,如下所述。中央接入点然后可以解调该信号并使用该信号来确定推动器25的位置。In another alternative embodiment, the sensor assembly 30 may be mounted in or on the pusher 25 and configured to read the marker tape 21 . In this embodiment, the marker strip 21 is not mounted to the coil spring or a portion of the coil spring; In one aspect of this embodiment, the marker strip 21 is of a type that can have variable magnetic or capacitive properties. The sensor assembly 30 may include an analog oscillator, the frequency of which is determined by the magnetism or capacitance of the marker strip 21 at a particular location of the pusher 25 . The oscillator can directly modulate the RF signal and send that signal to the central access point, as described below. The central access point can then demodulate this signal and use it to determine the position of the pusher 25 .

对于黑/白印刷标记条21,可以使用光学红外或可见光LED逆向反射传感器(LEDretro-reflective sensor)阵列。在一个实施例中,包含各种表示的标记带21图案可以是6位宽。在替代实施例中,取决于货架的宽度和期望的精度,标记带上的图案可以大于6位宽。For black/white printed marking strips 21, an array of optical infrared or visible light LED retro-reflective sensors can be used. In one embodiment, the marker band 21 pattern containing the various representations may be 6 bits wide. In alternative embodiments, the pattern on the marker tape may be greater than 6 bits wide, depending on the width of the shelf and the desired precision.

在又一替代实施例中,标记带21可以小于6位宽。减少标记带21上的位数降低了与推动器25的位置有关的精度,但具有可能避免对确定产品的尺寸的需要的优点。具有减少位数的实施例将在下面讨论。标记带将优选地包括至少两个表示,使得这两个表示可以用于反映推动器的至少两个位置。In yet another alternative embodiment, the marker strip 21 may be less than 6 bits wide. Reducing the number of digits on the marking strip 21 reduces the accuracy associated with the position of the pusher 25, but has the advantage of possibly avoiding the need to determine the size of the product. Embodiments with reduced number of bits are discussed below. The marker strip will preferably include at least two representations so that the two representations can be used to reflect at least two positions of the pusher.

取决于标记带21和传感器组件30,推动器25的可测量位置的数量可以变化。例如,与可以扫描6位的传感器组件30一起的标记带21上的6位宽图案的配置可以扫描与推动器25的64个位置相关联的至少64个表示。标记带21上的图案中的表示可以是多种符号,但是格雷码(Gray Code)规定在每个移动增量中只有一位将改变,从而减少潜在的错误。传感器组件30 和标记带21可以取决于推动器25的行进距离和产品的预期尺寸来配置。Depending on the marker strip 21 and the sensor assembly 30, the number of measurable positions of the pusher 25 may vary. For example, a configuration of a 6-bit wide pattern on marker tape 21 along with sensor assembly 30 that can scan 6 bits can scan at least 64 representations associated with 64 positions of pusher 25 . The representation in the pattern on the marking tape 21 can be of a variety of symbols, but the Gray Code specifies that only one bit will change in each movement increment, thereby reducing potential errors. The sensor assembly 30 and marker band 21 may be configured depending on the distance traveled by the pusher 25 and the intended size of the product.

在一个实施例中,螺旋弹簧20具有大约1英寸的宽度,并且标记带21 覆盖螺旋弹簧20的宽度的大约80%。本领域技术人员将会理解,螺旋弹簧 20的其他宽度以及标记带21的其它尺寸对本发明是可能的。In one embodiment, the coil spring 20 has a width of about 1 inch, and the marking strip 21 covers about 80% of the width of the coil spring 20 . Those skilled in the art will appreciate that other widths of the coil spring 20 and other dimensions of the marker band 21 are possible with the present invention.

在一个实施例中,货架上的产品的数量可以通过推动器25的可测量位置的数量来测量。在这样的实施例中,推动器25的位置可以用于确定货架上的产品的量,而不需要手动计数产品。在替代实施例中,可测量位置的数量可以超过可以放置在饰面中的产品的数量。在该替代实施例中,为了便于计算货架上的产品量,可测量位置的数量优选为产品数量的整数倍。因此,增加可测量位置的数量可以提高系统精确计算饰面中产品的量的能力。当产品包装非常薄时,这可能变得更重要,因此推动器25从一个代码到下一个代码的增量运动变成其推动的每个产品包装的厚度的大百分比。In one embodiment, the number of products on the shelf may be measured by the number of measurable positions of the pusher 25 . In such an embodiment, the position of the pusher 25 can be used to determine the amount of product on the shelf without the need to manually count the products. In alternative embodiments, the number of measurable locations may exceed the number of products that may be placed in the veneer. In this alternative embodiment, the number of measurable locations is preferably an integer multiple of the number of products in order to facilitate the calculation of the quantity of products on the shelf. Therefore, increasing the number of measurable locations can improve the ability of the system to accurately calculate the amount of product in the finish. This may become even more important when the product package is very thin, so the incremental movement of the pusher 25 from one code to the next becomes a large percentage of the thickness of each product package it pushes.

因此,由于不同的产品具有不同的尺寸,所以传感器组件30和标记带 21的配置可能需要增加数量的可测量位置。例如,测量推动器25的256个位置的配置可能是期望的。这种配置可以用来确定货架上产品的实际数量,以用于各种产品尺寸。Thus, the configuration of sensor assembly 30 and marker strip 21 may require an increased number of measurable locations as different products have different dimensions. For example, a configuration of measuring 256 positions of pusher 25 may be desirable. This configuration can be used to determine the actual number of products on the shelf for various product sizes.

在替代实施例中,传感器组件30和标记带21可以被配置为提供减少数量的可测量位置。在一实施例中,推动器25的四个位置是可测量的。在这样的配置下,货架将提供关于货架有多满的信息,但是不提供货架上物品的实际数量(假设4个产品不会填满饰面)。这种配置可以在提供货架将没有产品了并需要补货的自动通知方面是有用的,而不需要确定产品的尺寸。In alternative embodiments, sensor assembly 30 and marker strip 21 may be configured to provide a reduced number of measurable locations. In one embodiment, four positions of the pusher 25 are measurable. In such a configuration, the shelf will provide information on how full the shelf is, but not the actual number of items on the shelf (assuming 4 products won't fill the finish). This configuration can be useful in providing automatic notification that the shelf will be empty of product and needs to be replenished, without the need to determine the size of the product.

图2a描绘了传感器组件30的实施例的示意图。印刷电路板(“PCB”) 35被配置为支撑传感器50,传感器50与选定类型的标记带21兼容。控制器55被安装到PCB 35,并且被配置为控制传感器50并经由天线65传送关于推动器25的位置的信号。控制器55可以被配置为基于来自定时装置70 的输入来致动传感器50。定时装置70可以包括但不限于低功率间隔定时器或实时时钟,并且被配置为提供与时间流逝有关的信息。FIG. 2a depicts a schematic diagram of an embodiment of a sensor assembly 30 . A printed circuit board (“PCB”) 35 is configured to support sensors 50 that are compatible with a selected type of marker tape 21 . The controller 55 is mounted to the PCB 35 and is configured to control the sensor 50 and transmit a signal regarding the position of the pusher 25 via the antenna 65 . Controller 55 may be configured to actuate sensor 50 based on input from timing device 70 . The timing device 70 may include, but is not limited to, a low-power interval timer or a real-time clock, and is configured to provide information related to the passage of time.

对于黑/白印刷标记条21,传感器50可以包括但不限于光学红外或可见光LED逆向反射传感器。优选地,对于6位宽的图案,将使用具有6个发射器/传感器的线性阵列,其中一个发射器/传感器与印刷在标记带21上的每个位位置对齐。在一实施例中,传感器50定位于距安装在标记带21上的印刷带的表面大约0.1英寸处。当每个发射器/传感器对照射其位位置时,可以由控制器55汇编二进制码,该二进制码对应于标记带21上的表示,该表示与推动器25的位置相关联。For black/white printed marker strips 21, sensors 50 may include, but are not limited to, optical infrared or visible light LED retroreflective sensors. Preferably, for a 6-bit wide pattern, a linear array of 6 emitters/sensors will be used, with one emitter/sensor aligned with each bit position printed on the marking tape 21 . In one embodiment, the sensor 50 is positioned approximately 0.1 inches from the surface of the printing tape mounted on the marking tape 21 . As each emitter/sensor pair illuminates its bit position, a binary code can be assembled by the controller 55 that corresponds to a representation on the marker strip 21 that is associated with the position of the pusher 25 .

无论如何确定推动器25的位置,控制器55生成代表推动器25的位置的推动器代码。推动器代码可以是数字或模拟形式并且反映推动器25的位置。另外,推动器代码可以是被处理的数据或未经处理的数据。因此,推动器代码可以是但不限于是扫描的表示或控制器处理的表示。替代地,推动器代码可以是反映推动器25的相对位置的一些其他数据。Regardless of how the position of the pusher 25 is determined, the controller 55 generates a pusher code representing the position of the pusher 25 . The pusher code can be in digital or analog form and reflects the position of the pusher 25 . Additionally, the pusher code can be processed data or unprocessed data. Thus, the pusher code may be, but is not limited to, a scanned representation or a controller processed representation. Alternatively, the pusher code may be some other data reflecting the relative position of the pusher 25 .

控制器55由电源75供电。电源75可以是但不限于长寿命电池、有线电源或太阳能电池板。可以理解,电源的类型将对传感器组件30的功能产生影响。如果电源75是长寿命的电池,则设计成利用较少能量的系统配置将是优选的,以避免需要频繁更换电池。如果电源75是有线电源,则可以更频繁地使用传感器50而不需要补充电源,并且传感器组件30甚至可以被配置为提供实时信息。Controller 55 is powered by power source 75 . The power source 75 may be, but is not limited to, a long-life battery, a wired power source, or a solar panel. It will be appreciated that the type of power supply will have an impact on the functionality of the sensor assembly 30 . If the power source 75 is a long-life battery, a system configuration designed to utilize less energy would be preferred to avoid the need for frequent battery replacement. If the power source 75 is a wired power source, the sensor 50 can be used more frequently without the need for a supplemental power source, and the sensor assembly 30 can even be configured to provide real-time information.

控制器55可以用唯一的序列号来制造。在该实施例中,每个推动器25 将与唯一的序列号或身份代码相关联。替代地,每个标记带21可以包括唯一的身份代码以及与推动器25的位置相关联的表示。用唯一的身份代码对标记带21进行编码可以降低控制器55的复杂性,但是通常会导致传感器50 的复杂性增加。无论如何,当信息从传感器组件30传送时,信息可以包括身份代码和表示推动器25位置的推动器代码。另外,还可以传送诸如发送时间和电路状态或电源状态的信息。The controller 55 can be manufactured with a unique serial number. In this embodiment, each pusher 25 will be associated with a unique serial number or identification code. Alternatively, each marker band 21 may include a unique identification code and representation associated with the position of the pusher 25 . Encoding the marker strip 21 with a unique identification code may reduce the complexity of the controller 55, but generally result in an increase in the complexity of the sensor 50. In any event, when the information is communicated from the sensor assembly 30, the information may include an identification code and a pusher code indicating the position of the pusher 25. In addition, information such as transmission time and circuit status or power supply status can also be communicated.

图2b示出了传感器组件130的替代实施例的示意图。PCB 135具有配置成最小化功率使用的功率管理电路148。功率管理电路148向传感器150、控制器155和相关联存储器156提供功率。存储器156可以是易失型存储器,诸如动态随机存取存储器,但是优选地,存储器是非易失型存储器,诸如闪存,以使功率消耗最小化。如所描绘的,功率管理电路148还向通信控制器 157提供功率。功率管理电路148还可以向定时装置170提供功率。如所描绘的,功率管理电路148由电源175供电。FIG. 2b shows a schematic diagram of an alternative embodiment of the sensor assembly 130. FIG. PCB 135 has power management circuitry 148 configured to minimize power usage. Power management circuitry 148 provides power to sensor 150 , controller 155 and associated memory 156 . The memory 156 may be volatile memory, such as dynamic random access memory, but preferably the memory is non-volatile memory, such as flash memory, to minimize power consumption. As depicted, power management circuitry 148 also provides power to communications controller 157. Power management circuitry 148 may also provide power to timing device 170 . As depicted, power management circuitry 148 is powered by power supply 175 .

在该实施例中,输入信号被提供给控制器155。输入信号可以是由定时装置170产生的信号,或者可以来自某个其它源。作为响应,控制器155通过向功率管理电路148发送信号来激活传感器150。控制器155从传感器150 接收用于形成表示推动器25的位置的推动器代码的数据。控制器155将由传感器150扫描的数据与作为驻留在存储器156中的数据的、由传感器150 扫描的先前数据进行比较。取决于系统的配置,如果由传感器150扫描的数据与先前扫描的数据相同,则控制器155可以被配置为等待直到定时器的下一个间隔的结束。如果由传感器150扫描的数据不同,则控制器155然后可以激活通信控制器157,并将推动器代码提供给通信控制器157以用于传送。通信控制器157然后可以传送推动器代码以用于进一步处理。除非另有说明,术语“传送”、“传输”包括通过有线或经由无线系统的信息发送,并且可以是直接或间接(即通过网络)。然而,如果电源175不是有线电源,则优选使用消耗相对较小功率的通信方法。In this embodiment, the input signal is provided to the controller 155 . The input signal may be a signal generated by the timing device 170, or may come from some other source. In response, controller 155 activates sensor 150 by sending a signal to power management circuit 148 . Controller 155 receives data from sensor 150 for forming a pusher code representing the position of pusher 25 . Controller 155 compares the data scanned by sensor 150 with previous data scanned by sensor 150 as data resident in memory 156 . Depending on the configuration of the system, if the data scanned by the sensor 150 is the same as previously scanned data, the controller 155 may be configured to wait until the end of the next interval of the timer. If the data scanned by the sensor 150 is different, the controller 155 may then activate the communication controller 157 and provide the pusher code to the communication controller 157 for transmission. Communication controller 157 may then transmit the pusher code for further processing. Unless otherwise specified, the terms "transmit", "transmit" include the transmission of information by wire or via a wireless system, and may be direct or indirect (ie, via a network). However, if the power source 175 is not a wired power source, it is preferable to use a communication method that consumes relatively little power.

图2c示出了传感器组件230的替代实施例的示意图。PCB 235被配置成支撑传感器250和控制器255。控制器255由电源275供电并且被配置为控制传感器250并具有集成的功能,包括但不限于计时、功率管理和通信控制。在替代实施例中,控制器255传送由传感器250扫描的数据,而不对数据进行任何处理。因此,在该实施例中,推动器代码是由传感器250扫描的数据。在另一个替代实施例中,传感器和控制器可以集成在一起。FIG. 2c shows a schematic diagram of an alternative embodiment of a sensor assembly 230. FIG. PCB 235 is configured to support sensor 250 and controller 255 . The controller 255 is powered by the power source 275 and is configured to control the sensor 250 and have integrated functions including, but not limited to, timing, power management, and communication control. In an alternate embodiment, the controller 255 transmits the data scanned by the sensor 250 without any processing of the data. Thus, in this embodiment, the pusher code is the data scanned by the sensor 250 . In another alternative embodiment, the sensor and controller may be integrated together.

图3示出了用于向诸如商店计算机90的处理装置提供关于推动器25的位置的数据的可行配置。如所描绘的,接入点80被配置为将信息传送到中央接入点85。中央接入点85连接到商店计算机90,并将从接入点80接收到的数据提供给商店计算机90。从接入点80发送的数据从天线165、天线 265和天线365接收。天线165通常通过经由使用可以与控制器相关联的唯一序列号而与特定的推动器25和传感器组件30相关联。天线265和天线365 还与不同的推动器25和传感器组件30相关联,每个推动器25和传感器组件30都具有唯一的序列号。替代地,一个或多个天线可以与多于一个的推动器25相关联。FIG. 3 shows a possible configuration for providing data regarding the position of the pusher 25 to a processing device such as a store computer 90 . As depicted, access point 80 is configured to communicate information to central access point 85 . The central access point 85 is connected to the store computer 90 and provides data received from the access point 80 to the store computer 90 . Data transmitted from access point 80 is received from antenna 165, antenna 265 and antenna 365. Antenna 165 is typically associated with a particular pusher 25 and sensor assembly 30 through the use of a unique serial number that can be associated with the controller. Antenna 265 and antenna 365 are also associated with different pusher 25 and sensor assemblies 30, each pusher 25 and sensor assembly 30 having a unique serial number. Alternatively, one or more antennas may be associated with more than one pusher 25 .

通常,传送无线信号所需的功率随着传送距离的增加而增加。因此,特别是对于电池供电的控制器,优选的无线通信配置将在短距离之上传送低功率信号。如图3所示,各种天线165、265和365将无线信号传送到位于附近的接入点80,因此低功率传送是合适的。接入点80然后在次级传送期间使用更高的功率将信号再传送到中央接入点85。以这种方式,用于各种控制器的电源可以更容易地利用由长寿命电池组成的电源75,该各种控制器连接到天线165、265和365。虽然接入点80和中央接入点85之间的传送方法被描绘为无线,但接入点80和中央接入点85也可以通过电线进行通信。In general, the power required to transmit wireless signals increases as the transmission distance increases. Therefore, especially for battery powered controllers, the preferred wireless communication configuration will transmit low power signals over short distances. As shown in FIG. 3, the various antennas 165, 265 and 365 transmit wireless signals to access points 80 located in the vicinity, so low power transmission is appropriate. The access point 80 then retransmits the signal to the central access point 85 using higher power during the secondary transmission. In this way, the power supply for the various controllers connected to the antennas 165, 265, and 365 can more easily utilize the power supply 75 consisting of long-life batteries. Although the method of transmission between the access point 80 and the central access point 85 is depicted as wireless, the access point 80 and the central access point 85 may also communicate via wires.

在替代实施例中,对应于每个推动器25的控制器55可以被硬连线到接入点80,使得控制器55通过一根或多根电线将数据传送到接入点80。接入点80然后可以将数据传送到商店计算机90。在另一替代实施例中,数据从传感器组件30直接传送到商店计算机90。在该实施例中,传送可以是无线的,诸如红外、超声或电磁波传送,或者可以是硬连线的。取决于传送方法,可以期望经由可补偿或最小化通信错误的网络协议将数据从传感器组件30 传送到商店计算机90。In an alternate embodiment, the controller 55 corresponding to each pusher 25 may be hardwired to the access point 80 such that the controller 55 transmits data to the access point 80 over one or more wires. The access point 80 can then transmit the data to the store computer 90 . In another alternative embodiment, the data is communicated directly from the sensor assembly 30 to the store computer 90 . In this embodiment, the transmission may be wireless, such as infrared, ultrasonic or electromagnetic wave transmission, or may be hardwired. Depending on the transfer method, it may be desirable to transfer data from sensor assembly 30 to store computer 90 via a network protocol that can compensate for or minimize communication errors.

有线连接的使用可以提供有用的功率源并且可以减少通信冲突的可能性,特别是如果信号直接到商店计算机90。此外,通过提供额外的功率,控制器55可以被配置成提供有关货架上或商店中的产品水平的实时更新,使得可以做出关于订购额外产品的需要的更准确的决定。该配置还使得可以基于推动器25的实时移动来识别和发送关于潜在盗窃情况的警报。实时产品信息可以使得提供更具响应性的库存系统是可行的,从而降低商店中的库存量,并由此降低库存成本。The use of a wired connection can provide a useful source of power and can reduce the likelihood of communication conflicts, especially if the signal is directed to the store computer 90 . Furthermore, by providing additional power, the controller 55 can be configured to provide real-time updates on product levels on shelves or in stores so that more accurate decisions can be made as to the need to order additional products. This configuration also makes it possible to identify and send alerts regarding potential theft situations based on real-time movement of the pusher 25 . Real-time product information may make it feasible to provide a more responsive inventory system, thereby reducing inventory levels in stores, and thus lowering inventory costs.

另一方面,无线系统提供了增加的安装上的灵活性,并且可以方便地安装在现有的货架上,而无需安装用于功率或通信的电线。此外,使用无线系统允许逐步安装库存系统。例如,可以首先监控高价值物品(因此遭受增加的盗窃的可能性)或倾向于具有显着变化的客户需求的物品。Wireless systems, on the other hand, offer increased installation flexibility and can be easily installed on existing racks without the need to install wires for power or communications. In addition, the use of a wireless system allows for a step-by-step installation of the inventory system. For example, items of high value (and thus subject to an increased likelihood of theft) or items that tend to have significantly changing customer needs may be monitored first.

在一实施例中,传感器组件30可以经由一系列无线接入点80联网在一起,其中每个接入点80接受来自接入点80附近的任何传感器组件30的传送。因此,在一实施例中,存在多个无线接入点80并且接入点80经由网络连接,其中网络将数据传送到商店计算机90。在替代实施例中,每个无线接入点80将数据直接传送到商店计算机90。In one embodiment, the sensor assemblies 30 may be networked together via a series of wireless access points 80 , where each access point 80 accepts transmissions from any sensor assembly 30 in the vicinity of the access point 80 . Thus, in one embodiment, there are multiple wireless access points 80 and the access points 80 are connected via a network that transmits data to the store computer 90 . In an alternate embodiment, each wireless access point 80 transmits data directly to the store computer 90 .

自然地,网络和直接传送的一些组合也是可行的,并且被认为在本发明的范围内。例如,电池供电的传感器组件30可以经由低功率无线传输与接入点80通信,接入点80由有线电源供电。接入点将传送无线信号到由有线电源供电的中央接入点85。中央接入点85可以通过电线连接到商店计算机 90。Naturally, some combinations of network and direct transfer are also possible and are considered to be within the scope of the present invention. For example, battery powered sensor assembly 30 may communicate via low power wireless transmission with access point 80 powered by a wired power source. The access points will transmit wireless signals to a central access point 85 powered by wired power. The central access point 85 may be wired to the store computer 90.

返回参考图2a,如果计时装置70包括低功率计时器,则控制器55可以休眠,直到来自计时装置70的信号指示是时候发送关于推动器25的位置的更新。低功率定时器的一示例包括低功率、低成本的间隔定时器。低功耗、低成本的间隔定时器可能不是很准确,因此商店中的多个推动器装置将可能随机化其传送时间以减少传送冲突。数据传送的周期通常约为几毫秒,因此来自不同控制器的信号同时发送是不太可能的。如果控制器不是同时启动的话,这种可能性会进一步降低。如果传送每天只发生几次(即为了提供货架上产品的量的周期性更新),通信冲突的可能性进一步降低。另外,减少的传送频率和短的传送周期有助于减少功耗量。Referring back to Figure 2a, if the timing device 70 includes a low power timer, the controller 55 may sleep until a signal from the timing device 70 indicates that it is time to send an update on the position of the pusher 25. An example of a low power timer includes a low power, low cost interval timer. Low power, low cost interval timers may not be very accurate, so multiple pusher units in a store will likely randomize their transmission times to reduce transmission collisions. The period of data transfer is usually on the order of a few milliseconds, so simultaneous transmission of signals from different controllers is unlikely. This possibility is further reduced if the controllers are not activated at the same time. If the transfer occurs only a few times per day (ie to provide periodic updates of the quantity of products on the shelf), the likelihood of communication conflicts is further reduced. In addition, the reduced transmission frequency and short transmission cycle help reduce the amount of power consumption.

在替代实施例中,传感器50连续地监控标记带21。当产品从货架上被移除时,推动器25将移动并且传感器50可以扫描与推动器25的新位置对应的标记带21上的新的表示。控制器55然后可以将包括推动器25的新位置的传送发送到商店计算机90(即,控制器55可以发送新的推动器代码)。在这个替代实施例中,商店计算机90可以实时监控货架上的产品量。In an alternative embodiment, the sensor 50 continuously monitors the marker tape 21 . As the product is removed from the shelf, the pusher 25 will move and the sensor 50 can scan for a new representation on the marker strip 21 corresponding to the new position of the pusher 25 . The controller 55 may then send a transmission to the store computer 90 including the new position of the pusher 25 (ie, the controller 55 may send the new pusher code). In this alternate embodiment, store computer 90 may monitor the amount of product on the shelf in real time.

如图3所示,从天线165到商店计算机90的信号传送例如是单向传送。在替代实施例中,系统可以被设置为处理传感器组件30和商店计算机90之间的信号的双向传送。在双向无线系统中,传感器组件30中包括诸如接收器的附加硬件。双向系统允许双向传输信息。As shown in FIG. 3, the signal transmission from the antenna 165 to the store computer 90 is, for example, a one-way transmission. In an alternate embodiment, the system may be arranged to handle the bi-directional transmission of signals between the sensor assembly 30 and the store computer 90 . In a two-way wireless system, additional hardware, such as a receiver, is included in the sensor assembly 30 . A two-way system allows for the transfer of information in both directions.

例如,商店计算机90可以查询关于相关联的推动器25的位置的特定控制器55。控制器55可响应于查询而激活传感器50并确定反映推动器25的位置的推动器代码。控制器55然后可以将推动器代码连同控制器55的身份代码一起传送到商店计算机90。基于推动器代码,商店计算机90可以确定产品的库存水平。为了避免激活错误的控制器55,商店计算机90可以在传送中包括识别代码。商店计算机90可以利用商店中的控制器或推动器系统中的全部或子集的识别代码而存储、访问和执行功能。For example, the store computer 90 may query a particular controller 55 regarding the location of the associated pusher 25 . The controller 55 may activate the sensor 50 in response to the query and determine a pusher code reflecting the position of the pusher 25 . The controller 55 may then transmit the pusher code to the store computer 90 along with the identity code of the controller 55 . Based on the pusher code, the store computer 90 can determine the inventory level of the product. To avoid activating the wrong controller 55, the store computer 90 may include an identification code in the transmission. The store computer 90 may store, access and perform functions using the identification codes of all or a subset of the controllers or pusher systems in the store.

在一实施例中,与从相同供应商购买的产品相关联的所有控制器55可以在向相应供应商下达订单之前被查询。然后可以使用最新的产品库存信息来更新针对该供应商的订单。通过这种方式,向供应商下达的订单可以更准确,而无需费力的货架上的产品计数。In one embodiment, all controllers 55 associated with products purchased from the same supplier may be queried before placing an order with the corresponding supplier. The order for that supplier can then be updated with the latest product inventory information. In this way, orders placed with suppliers can be more accurate without laborious product counts on the shelves.

一些供应商而不是商店人员负责在零售商店中为货架备货。在供应商负责为货架备货的情况下,本发明的实施例可以响应来自供应商的计算机的查询向供应商提供更新。在一实施例中,供应商可以根据需要时常地甚至实时地追踪货架上可用产品的量。Some suppliers, rather than store personnel, are responsible for stocking shelves in retail stores. Where a supplier is responsible for stocking shelves, embodiments of the present invention may provide updates to the supplier in response to a query from the supplier's computer. In one embodiment, the supplier can track the amount of product available on the shelf from time to time, even in real time, as needed.

例如,供应商可以经由广域网(“WAN”)向控制器55发送查询。控制器55可以确定推动器25的位置并且经由WAN将信号传送回供应商。在替代实施例中,供应商可以与商店计算机90通信以获得关于货架上的产品的库存水平的信息。For example, the provider may send a query to the controller 55 via a wide area network ("WAN"). The controller 55 may determine the position of the pusher 25 and transmit the signal back to the supplier via the WAN. In an alternate embodiment, the supplier may communicate with the store computer 90 to obtain information regarding the inventory levels of products on the shelf.

在一实施例中,供应商可以响应货架上的库存水平来控制产品的制造过程。可以理解的是,如果多个商店与供应商的计算机联网,供应商将具有越来越有效的库存系统,使得可以确定所有商店货架上的产品的合计量。如果供应商仅连接到单个商店,则该信息虽然不足以指示总库存,但可以提供关于顾客行为模式的有价值的细节。In one embodiment, the supplier may control the manufacturing process of the product in response to the inventory level on the shelf. It will be appreciated that if multiple stores are networked with the supplier's computer, the supplier will have an increasingly efficient inventory system that allows the total amount of product on all store shelves to be determined. If the supplier is only connected to a single store, this information, while not sufficient to indicate total inventory, can provide valuable details about customer behavior patterns.

图4示出了包括使用安全照相机195的本发明的实施例。如所描绘的,接入点180从控制器155接收指示推动器25(未示出)已经移动的信号。接入点180将该信号传送到连接到商店计算机190的中央接入点185。商店计算机190确定与控制器155相关联的产品的产品水平的变化的速率指示潜在的盗窃。商店计算机190然后将信号有线或无线地传送到安装到安全照相机 195的天线196。该信号指令安全照相机195监控与控制器155的位置相关联的位置。可以理解,安保人员有时可以提供更细致的响应,因此通知安保人员是有利的。因此,商店计算机190还可通过在商店计算机屏幕上显示警告、或者通过向安全计算机发送信号、或者通过在潜在的盗窃附近激活可听见的声音或闪光、或者通过其他已知的通知方法(诸如到安保人员携带的寻呼机或蜂鸣器的信号)通知安保人员来监控该区域。FIG. 4 shows an embodiment of the present invention including the use of a security camera 195 . As depicted, access point 180 receives a signal from controller 155 indicating that pusher 25 (not shown) has moved. The access point 180 transmits the signal to the central access point 185 connected to the store computer 190. The store computer 190 determines that the rate of change in the product level of the product associated with the controller 155 is indicative of potential theft. The store computer 190 then transmits the signal wired or wirelessly to the antenna 196 mounted to the security camera 195. This signal instructs the security camera 195 to monitor the location associated with the location of the controller 155 . Understandably, security personnel can sometimes provide a more granular response, so it is advantageous to notify security personnel. Accordingly, the store computer 190 may also display a warning on the store computer screen, or by sending a signal to a security computer, or by activating an audible sound or flashing light in the vicinity of a potential theft, or by other known notification methods such as to Signals from pagers or buzzers carried by security personnel) notify security personnel to monitor the area.

来自安全照相机的信息可以被发送到位于潜在的盗窃发生的位置附近的电视机或其他视觉显示装置。视觉显示装置可以显示潜在的窃贼的图像,使得潜在的窃贼可以意识到窃贼正被观看的事实。Information from the security camera can be sent to a television or other visual display device located near where the potential theft occurs. The visual display device may display an image of a potential thief so that the potential thief may be aware of the fact that the thief is being watched.

可以理解的是,控制器155优选地频繁地或者甚至实时地监控推动器25 的位置,以便提供更及时的响应。如果利用由长寿命电池组成的电源75,利用可以确定潜在盗窃情况而不需要将数据传送到商店计算机190的控制器可以是有益的。在这样的实施例中,控制器可以被配置为传送数据以提供库存水平更新并且还提供安保通知。It will be appreciated that the controller 155 preferably monitors the position of the pusher 25 frequently or even in real time in order to provide a more timely response. If utilizing a power supply 75 consisting of long-life batteries, it may be beneficial to utilize a controller that can determine potential theft without the need to transmit data to the store computer 190. In such an embodiment, the controller may be configured to transmit data to provide inventory level updates and also provide security notifications.

可以理解的是,潜在盗窃相对于安全照相机195的位置将有利于向安全照相机195提供指令以聚焦于特定位置。该位置信息可以通过多种方法生成,包括向商店计算机190提供安全照相机195的安全照相机坐标系统。控制器 155相对于安全照相机195的位置可以在设置期间和潜在的盗窃情况期间被确定;控制器155的位置可以用于指引安全照相机195的聚焦。替代地,安全照相机195可以被配置为聚焦在几个位置,诸如沿着通道的三个点,并且商店计算机190可以指示哪个位置对于特定情况是最适合的。所描述的方法是说明性的,因为存在控制安全照相机195的多种方法。It will be appreciated that the location of the potential theft relative to the security camera 195 will facilitate providing the security camera 195 with instructions to focus on a particular location. This location information may be generated by a variety of methods, including providing the store computer 190 with the security camera coordinate system of the security camera 195 . The position of the controller 155 relative to the security camera 195 can be determined during setup and during a potential theft situation; the position of the controller 155 can be used to direct the focus of the security camera 195. Alternatively, the security camera 195 may be configured to focus on several locations, such as three points along the aisle, and the store computer 190 may indicate which location is most suitable for a particular situation. The described method is illustrative as there are various methods of controlling the security camera 195 .

具有在商店计算机190和控制器155之间的双向传送的实施例中,商店计算机190可以向控制器155发信号以激活能够提供可听警告声音的装置。In embodiments with two-way communication between store computer 190 and controller 155, store computer 190 may signal controller 155 to activate a device capable of providing an audible warning sound.

在另一个实施例中,控制器155可以确定潜在的盗窃已经发生并且可以提供通知,包括可听警告声音的发声。另外,控制器155可以将信号传送到商店计算机190。在该替代实施例中,传感器组件30将优选地包括定时装置 70,以便允许控制器155更容易地确定推动器25的移动速率是否超过预设水平。In another embodiment, the controller 155 may determine that a potential theft has occurred and may provide a notification, including the sound of an audible warning sound. Additionally, the controller 155 may transmit the signal to the store computer 190 . In this alternative embodiment, the sensor assembly 30 would preferably include a timing device 70 to allow the controller 155 to more easily determine whether the rate of movement of the pusher 25 exceeds a preset level.

在另一个实施例中,可以实现双层响应。如果推动器25的位置变化大于正常,则可以将信号传送到安全照相机195。另外,可以直接向安保人员提供不可听的通知。如果推动器25的位置变化更清楚地指示潜在的盗窃,那么也可以激活可听警报和闪光灯。因此,可以将响应配置为更仔细地匹配情况。In another embodiment, a two-layer response can be achieved. If the position of the pusher 25 changes more than normal, a signal may be transmitted to the security camera 195 . Alternatively, inaudible notifications can be provided directly to security personnel. Audible alarms and flashing lights may also be activated if a change in the position of the pusher 25 more clearly indicates potential theft. Therefore, the response can be configured to match the situation more carefully.

图5示出了用于确定货架上的饰面中可用的特定产品的量的方法的实施例。在该实施例中,传感器组件30使用由低功率间隔计时器组成的定时装置70。控制器55最初处于休眠状态,只有定时装置70正在运行。在步骤 400中,定时装置70向控制器55提供时间间隔完成的信号。在步骤405中,控制器55响应于来自定时装置70的信号而变为被激活的,然后控制器55 激活传感器50。Figure 5 illustrates an embodiment of a method for determining the amount of a particular product available in a finish on a shelf. In this embodiment, the sensor assembly 30 uses a timing device 70 consisting of a low power interval timer. The controller 55 is initially in a dormant state with only the timer device 70 running. In step 400, the timing device 70 provides a signal to the controller 55 that the time interval is complete. In step 405 , the controller 55 becomes active in response to a signal from the timing device 70 , and the controller 55 then activates the sensor 50 .

在步骤410中,传感器50扫描包含在标记带21上的图案中的表示,使得控制器55可以生成表示推动器25的位置的推动器代码。在步骤415中,控制器55响应于由传感器50扫描的图案而生成推动器代码。在步骤420中,控制器55将可以包括控制器55的唯一序列号和推动器代码的信号传送到商店计算机90。In step 410 , the sensor 50 scans the representation contained in the pattern on the marker tape 21 so that the controller 55 can generate a pusher code representing the position of the pusher 25 . In step 415 , the controller 55 generates a pusher code in response to the pattern scanned by the sensor 50 . In step 420, the controller 55 transmits a signal to the store computer 90, which may include the controller 55's unique serial number and pusher code.

接下来,在步骤430中,商店计算机90从控制器55接收数据。在一个实施例中,从控制器55到商店计算机90的数据传输是直接的。在另一实施例中,控制器55通过接入点或网络间接地向商店计算机90传送数据。Next, in step 430 , the store computer 90 receives data from the controller 55 . In one embodiment, the data transfer from the controller 55 to the store computer 90 is direct. In another embodiment, the controller 55 transmits data to the store computer 90 indirectly through an access point or network.

然后,在步骤440中,商店计算机90基于推动器25的位置来计算货架上的产品量。商店计算机90此时也更新库存清单。在多个饰面具有相同产品的实施例中,可以计算具有该产品的所有饰面上的产品的总量。在一实施例中,可以通过使用产品的数据库和产品的相关尺寸以及推动器的位置来完成饰面中的产品的计算。在另一实施例中,可以在用于该产品的控制器55 的设置期间提供放置在饰面中的产品的数量。推动器25的位置和与推动器 25的该位置相对应的产品的数量可以用于通过使用公知的外推技术基于推动器25的稍后位置来计算剩余产品的数量。Then, in step 440, the store computer 90 calculates the amount of product on the shelf based on the position of the pusher 25. The store computer 90 also updates the inventory list at this time. In embodiments where multiple finishes have the same product, the total amount of product on all finishes with that product can be calculated. In one embodiment, the calculation of the product in the veneer can be done by using the product's database and the product's relative dimensions and the position of the pusher. In another embodiment, the number of products placed in the veneer may be provided during setup of the controller 55 for that product. The position of the pusher 25 and the quantity of product corresponding to that position of the pusher 25 can be used to calculate the quantity of remaining product based on the later position of the pusher 25 by using well-known extrapolation techniques.

在另一实施例中,推动器25的位置可以是表示X>3/4,3/4≥X>1/2, 1/2≥X>1/4和X≤1/4的四个位置中的一个。后一实施例提供较不精确的信息,但也需要较少的计算工作来提供近似的库存水平。另外,这个实施例可以用来管理库存,而不需要确定和追踪产品的尺寸。在一实施例中,货架上的产品量可以基于包含产品的饰面的数量以及对于每个饰面推动器25是否处于代表满的、几乎满的、低的或几乎空的饰面的位置来粗略地确定。In another embodiment, the position of the pusher 25 may be four positions representing X>3/4, 3/4≥X>1/2, 1/2≥X>1/4 and X≤1/4 one of the. The latter embodiment provides less precise information, but also requires less computational effort to provide approximate inventory levels. Additionally, this embodiment can be used to manage inventory without the need to determine and track product dimensions. In one embodiment, the amount of product on the shelf may be based on the number of finishes containing the product and whether the pusher 25 is in a position representing a full, nearly full, low or nearly empty finish for each finish. Roughly determined.

在步骤450中,商店计算机90确定是否需要任何动作。在一实施例中,潜在的盗窃、低于预定水平的库存减少,或在其它饰面中在货架上仍然剩余充足的产品的同时产品饰面的变空,将表明需要采取某些行动。例如,商店计算机90可以基于历史使用和平均交货时间以及每次交货的成本来确定当前库存水平低。在替代实施例中,可以预设最小库存水平,并且一旦库存水平下降到预设水平以下,商店计算机90就可以确定产品水平低。In step 450, the store computer 90 determines whether any action is required. In one embodiment, potential theft, a reduction in inventory below a predetermined level, or the emptying of a product finish while there is still plenty of product remaining on the shelf in other finishes, would indicate the need for some action. For example, store computer 90 may determine that the current inventory level is low based on historical usage and average delivery times and cost per delivery. In an alternate embodiment, a minimum inventory level may be preset, and once the inventory level falls below the preset level, the store computer 90 may determine that the product level is low.

在步骤460中,商店计算机90将确定潜在的盗窃是否发生。在一实施例中,商店计算机90可以基于推动器25的位置将当前的库存水平与先前的库存水平进行比较。如果库存水平的变化的速率超过预设水平,则商店计算机90将确定潜在的盗窃正在发生。在步骤465中,商店计算机90将通知安保。该通知可以包括呼叫安保或到安全摄像机195的信号以聚焦在特定方向上。In step 460, the store computer 90 will determine whether a potential theft has occurred. In one embodiment, store computer 90 may compare current inventory levels to previous inventory levels based on the position of pusher 25 . If the rate of change in the inventory level exceeds a preset level, the store computer 90 will determine that a potential theft is occurring. In step 465, the store computer 90 will notify security. The notification may include a call to security or a signal to security cameras 195 to focus in a particular direction.

接下来,在步骤470中,商店计算机90将确定是否需要修改现有订单。商店计算机90可以将当前产品需求与当前订单进行比较。如果商店计算机 90确定所订购的产品量不足,则商店计算机90将前进到步骤475。在步骤 475中,商店计算机90将更新当前库存订单,使得库存订单与当前产品需求匹配。Next, in step 470, the store computer 90 will determine whether the existing order needs to be modified. Store computer 90 may compare current product demand with current orders. If store computer 90 determines that the quantity of product ordered is insufficient, store computer 90 will proceed to step 475. In step 475, the store computer 90 will update the current inventory order so that the inventory order matches the current product demand.

接下来,在步骤480中,商店计算机90将确定货架上的饰面是否是空的。如果存在空的饰面,商店计算机90然后将在步骤485中通知商店管理员存在不希望的空饰面。然后,商店管理部门可以取决于产品类型和替代商品的可用性来决定要采取的适当行动。如果饰面不是空的,则商店计算机90 将等待直到下一次产品更新。Next, in step 480, the store computer 90 will determine whether the finish on the shelf is empty. If there are empty finishes, the store computer 90 will then notify the store administrator in step 485 that there are undesired empty finishes. Store management can then decide the appropriate action to take depending on the product type and availability of alternatives. If the finish is not empty, the store computer 90 will wait until the next product update.

图6描绘了用于确定双向系统中货架上的库存量的方法的实施例。在步骤510中,商店计算机90向传感器组件30发送查询。传感器组件30包含由唯一序列号或识别代码标识的控制器55。6 depicts an embodiment of a method for determining the amount of inventory on a shelf in a two-way system. In step 510 , store computer 90 sends a query to sensor assembly 30 . Sensor assembly 30 contains controller 55 identified by a unique serial number or identification code.

在步骤520中,传感器组件30从商店计算机90接收查询。响应于查询,控制器55激活传感器50并准备接收反映推动器25的位置的数据。在步骤 530中,传感器50扫描标记带21,并且控制器55产生表示推动器25的位置的推动器代码。In step 520 , the sensor assembly 30 receives a query from the store computer 90 . In response to the query, the controller 55 activates the sensor 50 and prepares to receive data reflecting the position of the pusher 25 . In step 530, the sensor 50 scans the marker strip 21 and the controller 55 generates a pusher code representing the position of the pusher 25.

在步骤540中,传感器组件30将表示推动器25的位置的推动器代码连同控制器55的唯一序列号一起传送到商店计算机90。In step 540 , the sensor assembly 30 transmits the pusher code representing the position of the pusher 25 to the store computer 90 along with the unique serial number of the controller 55 .

接下来,在步骤550中商店计算机90接收该传送。该传送可以从传感器组件30直接发送到商店计算机90,或者优选地,其可以通过网络间接地发送。传送可以以无线方式、通过电线、或者无线和有线传送的某种组合被发送。Next, in step 550 the store computer 90 receives the transmission. The transmission may be sent directly from the sensor assembly 30 to the store computer 90, or preferably, it may be sent indirectly through a network. Transmissions may be sent wirelessly, over wires, or some combination of wireless and wired transmissions.

然后,在步骤560中,商店计算机90确定货架上的库存水平。在一实施例中,该确定可以基于产品尺寸和推动器25的位置。在替代实施例中,该确定可以仅基于推动器25的位置。Then, in step 560, the store computer 90 determines the inventory level on the shelf. In one embodiment, this determination may be based on the product size and the position of the pusher 25 . In alternative embodiments, the determination may be based solely on the position of the pusher 25 .

图7描绘了用于为特定产品设置控制器的方法的实施例。在步骤610中,可以将产品放置在适当的饰面中的货架上。可选地,步骤610可以被跳过,并且设置可以从步骤620开始。Figure 7 depicts an embodiment of a method for setting up a controller for a particular product. In step 610, the product may be placed on the shelf in the appropriate finish. Optionally, step 610 may be skipped and setup may begin at step 620 .

在步骤620中,按压手持装置上的设置按钮。手持装置被配置为向商店计算机90传送指示手持装置的用户将要将产品与控制器55的序列号或识别代码相关联的信号。优选地,手持装置和商店计算机90之间的信号传送以无线方式完成。在一实施例中,商店计算机90向用户提供指示商店计算机 90准备好继续进行的反馈。在替代实施例中,不提供反馈。In step 620, a setup button on the handheld device is pressed. The handheld device is configured to transmit a signal to the store computer 90 indicating that the user of the handheld device is to associate the product with the serial number or identification code of the controller 55 . Preferably, the signal transfer between the handheld device and the store computer 90 is done wirelessly. In one embodiment, store computer 90 provides feedback to the user indicating that store computer 90 is ready to proceed. In alternate embodiments, no feedback is provided.

接下来,在步骤630中,扫描产品的UPC代码并将其传送到商店计算机90。然后,在步骤640中,商店计算机90基于UPC代码查找产品尺寸。如果UPC代码不具有列出的尺寸,则在步骤642中商店计算机90检查用户是否可以输入所需的尺寸。如果用户不能,则设置结束,用户可以尝试设置新产品。如果用户可以确定尺寸,则在步骤644中用户输入尺寸。Next, in step 630, the UPC code of the product is scanned and transmitted to the store computer 90. Then, in step 640, the store computer 90 looks up the product size based on the UPC code. If the UPC code does not have the size listed, then in step 642 the store computer 90 checks to see if the user can enter the desired size. If the user cannot, the setup is over and the user can try to setup a new product. If the user can determine the size, in step 644 the user enters the size.

接下来,在步骤646中,尺寸与UPC代码相关联。然后,在步骤650 中,商店计算机90向手持装置发送信号以指示用户应该继续进行设置。Next, in step 646, the size is associated with the UPC code. Then, in step 650, the store computer 90 sends a signal to the handheld device to indicate that the user should proceed with setup.

接下来,在步骤660中,用户用手持装置激活控制器55。在一实施例中,光学设置传感器安装在推动器组件上并连接到控制器55。优选地,设置传感器凹入推动器25中,但可以安装在其他位置,诸如推动器25的顶部或侧面上。手持装置将被配置为向设置传感器传送信号。将设置信号传送到设置传感器的动作将使控制器55从休眠状态唤醒。Next, in step 660, the user activates the controller 55 with the handheld device. In one embodiment, the optical setting sensor is mounted on the pusher assembly and connected to the controller 55 . Preferably, the sensor is recessed into the pusher 25, but could be mounted in other locations, such as on the top or side of the pusher 25. The handheld device will be configured to transmit a signal to the setup sensor. The act of transmitting the setup signal to the setup sensor will cause the controller 55 to wake up from the sleep state.

然后在步骤670中,响应于设置信号,控制器55将发送指示控制器55 正在被设置的数据到商店计算机90。数据将包括控制器55的唯一序列号。数据还可以包括对应于手持式扫描仪的通用设置代码或设置代码,并且可以包括表示推动器25的位置的推动器代码。在同时使用多个手持装置的情况下,提供与特定手持装置相关联的设置代码可以是有益的。Then in step 670, in response to the setup signal, the controller 55 will send data to the store computer 90 indicating that the controller 55 is being setup. The data will include the unique serial number of the controller 55. The data may also include a generic setup code or setup code corresponding to the handheld scanner, and may include a pusher code representing the position of pusher 25 . In situations where multiple handheld devices are used simultaneously, it may be beneficial to provide a setup code associated with a particular handheld device.

接下来,在步骤680中,商店计算机90将从控制器55接收数据。如果数据包括推动器代码,则商店计算机90此时可以计算饰面中的产品的量。在步骤685中,商店计算机90向手持装置发送信号,指示控制器55已经被设置并且与特定产品的UPC代码相关联。此外,如果初始包括推动器25的位置,商店计算机90还可以提供刚刚设置的饰面中的产品的当前数量的计算。另外,商店计算机90请求用户验证设置信息是正确的。Next, in step 680 , the store computer 90 will receive data from the controller 55 . If the data includes a pusher code, the store computer 90 can now calculate the amount of product in the finish. In step 685, the store computer 90 sends a signal to the handheld device that the controller 55 has been set up and associated with the UPC code for the particular product. Additionally, if the position of the pusher 25 is initially included, the store computer 90 may also provide a calculation of the current number of products in the finish just set. In addition, the store computer 90 requests the user to verify that the setting information is correct.

最后,在步骤690中,用户指示该信息是正确的。在验证的情况下,控制器55的设置完成。为了改变与控制器55相关联的产品,可以重复该过程。Finally, in step 690, the user indicates that the information is correct. In the case of verification, the setting of the controller 55 is completed. To change the product associated with the controller 55, the process can be repeated.

图8示出了将控制器与产品相关联的替代方法。在步骤710中,手持装置被激活以指示用户即将设置控制器55。激活包括将信号传送到商店计算机 90。Figure 8 shows an alternative method of associating a controller with a product. In step 710, the handheld device is activated to indicate to the user that the controller 55 is about to be set up. Activation includes transmitting a signal to the store computer 90 .

在步骤720中,手持装置用于扫描产品的UPC代码并将该信息传送给商店计算机90。接下来,在步骤730中,商店计算机90查看是否列出了所扫描的UPC代码的产品尺寸。在没有尺寸与UPC代码相关联的情况下,在步骤732中,计算机向手持装置发送信号,请求用户输入适当的产品尺寸。In step 720, the handheld device is used to scan the product's UPC code and transmit this information to the store computer 90. Next, in step 730, the store computer 90 checks to see if the product size for the scanned UPC code is listed. In the absence of a size associated with the UPC code, in step 732 the computer sends a signal to the handheld device requesting the user to enter the appropriate product size.

如果用户不知道产品尺寸或不能测量尺寸,则用户可以在步骤734中取消设置并重新开始新产品的设置。If the user does not know the product size or cannot measure the size, the user may cancel the setup in step 734 and start over with the setup of the new product.

如果用户确实知道尺寸或能够测量尺寸,则用户然后在步骤736中输入该尺寸并将信息传送到商店计算机90。在确定了产品尺寸之后,在步骤740 中,商店计算机90向手持装置发送指示用户应该继续进行的信号。If the user does know the size or is able to measure it, the user then enters the size and transmits the information to the store computer 90 in step 736 . After the product size is determined, in step 740, the store computer 90 sends a signal to the handheld device indicating that the user should proceed.

接下来,在步骤750中,用户扫描控制器55的序列号。优选地,控制器55的序列号以黑/白代码印刷在安装到传感器组件30的贴纸上。在扫描序列号之后,手持装置将序列号传送到商店计算机90。Next, in step 750, the user scans the serial number of the controller 55. Preferably, the serial number of the controller 55 is printed on a sticker mounted to the sensor assembly 30 in a black/white code. After scanning the serial number, the handheld transmits the serial number to the store computer 90 .

然后,在步骤760中,商店计算机90将产品的UPC代码与控制器55 的序列号相关联。商店计算机90然后向手持装置发信号通知装置的设置完成。为了避免在设置期间潜在的通信问题,手持装置和商店计算机90之间的所有通信可以包括表示手持装置的代码。Then, in step 760 , the store computer 90 associates the UPC code of the product with the serial number of the controller 55 . The store computer 90 then signals the handheld device that the setup of the device is complete. To avoid potential communication problems during setup, all communications between the handheld and store computer 90 may include code representing the handheld.

在替代实施例中,可以在不向商店计算机90发送信号的情况下完成将产品与控制器55相关联的方法。在该实施例中,一旦用户将各种控制器与各种产品相关联,则数据将从手持装置上传。In an alternate embodiment, the method of associating a product with the controller 55 may be accomplished without sending a signal to the store computer 90 . In this embodiment, once the user associates the various controllers with the various products, the data will be uploaded from the handheld device.

如可以理解的,将产品与控制器55相关联的许多方法是可行的,因此上述方法是说明性的。As can be appreciated, many methods of associating a product with the controller 55 are possible, and thus the above methods are illustrative.

已经描述了具有标记带和传感器用于确定推动器的位置的系统。存在许多额外的方法用于测量货架的前部或后部与推动器或产品饰面中的最末产品之间的距离。基于这个距离,并且了解饰面中产品的尺寸,可以执行简单的计算来确定饰面中产品的数量。这个计算可以由微处理器、商店计算机、控制器或已经接收到关于货架前部和饰面中的最后产品之间的距离的信息的其他处理装置来执行。此外,推动器组件已经被描述为包括弹簧。然而,一些其他的偏置方法,诸如重力或磁力,也会使推动器和产品向前移动。Systems have been described with marker strips and sensors for determining the position of the pusher. There are many additional methods for measuring the distance between the front or rear of the shelf and the pusher or the last product in the product finish. Based on this distance, and knowing the dimensions of the product in the veneer, a simple calculation can be performed to determine the number of products in the veneer. This calculation may be performed by a microprocessor, store computer, controller, or other processing device that has received information about the distance between the front of the shelf and the final product in the veneer. Additionally, the pusher assembly has been described as including a spring. However, some other biasing method, such as gravity or magnetism, will also move the pusher and product forward.

在本发明的一实施例中,如图9所示,在靠近产品饰面的背部的位置和静止的位置之间经过的透射光或其他信号(诸如射频信号)的使用可以用来测量货架前部和推动器之间的距离。在一个实施例中,发射器700或702被并入到推动器725中。发射器周期性地或连续地产生可以根据命令传送的光或其它信号。可使用发光二极管(LED)、射频或超声发生器或其他信号发生装置来产生光或信号。In one embodiment of the invention, as shown in Figure 9, the use of transmitted light or other signals (such as radio frequency signals) passing between a position near the back of the product finish and a rest position can be used to measure the front of the shelf the distance between the part and the pusher. In one embodiment, the launcher 700 or 702 is incorporated into the pusher 725 . The transmitter periodically or continuously generates light or other signals that can be transmitted on command. Light or signals may be generated using light emitting diodes (LEDs), radio frequency or ultrasonic generators, or other signal generating devices.

对应的接收器被并入到相对于推动器725静止的位置中。接收器712可并入到前导轨中或货架的前部处或附近的另一位置中,接收器730可并入到后部导轨中或货架的后部处或附近的其它位置中,其也可并入货架的地板、推动器的轨道、货架的顶部或分隔壁中。接收器检测从发射器发送的信号。例如,LED可以辐射具有特定强度的光。充当接收器的光电晶体管检测从 LED发射的光信号。光电晶体管的灵敏度和LED的强度可以通过微处理器调整,以便调整光学部件的整体灵敏度。在一个实施例中,该调整可以远程地完成。因此,发射器可以通过RF、IR或其他已知手段(诸如磁场、电场、声波等)以无线方式与接收器通信。The corresponding receivers are incorporated into a stationary position relative to the pusher 725 . Receiver 712 may be incorporated into the front rail or another location at or near the front of the rack, receiver 730 may be incorporated into the rear rail or other location at or near the rear of the rack, which also Can be incorporated into the floor of the rack, the track of the pusher, the top of the rack or in the divider wall. The receiver detects the signal sent from the transmitter. For example, LEDs can radiate light with a specific intensity. A phototransistor acting as a receiver detects the light signal emitted from the LED. The sensitivity of the phototransistor and the intensity of the LED can be adjusted by the microprocessor in order to adjust the overall sensitivity of the optics. In one embodiment, this adjustment can be done remotely. Thus, the transmitter may wirelessly communicate with the receiver by RF, IR or other known means such as magnetic fields, electric fields, acoustic waves, etc.

发射器和接收器可以与追踪发送和接收时间的控制器通信。该数据可以被提供给诸如微处理器或商店计算机之类的处理装置,因此在这个实施例中,推动器代码将包括发送和接收之间的时间间隔。关于发送信号的时间和接收信号的时间的信息可以由处理装置使用以确定信号的传送和接收之间的时间。基于这个时间长度,处理装置可以计算发射器和接收器之间的距离。知道了货架、推动器系统及其部件的尺寸后,该距离则可以被转换成货架的前侧6和推动器25的抵着产品饰面的背部偏置的面之间的距离。这样的转换是众所周知的并且在普通技术人员的知识范围内。如果饰面中的产品的相关尺寸是已知的,则处理装置然后可以基于产品的已知尺寸来计算饰面中的产品的数量。Transmitters and receivers can communicate with a controller that tracks transmission and reception times. This data can be provided to a processing device such as a microprocessor or store computer, so in this embodiment the pusher code will include the time interval between sending and receiving. The information about the time at which the signal was sent and the time at which the signal was received may be used by the processing device to determine the time between transmission and reception of the signal. Based on this length of time, the processing means can calculate the distance between the transmitter and receiver. Knowing the dimensions of the rack, the pusher system and its components, this distance can then be translated into the distance between the front side 6 of the rack and the face of the pusher 25 that is offset against the back of the product facing. Such conversions are well known and within the knowledge of the ordinary skilled artisan. If the relevant dimensions of the product in the finish are known, the processing device may then calculate the quantity of the product in the finish based on the known dimensions of the product.

在替代实施例中,发射器和接收器切换位置。发射器可以放置在货架的前部处、或后部处、或前部附近、或后部附近、或其他相对静止的位置处,并且接收器可以放置在推动器上或附近。在替代实施例中,发射器和接收器可以并入仅仅使信号从静止位置反射的相同装置中。例如,可以在推动器上放置反射器,并且使用激光器或其他光源的发射器/接收器可以基于传播时间来确定反射器与发射器/接收器之间的距离。可行的发射器/接收器的例子包括但不限于光学位移测量传感器和反射激光传感器。可以理解的是,如果使用发射器和接收器来确定距离,优选的是静止的部分的位置位于货架的前侧或后侧附近,以便使得距离计算更简单、并且避免在安装到货架的静止单元两侧上的对称距离的问题。例如,在货架的前部和后部之间的中间处安装发射器将使得确定推动器的位置更加复杂,因为对于给定的距离将存在两个可能的位置。In an alternate embodiment, the transmitter and receiver switch positions. The transmitter may be placed at the front of the shelf, or at the back, or near the front, or near the back, or at other relatively stationary locations, and the receiver may be placed on or near the pusher. In alternative embodiments, the transmitter and receiver may be incorporated into the same device that simply reflects the signal from a stationary position. For example, a reflector can be placed on the pusher, and a transmitter/receiver using a laser or other light source can determine the distance between the reflector and the transmitter/receiver based on the travel time. Examples of possible transmitter/receivers include, but are not limited to, optical displacement measurement sensors and reflective laser sensors. It will be appreciated that if transmitters and receivers are used to determine distance, it is preferred that the location of the stationary part be located near the front or rear side of the rack to make distance calculations simpler and to avoid the need for stationary units mounted to racks. The problem of symmetrical distances on both sides. For example, mounting the launcher midway between the front and rear of the shelf would make determining the position of the pusher more complicated since there would be two possible positions for a given distance.

在图9中描绘的实施例中,发射器(700、702)并入到推动器725中。发射器是发光二极管,并且位于推动器725上的允许发射器起作用的任何位置处。发射器可以位于推动器725的顶部处的700处或位于推动器725的基部处的702处或者位于推动器725上的其他位置处。In the embodiment depicted in FIG. 9 , the launchers ( 700 , 702 ) are incorporated into the pusher 725 . The emitters are light emitting diodes and are located anywhere on the pusher 725 that allows the emitters to function. The launcher may be located at 700 at the top of the pusher 725 or at 702 at the base of the pusher 725 or at other locations on the pusher 725 .

接收器位于相对于推动器725的运动固定的位置处。接收器可以是光电晶体管并且可以位于货架705的前部上(诸如接收器710),或者位于与货架的前部连接的前导轨708上(诸如接收器712)。接收器可以进一步位于货架的地板上的如714所示的任意数目的位置处、位于推动器轨道的地板上的 716处或位于货架705上方的位置处,诸如在安装在货架705的上方的另一货架(未示出)上。接收器可以位于分隔墙上720或722处或分隔墙上的其他位置处。接收器也可以位于后侧707附近的730或732处。优选地,接收器将被安装在前侧706或后侧707的附近,以使距离计算更简单。The receiver is located at a fixed position relative to the movement of the pusher 725 . The receiver may be a phototransistor and may be located on the front of the shelf 705 (such as receiver 710 ), or on the front rail 708 (such as receiver 712 ) connected to the front of the shelf. The receiver may further be located at any number of locations on the floor of the rack as shown at 714 , at 716 on the floor of the pusher track, or at a location above the rack 705 , such as at another location mounted above the rack 705 . on a shelf (not shown). The receiver may be located at 720 or 722 on the dividing wall or at other locations on the dividing wall. The receiver may also be located at 730 or 732 near the rear side 707 . Preferably, the receiver will be mounted near the front side 706 or the rear side 707 to make distance calculations simpler.

接收器和发射器也可以切换位置。推动器可以合并接收器,并且发射器可以被并入在位置710-732中的任何位置处以及相对于推动器的运动而固定的任何其它位置处。然而,优选地,发射器的位置将在前侧706或后侧707 附近,以便使距离计算更简单。The receiver and transmitter can also switch positions. The pusher may incorporate the receiver, and the transmitter may be incorporated at any of the positions 710-732 and any other position that is fixed relative to the movement of the pusher. Preferably, however, the location of the transmitter will be near the front side 706 or the rear side 707 in order to make distance calculations simpler.

在一实施例中,发射器位于700处,接收器位于710处。当推动器在货架上向后或向前移动时,安装在推动器725上的发射器700与推动器725一起移动。当推动器725位于货架背部附近时,信号将需要一定量的时间以从发射器700传播到接收器710。当推动器725位于更靠近货架的前部时,信号从发射器700传播到接收器710将花费较少的时间。关于信号的传送和接收的数据(即,推动器代码)被发送到微处理器或其他处理装置。处理装置确定信号从发射器传播到接收器所花费的时间量。知道信号传播速度,处理装置确定发射器和接收器之间的距离。In one embodiment, the transmitter is located at 700 and the receiver is located at 710 . The launcher 700 mounted on the pusher 725 moves with the pusher 725 when the pusher moves backward or forward on the shelf. When the pusher 725 is located near the back of the shelf, the signal will take a certain amount of time to propagate from the transmitter 700 to the receiver 710. When the pusher 725 is located closer to the front of the shelf, it will take less time for the signal to propagate from the transmitter 700 to the receiver 710. Data regarding the transmission and reception of signals (ie, pusher code) is sent to a microprocessor or other processing device. The processing device determines the amount of time it takes for the signal to travel from the transmitter to the receiver. Knowing the speed of signal propagation, the processing means determines the distance between the transmitter and receiver.

通过理解发射器相对于产品的位置以及理解接收器相对于货架的前部或背部的位置,处理装置将能够确定推动器与货架的前部之间的距离。利用产品的尺寸,处理装置则可以确定饰面中的产品的数量。发光二极管或其他发射器可以被设置为周期性地、连续地或者根据来自远程位置的命令而起作用。By understanding the position of the transmitter relative to the product and understanding the position of the receiver relative to the front or back of the rack, the processing device will be able to determine the distance between the pusher and the front of the rack. Using the dimensions of the product, the processing device can then determine the quantity of product in the finish. Light emitting diodes or other transmitters may be set to function periodically, continuously, or upon command from a remote location.

替代地,处理装置可以控制LED和光电晶体管两者。处理装置可记录微处理器发出命令以从LED产生脉冲的时间T1和光电晶体管检测到光信号的时间T2。这两个时间T1和T2都可以存储在存储器中并用于使用上述关系来确定饰面中的产品的数量。Alternatively, the processing device may control both the LED and the phototransistor. The processing device may record the time T1 when the microprocessor issues a command to generate a pulse from the LED and the time T2 when the phototransistor detects the light signal. Both times T1 and T2 can be stored in memory and used to determine the quantity of product in the finish using the above relationship.

在替代的感测环境中,可以使用电容式接近传感器来测量货架的前部与推动器或产品饰面中的最末产品之间的距离。电容式接近传感器检测作为电容式接近传感器的目标的推动器。电容式接近传感器产生指向目标的静电场。当推动器相对于电容式接近传感器的位置的距离改变时,电容式接近传感器对由推动器相对于传感器的移动引起的电容变化作出反应。In an alternative sensing environment, capacitive proximity sensors can be used to measure the distance between the front of the shelf and the last product in the pusher or product finish. The capacitive proximity sensor detects the pusher that is the target of the capacitive proximity sensor. Capacitive proximity sensors generate an electrostatic field that is directed towards the target. When the distance of the pusher relative to the position of the capacitive proximity sensor changes, the capacitive proximity sensor reacts to the change in capacitance caused by the movement of the pusher relative to the sensor.

额外的感测环境也可以包括使用磁性接近传感器或电感式接近传感器。在这两个感测环境中,接近传感器可以被用来测量货架前部与推动器或者与产品饰面中的最末产品之间的距离。Additional sensing environments may also include the use of magnetic proximity sensors or inductive proximity sensors. In both sensing environments, proximity sensors can be used to measure the distance between the front of the shelf and the pusher or the last product in the product finish.

电感式接近传感器在检测金属目标方面是有用的,因为电感式接近传感器使用感应场来感测目标物体。在具有电感式接近传感器的实施例中,当推动器相对于电感式接近传感器的位置的距离改变时,可以检测到推动器相对于电感式接近度传感器的接近度。类似地,也可以利用基于霍尔效应原理的磁性接近传感器来感测推动器的位置。Inductive proximity sensors are useful in detecting metallic targets because inductive proximity sensors use an inductive field to sense the target object. In embodiments with an inductive proximity sensor, the proximity of the pusher relative to the inductive proximity sensor may be detected when the distance of the pusher relative to the position of the inductive proximity sensor changes. Similarly, a magnetic proximity sensor based on the Hall effect principle can also be used to sense the position of the pusher.

在一实施例中,接近传感器可以安装在后侧707附近,接近传感器被配置成感测到推动器25的距离。诸如商店计算机或微处理器的处理装置可以确定推动器725与前侧706之间的距离并且使用该距离来确定货架上留下多少产品。In one embodiment, a proximity sensor may be mounted near the rear side 707 , the proximity sensor being configured to sense the distance to the pusher 25 . A processing device such as a store computer or microprocessor can determine the distance between the pusher 725 and the front side 706 and use this distance to determine how much product is left on the shelf.

在替代实施例中,具有唯一身份代码的射频识别应答器(“RFIT”)被安装到推动器725。包括发射器/接收器的传感器组件可以安装在货架705的后侧707上。发射器/接收器在被激活时传送激活RFIT的激活信号。RFIT在激活时传送包括唯一识别代码的响应信号。发射器/接收器从RFIT接收响应信号。传感器组件配备有计时装置,并测量从发射器/接收器初始发射信号直到从RFIT接收到响应信号之间的时间。在一实施例中,控制器可以启动信号的传送并将响应信号的接收记录到存储器中。控制器还配备有计时装置来测量延迟。可以使用时间延迟来计算发射器/接收器与RFIT之间的距离。在一实施例中,控制器可以计算距离并提供包括该距离的推动器代码。替代地,推动器代码将包括关于延迟的数据,且推动器代码将被转发到处理装置用于距离计算。如上所述,推动器25与发射器/接收器之间的距离可用于计算货架中剩余的产品的量。In an alternate embodiment, a radio frequency identification transponder ("RFIT") with a unique identification code is mounted to the pusher 725. A sensor assembly including a transmitter/receiver may be mounted on the rear side 707 of the shelf 705 . The transmitter/receiver, when activated, transmits an activation signal that activates the RFIT. The RFIT transmits a response signal including a unique identification code upon activation. The transmitter/receiver receives the response signal from the RFIT. The sensor assembly is equipped with a timing device and measures the time between the initial transmission of a signal from the transmitter/receiver until the receipt of a response signal from the RFIT. In one embodiment, the controller may initiate the transmission of the signal and record the receipt of the response signal in memory. The controller is also equipped with a timing device to measure the delay. The time delay can be used to calculate the distance between the transmitter/receiver and the RFIT. In one embodiment, the controller may calculate the distance and provide a pusher code that includes the distance. Alternatively, the pusher code would include data on the delay, and the pusher code would be forwarded to the processing device for distance calculations. As mentioned above, the distance between the pusher 25 and the transmitter/receiver can be used to calculate the amount of product remaining in the shelf.

RFIT与发射器/接收器结合使用的优点是其可以容易地改装到现有的系统。由于RFIT不需要内部功率,因此该实施例消除了在推动器725上提供被供电装置的需要。然而,发射器/接收器是被供电的。优选地,发射器/接收器传送聚焦的或低功率信号,使得仅激活与发射器/接收器相关联的RFIT。替代地,发射器/接收器忽略来自RFIT的不包括适当的唯一识别代码的响应信号。The advantage of using RFIT in combination with a transmitter/receiver is that it can be easily retrofitted to existing systems. Since the RFIT does not require internal power, this embodiment eliminates the need to provide powered devices on the pusher 725. However, the transmitter/receiver is powered. Preferably, the transmitter/receiver transmits a focused or low power signal such that only the RFIT associated with the transmitter/receiver is activated. Alternatively, the transmitter/receiver ignores response signals from the RFIT that do not include an appropriate unique identification code.

在另一替代实施例中,可使用低功率的单芯片雷达传感器来确定雷达传感器与推动器725之间的距离。优选地,雷达传感器可以安装在后侧707附近,以便使得距离确定更简单。In another alternative embodiment, a low power single chip radar sensor may be used to determine the distance between the radar sensor and the pusher 725 . Preferably, a radar sensor may be mounted near the rear side 707 in order to make distance determination simpler.

在本发明的替代实施例中,可以使用用于测量用于推动产品的弹簧的张力的装置。弹簧上的张力将至少部分取决于推动器前面的产品的数量。随着更多的产品被放置在推动器前面,弹簧进一步压缩或膨胀。在螺旋弹簧的情况下,随着更多的产品被放置在推动器前面,弹簧的两端进一步移动开并且弹簧进一步展开。当弹簧展开时,弹簧的剩余卷内的张力或压力的量增加。通过测量弹簧的张力,可以确定展开的弹簧的长度。In an alternative embodiment of the invention, a device for measuring the tension of the spring used to push the product may be used. The tension on the spring will depend at least in part on the amount of product in front of the pusher. The spring compresses or expands further as more product is placed in front of the pusher. In the case of a coil spring, the ends of the spring move further apart and the spring expands further as more product is placed in front of the pusher. As the spring unwinds, the amount of tension or pressure within the remaining coil of the spring increases. By measuring the tension of the spring, the length of the deployed spring can be determined.

弹簧张力测量装置可以包含处理装置或者可以将其测量的信息传送给微处理器或其他处理装置。利用对弹簧上的张力如何与弹簧的长度相关的先前的理解,处理装置可以确定展开的弹簧的量或长度。例如,如果螺旋弹簧具有固定的弹簧常数“k”,则可以使用公式F=-kX来计算展开的弹簧的长度。该信息可以用来确定货架的前部和推动器之间的距离。通过了解产品的尺寸,计算装置可以则确定饰面中产品的数量。The spring tension measurement device may contain a processing device or may transmit the information it measures to a microprocessor or other processing device. Using a prior understanding of how the tension on the spring is related to the length of the spring, the processing device can determine the amount or length of the deployed spring. For example, if the coil spring has a fixed spring constant "k", the length of the unrolled spring can be calculated using the formula F=-kX. This information can be used to determine the distance between the front of the rack and the pusher. By knowing the dimensions of the product, the computing device can then determine the number of products in the finish.

弹簧张力测量装置可以包括力测量单元,该力测量单元包括但不限于应变仪、张力计、扭矩换能器或用以确定施加在螺旋弹簧上的张力的一些其他力测量装置。力测量单元优选地连接到控制器,其中控制器被配置为将来自力测量单元的数据转换成力值。控制器然后可以将力值传送给处理装置。在该实施例中,推动器代码将包括力值。测量弹簧张力的许多其他方法对于本领域技术人员将是显而易见的并且在本发明的范围内。The spring tension measurement device may include a force measurement unit including, but not limited to, strain gauges, tensiometers, torque transducers, or some other force measurement device to determine the tension exerted on the coil spring. The force measurement unit is preferably connected to a controller, wherein the controller is configured to convert data from the force measurement unit into force values. The controller can then communicate the force value to the processing device. In this embodiment, the pusher code will include the force value. Many other methods of measuring spring tension will be apparent to those skilled in the art and are within the scope of the present invention.

在本发明的一替代实施例中,在特定饰面中的剩余的产品的数量部分地通过使用放置在产品的相对横向侧上的一个或多个发射器和一个或多个接收器来确定。在一个实施例中,发射器或接收器可以放置在将产品饰面分开的分隔壁上。在一个实施例中,一系列发射器并入到分隔壁的基部中或上。一系列接收器并入到分隔壁的另一侧中或上。以这种方式,当产品在货架上时,被推动的那些产品在一个分隔壁上的发射器和另一个分隔壁上的接收器之间。In an alternative embodiment of the invention, the amount of product remaining in a particular finish is determined in part by using one or more transmitters and one or more receivers placed on opposite lateral sides of the product. In one embodiment, the transmitter or receiver may be placed on a dividing wall separating the product finishes. In one embodiment, a series of emitters are incorporated into or on the base of the dividing wall. A series of receivers are incorporated into or on the other side of the dividing wall. In this way, when products are on the shelf, those products that are pushed are between the transmitters on one divider wall and the receivers on the other divider wall.

发射器周期性地(当被发起(promote)时)或连续地发送信号。如果发射器和接收器之间没有产品,接收器将接收到信号。如果发射器和接收器之间有产品,则产品将阻挡信号,接收器将不会接收到信号。The transmitter sends the signal periodically (when promoted) or continuously. If there is no product between the transmitter and receiver, the receiver will receive the signal. If there is a product between the transmitter and receiver, the product will block the signal and the receiver will not receive the signal.

微处理器接收关于各个接收器是否接收到信号的信息。根据这些信息,微处理器可以确定饰面的前部和饰面中的最后产品之间的大致距离。通过了解产品的尺寸,可以将有关信号的接收和不接收的信息转换成对特定饰面中的产品的大致数量的了解。在一实施例中,使用一个发射器和一个接收器来指示特定货架上的相关联的产品变得不足。在该实施例中,发射器/接收器的位置优选地更接近前侧706而不是后侧707。优选地,具有唯一标识代码的控制器与发射器和接收器相关联,使得唯一标识代码可以与产品相关联。The microprocessor receives information as to whether the respective receivers received the signal. From this information, the microprocessor can determine the approximate distance between the front of the veneer and the final product in the veneer. By knowing the dimensions of the product, information about the reception and non-reception of the signal can be translated into an understanding of the approximate quantity of the product in a particular finish. In one embodiment, one transmitter and one receiver are used to indicate that the associated product on a particular shelf is becoming insufficient. In this embodiment, the transmitter/receiver location is preferably closer to the front side 706 than to the rear side 707 . Preferably, a controller with a unique identification code is associated with the transmitter and receiver so that the unique identification code can be associated with the product.

发射器和接收器可以被并入到试图从固定到特定位置的预定目标反弹信号的相同装置中。如果信号如预期那样反弹,则指示发射器和目标位置之间没有产品。如果信号没有如预期那样反弹,则在发射器和目标位置之间存在产品。The transmitter and receiver can be incorporated into the same device that attempts to bounce a signal from a predetermined target fixed to a particular location. If the signal bounces as expected, it indicates that there is no product between the transmitter and the target location. If the signal does not bounce as expected, there is a product between the transmitter and the target location.

图10描绘了货架和推动器组件的替代实施例的局部分解图,该货架具有分隔壁。如图10所示,多个发射器750被放置在分隔壁左侧上接近底部。如752所示,发射器也可以放置在分隔壁上的更高处。对应的接收器760放置在分隔壁的右侧接近底部。如762所示,这些接收器也可以放置在分隔壁上的更高处。接收器和发射器被定位为使得无阻碍的信号可以从发射器发送并由对应的接收器接收。当产品(诸如产品P)定位于推动器的前面时,产品可以阻碍从发射器发送的信号。如图10所示,产品P(以虚线示出)将防止信号到达距货架的前侧6最近的接收器760。定位为比产品P更靠后的接收器将接收发送给它们的信号。微处理器接收关于每个接收器760是否接收到信号的信息。基于该信息,微处理器可以确定货架的前部和特定饰面中的最后的产品之间的距离。通过了解每个产品的宽度,微处理器可以确定特定饰面中的产品数量。10 depicts a partially exploded view of an alternate embodiment of a shelf and pusher assembly, the shelf having a dividing wall. As shown in FIG. 10, a plurality of emitters 750 are placed on the left side of the partition wall near the bottom. As shown at 752, the emitter can also be placed higher on the dividing wall. The corresponding receiver 760 is placed on the right side of the dividing wall near the bottom. As shown at 762, these receivers can also be placed higher on the dividing wall. The receiver and transmitter are positioned so that unobstructed signals can be sent from the transmitter and received by the corresponding receiver. When a product, such as product P, is positioned in front of the pusher, the product may obstruct the signal sent from the transmitter. As shown in Figure 10, product P (shown in phantom) will prevent the signal from reaching the receiver 760 closest to the front side 6 of the shelf. Receivers positioned further back than product P will receive the signal sent to them. The microprocessor receives information as to whether each receiver 760 received a signal. Based on this information, the microprocessor can determine the distance between the front of the shelf and the last product in a particular finish. By knowing the width of each product, the microprocessor can determine the number of products in a particular finish.

在本发明的一个实施例中,当推动器在货架上向后或向前移动时,推动器接触各种感测装置。感测装置被放置在推动器的下方、上方或侧面的表面上。这些感测装置包括机械的、电的和电机械的、光学的和磁性的装置,并且可以包括弹簧加载的闩锁、电触点、发光二极管或金属电线或诸如线性位置传感器的其他传感器。In one embodiment of the invention, the pusher contacts various sensing devices as it moves backwards or forwards on the shelf. The sensing device is placed on the surface below, above or to the side of the pusher. These sensing devices include mechanical, electrical and electromechanical, optical and magnetic devices, and may include spring loaded latches, electrical contacts, light emitting diodes or metal wires or other sensors such as linear position sensors.

当推动器在货架上向后或向前移动时,它与感测装置相互作用。推动器可以通过推动器和装置的机械接触与装置相互作用。推动器还可以配备有独立的感测装置,当推动器向后或向前移动时,独立的感测装置与静止的感测装置相互作用。As the pusher moves backwards or forwards on the shelf, it interacts with the sensing device. The pusher can interact with the device through mechanical contact between the pusher and the device. The pusher may also be equipped with independent sensing means that interact with the stationary sensing means when the pusher is moved backwards or forwards.

关于推动器和感测装置之间的相互作用的信息(即,推动器代码)被发送到处理装置。基于与推动器相互作用的装置的确定,处理装置可以确定推动器相对于货架的前部的大致位置。通过了解产品数据(诸如产品的尺寸),处理装置则可以确定与推动器和感测装置相关的特定饰面中的产品的大致数量。Information about the interaction between the pusher and the sensing device (ie the pusher code) is sent to the processing device. Based on the determination of the device interacting with the pusher, the processing device may determine the approximate position of the pusher relative to the front of the shelf. By knowing product data, such as the dimensions of the product, the processing device can then determine the approximate amount of product in a particular finish associated with the pusher and sensing device.

在一实施例中,如图11所示,感测装置810、811和812被并入到产品搁置于其上的轨道的基部中。当产品直接搁置在开关上时,感测装置被关闭。当产品被移除并且推动器825向前行进时,位于推动器825的后部的感测装置被释放并打开。控制器确定哪些感测装置打开或关闭。基于该信息,处理装置可以确定推动器825与货架的前侧806之间的大致距离。知道产品的尺寸,处理装置可以确定特定饰面中的产品的数量。In one embodiment, as shown in Figure 11, the sensing devices 810, 811 and 812 are incorporated into the base of the track on which the product rests. When the product rests directly on the switch, the sensing device is turned off. When the product is removed and the pusher 825 travels forward, the sensing device at the rear of the pusher 825 is released and turned on. The controller determines which sensing devices are turned on or off. Based on this information, the processing device can determine the approximate distance between the pusher 825 and the front side 806 of the shelf. Knowing the dimensions of the product, the processing unit can determine the quantity of product in a particular finish.

在替代实施例中,如图12所示,感测装置814、815、816、817和818 被放置在推动器轨道802上。单独的触点(未示出)被放置在推动器825的底部上。推动器825上的触点被配置为使得当推动器825上的触点邻近安装在推动器轨道802上的感测装置时,推动器轨道802上的感测装置被激活。当感测装置被激活时,信号被发送到处理装置,该信号提供关于哪个感测装置已被激活的信息。基于该信息,处理装置可以确定推动器距货架的前部的大致距离。知道关于产品的附加数据,诸如产品尺寸,处理装置可以确定特定饰面中的产品的数量。In an alternate embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12 , sensing devices 814 , 815 , 816 , 817 and 818 are placed on the pusher track 802 . Individual contacts (not shown) are placed on the bottom of the pusher 825 . The contacts on the pusher 825 are configured such that the sensing devices on the pusher track 802 are activated when the contacts on the pusher 825 are adjacent to the sensing devices mounted on the pusher track 802 . When the sensing device is activated, a signal is sent to the processing device which provides information on which sensing device has been activated. Based on this information, the processing device can determine the approximate distance of the pusher from the front of the shelf. Knowing additional data about the product, such as product dimensions, the processing device can determine the quantity of product in a particular finish.

例如,在触点816被激活的同时,处理装置可以确定产品的量等于可以安置在触点816和货架801的前侧806之间的空间中的产品的量。在触点816 被激活然后被停用的情况下,处理装置可以确定推动器825在触点815和817 之间。因此,这提供了推动器825的大致位置,并且可以使用该大致位置来确定货架上剩余的产品的大致数量。在一实施例中,触点可以在货架801的前侧806附近一起间隔得更近,使得随着货架上的产品量的减少可以进行更精确的测量。替代地,可以使用足够的触点来提供推动器825的相对精确的位置。For example, while the contact 816 is activated, the processing device may determine that the amount of product is equal to the amount of product that may be placed in the space between the contact 816 and the front side 806 of the shelf 801 . Where contact 816 is activated and then deactivated, the processing device may determine that pusher 825 is between contacts 815 and 817 . Thus, this provides the approximate location of the pusher 825, and this approximate location can be used to determine the approximate amount of product remaining on the shelf. In one embodiment, the contacts can be spaced closer together near the front side 806 of the shelf 801 so that more accurate measurements can be made as the amount of product on the shelf decreases. Alternatively, enough contacts may be used to provide a relatively precise position of the pusher 825 .

在替代实施例中,如图13所示,触点819、820、821和822可以安装到分隔壁803。与触点814-818一样,触点819-822中的一个的激活指示了推动器825的位置或大致位置。沿着分隔壁803定位触点可有助于防止货架上的产品意外激活触点的问题。与安装在推动器轨道802中的触点一样,触点819-822之间的距离可以是不均匀的,使得在货架变得较不满时提供更高的精度。In an alternate embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13 , contacts 819 , 820 , 821 and 822 may be mounted to partition wall 803 . As with contacts 814-818, activation of one of contacts 819-822 indicates the position or approximate position of pusher 825. Positioning the contacts along the divider wall 803 can help prevent problems with accidental activation of the contacts by products on the shelf. As with the contacts mounted in the pusher track 802, the distance between the contacts 819-822 may be non-uniform, providing greater accuracy as the shelf becomes less full.

在类似于上述实施例的替代实施例中,用于检测和传达推动器组件在货架上的位置的货架管理系统900被描绘在图14中。货架管理系统900可以包括推动器组件915、灯组件和控制模块940。推动器组件915、灯组件和控制模块940都可以固定到陈列台壁905或保持产品910的类似结构。产品910 可以沿着推动器组件915对齐或布置。另外,如图14所示,产品910可以被包含在单独的产品容器盒912中。In an alternative embodiment similar to that described above, a shelf management system 900 for detecting and communicating the position of a pusher assembly on a shelf is depicted in FIG. 14 . Shelf management system 900 may include pusher assembly 915 , light assembly and control module 940 . Pusher assembly 915 , light assembly and control module 940 may all be secured to display stand wall 905 or similar structure that holds product 910 . Product 910 may be aligned or arranged along pusher assembly 915 . Additionally, as shown in FIG. 14 , the product 910 may be contained in a separate product container box 912 .

如所示出的,推动器组件915可以包括诸如螺旋弹簧之类的偏置机构。推动器组件915可以在分隔壁922的一侧或两侧上包括整体的分隔壁922和地板部分920。螺旋弹簧可以与推动器925可操作地连接或相关联,并且可以用于将推动器925和相关联的产品910推向货架的前侧。推动器组件915 可以是模块化的,并且可以包括分隔壁或适配或配合就位的附加的地板部分。另外,由于本发明不与推动器组件915连接,本发明可以与任何产品货架系统一起工作。As shown, the pusher assembly 915 may include a biasing mechanism such as a coil spring. The pusher assembly 915 may include an integral divider wall 922 and a floor portion 920 on one or both sides of the divider wall 922 . A coil spring may be operably connected or associated with pusher 925 and may be used to push pusher 925 and associated product 910 toward the front side of the shelf. Pusher assembly 915 may be modular and may include dividing walls or additional floor sections that fit or fit in place. Additionally, since the present invention is not connected to the pusher assembly 915, the present invention can work with any product shelving system.

灯组件可以包括光通道930和光收发器932。光收发器932可以是位于光通道930上的许多光收发器中的一个。光收发器932可以位于在货架上被测量的产品910的后面。光收发器932可以由光发射器934和光传感器936 组成。光发射器934被配置为朝向推动器925发送光信号935,而光传感器 936被配置为从推动器925接收光信号935。在替代实施例中,光发射器934 和光传感器936可以是与光收发器932的一部分相同的部件。光通道930上的光发射器934和光传感器936的间隔可以确保至少一个光发射器934和一个光传感器936聚焦在每个推动器925上或者看见每个推动器925。另外,光通道930可以包括电子连接938。The light assembly may include an optical channel 930 and an optical transceiver 932 . Optical transceiver 932 may be one of many optical transceivers located on optical channel 930 . The optical transceiver 932 may be located behind the product 910 being measured on the shelf. Optical transceiver 932 may consist of optical transmitter 934 and optical sensor 936 . Light transmitter 934 is configured to transmit light signal 935 towards pusher 925, and light sensor 936 is configured to receive light signal 935 from pusher 925. In alternative embodiments, light transmitter 934 and light sensor 936 may be the same components as part of light transceiver 932 . The spacing of the light emitters 934 and light sensors 936 on the light channel 930 can ensure that at least one light emitter 934 and one light sensor 936 are focused on or seen by each pusher 925 . Additionally, optical channel 930 may include electrical connections 938 .

在不脱离本发明的情况下,灯组件可以利用许多不同类型的光中的一种,其中被利用的一种类型的光处于“红外光谱”中。例如,灯组件可以包括红外(IR)收发器,其中IR收发器可以由IR发送器和IR传感器组成。The lamp assembly may utilize one of many different types of light without departing from the invention, with one type of light being utilized being in the "infrared spectrum". For example, the light assembly may include an infrared (IR) transceiver, where the IR transceiver may consist of an IR transmitter and an IR sensor.

如图14所示,货架管理系统900还可以包括控制模块940。控制模块 940可以与光通道930上的电子连接938对齐并锁定到位。控制模块940可以包括微计算机。另外,控制模块930可具有内部无线能力而不偏离本发明。As shown in FIG. 14 , the shelf management system 900 may also include a control module 940 . The control module 940 can be aligned with the electrical connections 938 on the light channel 930 and locked in place. The control module 940 may include a microcomputer. Additionally, the control module 930 may have internal wireless capabilities without departing from the invention.

如图14所示,产品910可以由货架管理系统900中的弹簧推动式推动器925或推动器板向前推动。当产品910被向前推动时,从光通道930上的光发射器934传送光信号935。光信号935然后可以反射离开推动器板925 或产品910的背部,然后返回到光传感器936。该信息然后可以被转送到控制模块940,从而测量到推动器925或产品910的距离。光收发器932可以由连接到光收发器932的控制模块940和微计算机控制。将光信号935发送到推动器板925或产品910和从推动器板925或产品910发送光信号935的过程可以连续或接近连续地进行,诸如几分之一秒,或者可以周期性地进行,诸如一秒、或5秒。As shown in FIG. 14 , the product 910 may be pushed forward by a spring pushed pusher 925 or pusher plate in the shelf management system 900 . When the product 910 is pushed forward, an optical signal 935 is transmitted from the optical transmitter 934 on the optical channel 930. The light signal 935 may then reflect off the pusher plate 925 or the back of the product 910 and return to the light sensor 936 . This information can then be forwarded to the control module 940 to measure the distance to the pusher 925 or the product 910. The optical transceiver 932 may be controlled by a control module 940 and a microcomputer connected to the optical transceiver 932 . The process of sending the optical signal 935 to and from the pusher plate 925 or the product 910 may be performed continuously or nearly continuously, such as a fraction of a second, or may be performed periodically, Such as one second, or 5 seconds.

在本发明的一方面中,控制模块940中的微计算机可以比较推动器925 的最新位置与推动器的先前位置。推动器925的位置的差异可以导致微计算机确定货架管理系统900的状况。首先,微计算机可以确定自从上次读取以来没有发生活动。第二,微计算机可以确定正常的购物事例已经发生,并且如果这样的话可以确定还有多少产品包装仍在被推动器925推动。第三,如果大于预定数量的产品包装已经在小于预定量的时间内被移除,则微计算机可以确定潜在盗窃情况正在进行中。可以传达的另一个状况是低产品状况。例如,如果任何推动器位置处没有产品包装、或者少于预定数量的产品包装仍在由推进器925推动,则微计算机可以确定低产品状况。In one aspect of the invention, the microcomputer in the control module 940 may compare the latest position of the pusher 925 with the previous position of the pusher. Differences in the position of the pusher 925 may cause the microcomputer to determine the condition of the shelf management system 900 . First, the microcomputer can determine that no activity has occurred since the last read. Second, the microcomputer can determine that a normal shopping event has occurred, and if so can determine how many product packages are still being pushed by the pusher 925. Third, the microcomputer may determine that a potential theft situation is in progress if more than a predetermined amount of product packaging has been removed in less than a predetermined amount of time. Another condition that can be communicated is a low product condition. For example, if there are no product packages at any pusher location, or less than a predetermined number of product packages are still being pushed by pusher 925, the microcomputer may determine a low product condition.

如图14所示,在不偏离本发明的情况下,货架管理系统可以包括本地音频盒950。上述任何情况都可以由到本地音频盒950的微计算机经由有线或无线通信装置远程传达到远程计算机、商店公告系统、手机、寻呼机或远程通知器。另外,在不偏离本发明的情况下,货架管理系统可以包括光通知器960。上述任何情况都可以由到光通知器960的微计算机经由有线或无线手段远程地传达到远程计算机、商店公告系统、手机、寻呼机或远程通知器。控制模块940的内部无线能力可以将信号无线传送到远程位置或从远程位置传送信号,以指示货架管理系统的状况。As shown in Figure 14, the shelf management system may include a local audio box 950 without departing from the invention. Any of the above may be communicated remotely by the microcomputer to the local audio box 950 via wired or wireless communication means to a remote computer, store announcement system, cell phone, pager or remote notifier. Additionally, the shelf management system may include optical notifiers 960 without departing from the invention. Any of the above may be communicated remotely by the microcomputer to the optical notifier 960 via wired or wireless means to a remote computer, store announcement system, cell phone, pager or remote notifier. The internal wireless capabilities of the control module 940 may wirelessly transmit signals to and from a remote location to indicate the condition of the shelf management system.

另外,对于图14所示的货架系统900,可以测量货架上排列的产品的数量。在这样的实施例中,推动器925的位置可以用于确定货架上的产品910 的量,而不需要手动计数产品。例如,光收发器932将光信号935传送到推动器925或产品910。光信号935然后可以被反射回到光收发器932,以通过测量和计算在光收发器932处接收光信号935的时间来确定推动器925的位置。当例如由购买者移除一个产品时,在光收发器932处接收返回的光信号935的时间增加特定量。基于产品910的尺寸,特别是基于产品的厚度,控制模块可以通过光信号有多快地传播回到光收发器932的算法而计算已经从货架移除了多少产品。控制模块还可以部分地使用关于货架尺寸(包括货架深度)的信息来计算剩余在推动器前面的货架上的产品的数量。此外,该系统还可用于库存管理模式,以帮助零售商确定用于库存目的的产品数量,并在低库存或无库存情况下补货。在不脱离本发明的情况下,用户可以在货架上的产品910的设置或加载期间将产品910的厚度作为设置输入到控制模块940中。另外,在不脱离本发明的情况下,产品910的厚度可以在从系统 (诸如用于确定产品910的厚度的智能系统或学习系统)获取多个不同读数之后由控制模块940确定。Additionally, with the racking system 900 shown in FIG. 14, the number of products lined up on the racks can be measured. In such an embodiment, the position of the pusher 925 can be used to determine the amount of product 910 on the shelf without manually counting the products. For example, optical transceiver 932 transmits optical signal 935 to pusher 925 or product 910 . The optical signal 935 may then be reflected back to the optical transceiver 932 to determine the position of the pusher 925 by measuring and calculating the time at which the optical signal 935 is received at the optical transceiver 932 . When a product is removed, eg, by a buyer, the time at which the returned optical signal 935 is received at the optical transceiver 932 is increased by a certain amount. Based on the size of the product 910, and in particular based on the thickness of the product, the control module can calculate how much product has been removed from the shelf through an algorithm of how fast the optical signal propagates back to the optical transceiver 932. The control module may also use, in part, information about shelf dimensions (including shelf depth) to calculate the amount of product remaining on the shelf in front of the pusher. In addition, the system can also be used in an inventory management mode to help retailers determine the quantity of products for stocking purposes and replenish them in low or no stock situations. A user may enter the thickness of the product 910 as a setting into the control module 940 during setup or loading of the product 910 on the shelf without departing from the invention. Additionally, the thickness of the product 910 may be determined by the control module 940 after taking a number of different readings from a system, such as an intelligent system or a learning system for determining the thickness of the product 910, without departing from the invention.

当产品被初始备货在系统中时,产品的厚度也可以由系统确定。当货架上没有产品时,光收发器932将光信号935传送到推动器925。光信号935 然后可以被反射回到光收发器932,以通过测量和计算在光收发器932处接收光信号935的时间来确定推动器925的位置。当例如由雇员将一个产品添加到货架时,在光收发器932处接收返回的光信号935的时间减少了特定的量。基于这个时间量的减少,控制模块可以计算产品的厚度。The thickness of the product may also be determined by the system when the product is initially stocked in the system. The optical transceiver 932 transmits the optical signal 935 to the pusher 925 when there is no product on the shelf. The optical signal 935 may then be reflected back to the optical transceiver 932 to determine the position of the pusher 925 by measuring and calculating the time at which the optical signal 935 is received at the optical transceiver 932 . When a product is added to a shelf, eg, by an employee, the time to receive the returned optical signal 935 at the optical transceiver 932 is reduced by a certain amount. Based on the reduction in this amount of time, the control module can calculate the thickness of the product.

在类似于上述实施例的替代实施例中,图15A和15B示出了用于检测和传达推动器组件在货架上的位置的另一货架管理系统1000,其类似于上文所述和图14所示的货架管理系统900。货架管理系统1000可以包括推动器组件1015、激光组件和控制模块1040。推动器组件1015、激光组件和控制模块1040都可以固定到陈列台壁1005或保持产品1010的类似结构。产品 1010可以沿着推动器组件1015对齐或布置。另外,如图15所示,产品1010 可以被包含在单独的产品容器盒1012中。In an alternative embodiment similar to that described above, Figures 15A and 15B illustrate another shelf management system 1000 for detecting and communicating the position of a pusher assembly on a shelf, similar to that described above and Figure 14 Shelf management system 900 is shown. The shelf management system 1000 may include a pusher assembly 1015 , a laser assembly, and a control module 1040 . The pusher assembly 1015 , the laser assembly, and the control module 1040 may all be secured to the display stand wall 1005 or similar structure that holds the product 1010 . Product 1010 may be aligned or arranged along pusher assembly 1015. Additionally, as shown in FIG. 15, the product 1010 may be contained in a separate product container box 1012.

推动器组件1015可以包括诸如片状螺旋弹簧之类的偏置机构。推动器组件1015可以在分隔壁1022的一侧或两侧上包括整体的分隔壁1022和地板部分920。片状螺旋弹簧可以与推动器1025可操作地连接,并且可以用于将推动器1025和相关联的产品1010推向货架的前侧。推动器组件1015可以是模块化的,并且可以包括分隔壁或适配或配合在为的附加的地板部分。Pusher assembly 1015 may include a biasing mechanism such as a leaf coil spring. The pusher assembly 1015 may include an integral divider wall 1022 and a floor portion 920 on one or both sides of the divider wall 1022 . A leaf coil spring can be operably connected to the pusher 1025 and can be used to push the pusher 1025 and associated product 1010 towards the front side of the shelf. The pusher assembly 1015 may be modular and may include divider walls or additional floor sections that fit or fit in it.

激光组件可以包括后部反射器带1030和单个光收发器或激光扫描仪 1032。激光扫描仪1032可以发射或传送激光或输出束1035。激光扫描仪1032 可以包括位于激光扫描仪1032内或与激光扫描仪1032相关联的移动反射镜或旋转反射镜(未示出)。在不脱离本发明的情况下,代替移动反射镜或除了移动反射镜之外,激光扫描仪1032可以包括集成电路镜技术,诸如用于数字光投影仪(DLP)领域中的微机电系统(MEMS)反射镜,其中,使用微小的显微反射镜阵列来引导和改变输出束1035。移动反射镜可以在激光扫描仪内旋转以改变从激光扫描仪1032发射的输出束1035。输出束1035的透射和角度也可以通过其他各种方式改变。移动反射镜可以由控制模块1040 内的微计算机控制。移动反射镜可以以各种角度引导来自激光扫描仪1032 的输出束1035,从而产生扫掠束1037。扫掠束1037可以沿着后部反射器带被引导。在图15B中示出了扫掠束1037的一部分的示例。从激光扫描仪1032 向推动器板1025或产品1010传送扫掠束1037的过程以及从推动器板1025 或产品1010传送扫掠束1037的过程可以连续或接近连续地进行,例如几分之一秒、一秒或五秒。The laser assembly may include a rear reflector strip 1030 and a single optical transceiver or laser scanner 1032. Laser scanner 1032 may emit or transmit a laser or output beam 1035 . Laser scanner 1032 may include a moving mirror or a rotating mirror (not shown) within or associated with laser scanner 1032 . In lieu of or in addition to moving mirrors, laser scanner 1032 may include integrated circuit mirror technology such as microelectromechanical systems (MEMS) used in the digital light projector (DLP) field without departing from the invention ) mirrors, where an array of tiny microscopic mirrors is used to direct and alter the output beam 1035. The moving mirror can be rotated within the laser scanner to alter the output beam 1035 emitted from the laser scanner 1032 . The transmission and angle of the output beam 1035 can also be varied in various other ways. The moving mirrors may be controlled by a microcomputer within the control module 1040 . The moving mirror can direct the output beam 1035 from the laser scanner 1032 at various angles, resulting in a swept beam 1037 . The swept beam 1037 may be directed along the rear reflector strip. An example of a portion of the swept beam 1037 is shown in Figure 15B. The process of delivering the sweep beam 1037 from the laser scanner 1032 to the pusher plate 1025 or the product 1010 and from the pusher plate 1025 or the product 1010 may occur continuously or nearly continuously, such as a fraction of a second , one second, or five seconds.

如图15A和15B中进一步所示,后部反射器带1030可以包括分段线性反射镜或光滑固定反射镜1034。固定反射镜1034可以沿着后部反射器带 1030定位。固定反射镜1034可以沿着、平行于或接近平行于扫掠束1037 的路径,使得每个单个的固定反射镜1034沿着其扫掠路径(如图15B所示) 拦截输出束1035。固定反射镜1034还可以沿着后部反射器带1034定位,并定位为在货架管理系统1000中的推动器1025之后且基本上垂直于推动器 1025的行进方向。另外,后部反射器带1030可以包括电子连接1038。As further shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B , the rear reflector strip 1030 may include a piecewise linear mirror or a smooth fixed mirror 1034 . A stationary mirror 1034 may be positioned along the rear reflector strip 1030. The fixed mirrors 1034 may be along, parallel, or nearly parallel to the path of the swept beam 1037, such that each individual fixed mirror 1034 intercepts the output beam 1035 along its swept path (as shown in Figure 15B). The stationary mirror 1034 may also be positioned along the rear reflector strip 1034 and positioned behind the pusher 1025 in the shelf management system 1000 and substantially perpendicular to the direction of travel of the pusher 1025. Additionally, the rear reflector strip 1030 may include electrical connections 1038 .

如图15A所示,货架管理系统1000还可以包括控制模块1040。控制模块1040可以与后部反射器带1030上的电子连接1038对齐并锁定到位。控制模块1040可以包括微计算机。另外,控制模块1040可具有内部无线能力而不偏离本发明。As shown in FIG. 15A , the shelf management system 1000 may also include a control module 1040 . The control module 1040 can be aligned with the electrical connections 1038 on the rear reflector strap 1030 and locked in place. The control module 1040 may include a microcomputer. Additionally, the control module 1040 may have internal wireless capabilities without departing from the invention.

如图15A和15B所示,产品1010可以由货架管理系统1000中的弹簧推动式推动器1025或推动器板向前推动。当产品1010被向前推动时,激光扫描仪1032在固定反射镜1034中的一个处将扫掠束1037沿着后部反射器带1030引导。然后,固定反射镜1034可以将输出束1035以优选角度(诸如直角)重新引导至输出束1035的改变路径,使得固定反射镜1034基本上将输出束1035引导至推动器1025的后部。输出束1035然后可以反射离开推动器1025的背部,其中输出束1035然后返回到激光扫描仪1032用于分析。该信息然后可以被转送到控制模块1040。激光扫描仪1032可以被配置为测量到推动器1025的距离。激光扫描仪1032可以由控制模块1040和微计算机控制。As shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B , the product 1010 may be pushed forward by a spring pushed pusher 1025 or pusher plate in the shelf management system 1000 . As the product 1010 is pushed forward, the laser scanner 1032 directs the sweep beam 1037 along the rear reflector belt 1030 at one of the stationary mirrors 1034 . The fixed mirror 1034 can then redirect the output beam 1035 to the altered path of the output beam 1035 at a preferred angle, such as a right angle, such that the fixed mirror 1034 substantially directs the output beam 1035 to the rear of the pusher 1025. The output beam 1035 may then reflect off the back of the pusher 1025, where the output beam 1035 then returns to the laser scanner 1032 for analysis. This information can then be forwarded to the control module 1040 . Laser scanner 1032 may be configured to measure the distance to pusher 1025 . The laser scanner 1032 may be controlled by the control module 1040 and the microcomputer.

控制模块1040中的微计算机可以比较推动器1025的最新位置与先前位置。推动器1025的位置的差异可以导致微计算机确定货架管理系统1000的状况。首先,微计算机可以确定自从上次读取以来没有发生活动。第二,微计算机可以确定正常的购物事例已经发生,并且如果是这样的话可以确定还有多少产品包装仍在被推动器1025推动。第三,如果大于预定数量的产品包装已经在小于预定量的时间内被移除,则微计算机可以确定潜在盗窃情况正在进行中。可以传达的另一个状况是低产品状况。例如,如果任何推动器位置处没有产品包装、或者少于预定数量的产品包装仍在由推进器1025推动,则微计算机可以确定低产品状况。The microcomputer in the control module 1040 can compare the latest position of the pusher 1025 with the previous position. Differences in the position of the pusher 1025 can cause the microcomputer to determine the condition of the shelf management system 1000 . First, the microcomputer can determine that no activity has occurred since the last read. Second, the microcomputer can determine that a normal shopping event has occurred and, if so, how many product packages are still being pushed by the pusher 1025. Third, the microcomputer may determine that a potential theft situation is in progress if more than a predetermined amount of product packaging has been removed in less than a predetermined amount of time. Another condition that can be communicated is a low product condition. For example, if there are no product packages at any pusher location, or less than a predetermined number of product packages are still being pushed by pusher 1025, the microcomputer may determine a low product condition.

如图15A和15B所示,在不脱离本发明的情况下,货架管理系统1000 可以包括本地音频通知器1050。上述任何情况都可以由微计算机经由有线或无线手段传达给各种通信模块,诸如:本地或远程音频通知器1050,本地或远程光通知器1060,远程计算机,商店公告系统,手机,寻呼机或其他远程通知器。控制模块1040的内部无线能力可以将信号无线传送到远程位置或从远程位置传送信号,以指示货架管理系统的状况。As shown in Figures 15A and 15B, the shelf management system 1000 may include a local audio notifier 1050 without departing from the invention. Any of the above can be communicated by the microcomputer via wired or wireless means to various communication modules, such as: local or remote audio notifier 1050, local or remote optical notifier 1060, remote computer, store announcement system, cell phone, pager or other Remote Notifier. The internal wireless capabilities of the control module 1040 may wirelessly transmit signals to and from a remote location to indicate the condition of the shelf management system.

在与上述实施例类似的另一实施例中,如图16A和16B所示,货架管理系统1100可以包括沿着后部反射器带1130的长度定位的一个固定反射镜 1134。在该实施例中,如图16A和16B所示,固定反射镜1134的形状可以是弯曲的,并且可以近似为抛物线形状。由于激光扫描仪1132、移动反射镜以及最终的扫掠束1137由微计算机或控制模块1140控制,所以微计算机能够通过知道并使用移动反射镜在扫掠运动和分析输出束1135期间的任何时间点处的位置来确定货架上的每个推动器1125的位置。另外,将来自激光扫描仪1132的扫掠束1137传送到推动器板1125和从推动器板1125传送扫掠束1137的过程可以连续或接近连续地(诸如几分之一秒)或周期性地(诸如一秒、或每5秒一次)进行。In another embodiment similar to that described above, as shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B , the shelf management system 1100 may include one fixed mirror 1134 positioned along the length of the rear reflector strip 1130. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B , the shape of the fixed mirror 1134 may be curved, and may approximate a parabolic shape. Since the laser scanner 1132, the moving mirrors, and ultimately the sweeping beam 1137 are controlled by the microcomputer or control module 1140, the microcomputer is able to use the moving mirrors at any point in time during the sweeping motion and analyzing the output beam 1135 by knowing and using the moving mirrors. to determine the position of each pusher 1125 on the shelf. Additionally, the process of delivering the swept beam 1137 from the laser scanner 1132 to and from the pusher plate 1125 may be continuous or nearly continuous (such as a fraction of a second) or periodically (such as one second, or every 5 seconds).

另外,微计算机可执行确定多个读数仅代表一个宽推动器1125的算法。如果沿着例如48英寸长的货架的长度而每1英寸取得一次读数,则可能是这种情况。货架上推动器1125前面的产品位置1110可以是六英寸宽。因此,在该示例中,当反射镜扫掠并引导扫掠束1137时,可以跨推动器1125的背部和产品取得五个或六个读数。如果六英寸宽的产品中的一个从推动器1125 移除,则微计算机检测到至少五个或六个感测位置基本上同时改变了相等的量。微计算机然后能够确定所有五个或六个读数表示一个产品宽度。这可以是货架管理系统1100的学习方面,随着时间的推移,其随着货架上的不同产品的销售而改变。Additionally, the microcomputer may execute an algorithm that determines that multiple readings represent only one wide pusher 1125. This may be the case if readings are taken every 1 inch along the length of, for example, a 48 inch long shelf. The product location 1110 in front of the pusher 1125 on the shelf may be six inches wide. Thus, in this example, as the mirror sweeps and directs the sweep beam 1137, five or six readings may be taken across the back of the pusher 1125 and the product. If one of the six inch wide products is removed from the pusher 1125, the microcomputer detects that at least five or six sensed positions have changed substantially simultaneously by an equal amount. The microcomputer can then determine that all five or six readings represent one product width. This can be a learning aspect of the shelf management system 1100 that changes over time as different products are sold on the shelf.

在类似于上述实施例的另一实施例中,如图17A和17B所示,可以利用具有抛物线的分段线性近似的抛物线型分段线性反射镜1234。如图17A 和17B所示,货架管理系统1200可以包括可以沿着后部反射器带1230定位的分段式抛物线型反射镜1234。该分段式抛物线型反射镜1234可以包括具有多个前缘1236的多个线性部分1233。线性部分1233可以足够宽以易于制造。此外,线性部分1233可以足够窄,使得填充有最窄的推动器1225的货架将具有将输出束1235反射到其/从其反射的至少一个线性反射镜部分 1233。如图17A和17B所示,每个线性反射镜部分1233的前缘1236可以包括小的平坦部分1239和成角度前缘1236。小的平坦部分1239可以将扫掠束1237直接逆向反射回到激光扫描仪1232,而不首先允许其从推动器1225 的背部反射。将来自激光扫描仪1132的扫掠束1137传送到推动器板1125 和从推动器板1125传送扫掠束1137的过程可以连续或接近连续地(诸如几分之一秒)或周期性地(诸如一秒、或5秒)进行。In another embodiment similar to that described above, as shown in Figures 17A and 17B, a parabolic type piecewise linear mirror 1234 with a piecewise linear approximation of a parabola may be utilized. As shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B , shelf management system 1200 may include segmented parabolic mirrors 1234 that may be positioned along rear reflector strip 1230 . The segmented parabolic mirror 1234 may include a plurality of linear sections 1233 having a plurality of leading edges 1236 . The linear portion 1233 may be wide enough for ease of manufacture. Furthermore, the linear portion 1233 may be sufficiently narrow that a shelf filled with the narrowest pusher 1225 will have at least one linear mirror portion 1233 to/from which the output beam 1235 is reflected. As shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B , the leading edge 1236 of each linear mirror portion 1233 may include a small flat portion 1239 and an angled leading edge 1236 . Small flat portion 1239 can retroreflect sweep beam 1237 directly back to laser scanner 1232 without first allowing it to reflect off the back of pusher 1225. The process of delivering the swept beam 1137 from the laser scanner 1132 to and from the pusher plate 1125 may be continuous or nearly continuous (such as a fraction of a second) or periodically (such as one second, or 5 seconds).

例如,如图17B中具体所示,随着束1237扫掠,激光扫描仪1232将看到一系列短亮迸发(burst)被引导回到激光扫描仪1232,接着从成角度前缘 1236反射。来自成角度前缘1236的反射指示推动器1225的位置。当移动反射镜使光束扫掠超过第一直线部分的边缘时,反射镜在第二成角度前缘1236 之前将再次遇到小平坦部分1239。这些小平坦部分1239可以代表片段式抛物线型反射镜1234上的提示点。这些提示点1239可以被微计算机解释为“提示”信号1242。另外,这些小平坦部分1239可以将货架分成指定的部分,所述指定的部分可以由微计算机分析用于移动。基于小的平坦部分1239的距离和位置,激光扫仪1232可以警告控制模块1240将要遇到成角度前缘1236 并且应当进行读取。以这种方式,控制模块1240不需要具有对移动镜位置的精确水平的测量。另外,分段式抛物线型反射镜1234的长度可以是任何长度。控制模块1240可以基于其在扫掠束1237的“起源”和“结束”位置之间接收到的提示信号1244的数量来确定要读取的推动器位置的数量。For example, as specifically shown in FIG. 17B , as the beam 1237 sweeps, the laser scanner 1232 will see a series of short bright bursts directed back to the laser scanner 1232 and then reflected off the angled leading edge 1236. The reflection from the angled leading edge 1236 indicates the position of the pusher 1225. When the mirror is moved to sweep the beam past the edge of the first straight portion, the mirror will again encounter the small flat portion 1239 before the second angled leading edge 1236. These small flats 1239 may represent cue points on the segmented parabolic mirror 1234 . These cue points 1239 may be interpreted by the microcomputer as "cue" signals 1242. Additionally, these small flat portions 1239 may divide the shelf into designated sections that may be analyzed by the microcomputer for movement. Based on the distance and location of the small flat portion 1239, the laser scanner 1232 can warn the control module 1240 that the angled leading edge 1236 is about to be encountered and a reading should be taken. In this way, the control module 1240 need not have a precise level measurement of the position of the moving mirror. Additionally, the length of the segmented parabolic mirror 1234 may be any length. The control module 1240 may determine the number of pusher positions to read based on the number of cue signals 1244 it receives between the "origin" and "end" positions of the swept beam 1237 .

另外,对于图15A-17B所示的货架系统,可以测量货架上排列的产品的数量。在这样的实施例中,推动器的位置可以用于确定货架上的产品的量,而不需要手动计数产品。例如,激光扫描仪将输出束发送到推动器或产品。输出束然后可以被反射回到激光扫描仪,以通过测量和计算在激光扫描仪处接收输出束的时间来确定推动器的位置。当例如由购买者移除一个产品时,在激光扫描仪处接收返回的输出束的时间增加设定量。基于产品的尺寸,特别是基于产品的厚度,控制模块可以通过输出束有多快地传播回到激光扫描仪的算法而计算已经从货架移除了多少产品。在不脱离本发明的情况下,产品的厚度可以是在货架上的产品的设置期间可以输入到控制模块中的设置或输入。另外,在不脱离本发明的情况下,产品的厚度可以在从系统(诸如用于确定产品的厚度的智能系统或学习系统)获取多个不同读数之后由控制模块确定。Additionally, for the racking system shown in Figures 15A-17B, the number of products lined up on the rack can be measured. In such an embodiment, the position of the pusher can be used to determine the amount of product on the shelf without the need to manually count the products. For example, a laser scanner sends an output beam to a pusher or product. The output beam can then be reflected back to the laser scanner to determine the position of the pusher by measuring and calculating the time at which the output beam is received at the laser scanner. When a product is removed, eg, by a buyer, the time at which the returned output beam is received at the laser scanner is increased by a set amount. Based on the size of the product, and in particular on the thickness of the product, the control module can calculate how much product has been removed from the shelf through an algorithm of how fast the output beam propagates back to the laser scanner. The thickness of the product may be a setting or input that may be entered into the control module during setup of the product on the shelf without departing from the invention. Additionally, the thickness of the product may be determined by the control module after taking a number of different readings from a system, such as an intelligent or learning system for determining the thickness of the product, without departing from the invention.

图14-17B所示的本发明的优点在几个方面是明显的。首先,本发明与弹簧推动式推动器系统没有连接,因此可以与目前使用的几乎任何系统一起工作。第二,本发明没有到推动器系统或产品的物理移动连接,这防止系统随着时间的推移或者随着产品的销售数量而被磨损或变脏,并降低其有效性。第三,本发明可以通过使用电池而操作持续延长的时间周期。RFID库存系统需要相对高功率的射频发射器来扫描货架上的产品,并且不能通过使用电池操作。第四,系统的成本可以在多年内通过从货架上销售的产品数量摊销。该系统的成本与必须证明每个产品包装上的单个RFID标签的成本以及在每个产品的价格中摊销昂贵的读取器系统和基础设施相反。最后,本发明可以被编程为忽略将产品更换回到货架上,如货架正在补货的情况。The advantages of the present invention shown in Figures 14-17B are apparent in several respects. First, the present invention has no connection to a spring-pushed pusher system, so it can work with almost any system currently in use. Second, the present invention has no physical moving connection to the pusher system or product, which prevents the system from wearing out or getting dirty over time or with the number of products sold, and reducing its effectiveness. Third, the present invention can be operated for extended periods of time using a battery. RFID inventory systems require relatively high-power radio frequency transmitters to scan products on shelves and cannot be operated by using batteries. Fourth, the cost of the system can be amortized over many years by the number of products sold off the shelf. The cost of this system is as opposed to having to justify the cost of a single RFID tag on each product package and amortizing the expensive reader system and infrastructure in the price of each product. Finally, the present invention can be programmed to ignore changing the product back to the shelf, such as when the shelf is being replenished.

在上述实施例中讨论的各种感测配置的传感器可以以模拟或数字格式输出表示感测到的参数的信号。模拟输出可以是电压或电流信号的形式。如本领域技术人员将认识到的,可以利用模数转换器将模拟信号转换为数字信号以供控制器或处理装置使用。The sensors of the various sensing configurations discussed in the above embodiments may output signals representing sensed parameters in analog or digital format. The analog output can be in the form of a voltage or current signal. As those skilled in the art will recognize, analog to digital converters may be utilized to convert analog signals to digital signals for use by a controller or processing device.

前述的变型和修改在本发明的范围内。应该理解的是,本文公开和限定的本发明延伸到从文本和/或附图中提到或显而易见的单独特征中的两个或更多个的所有替代组合。所有这些不同的组合构成本发明的各种替代方面。本文描述的实施例解释了用于实践本发明的已知的最佳模式,并且将使本领域的其他技术人员能够利用本发明。权利要求被解释为在现有技术允许的范围内包括替代实施例。Variations and modifications of the foregoing are within the scope of the present invention. It should be understood that the invention disclosed and defined herein extends to all alternative combinations of two or more of the individual features mentioned or apparent from the text and/or drawings. All of these different combinations constitute various alternative aspects of the present invention. The embodiments described herein illustrate the best mode known for practicing the invention, and will enable others skilled in the art to utilize the invention. The claims are to be construed to include alternative embodiments to the extent permitted by the prior art.

图18A-18C描绘了陈列管理系统1800的替代实施方式。特别地,陈列管理系统1800包括前导轨1802,其被配置为可拆卸地联接到陈列表面(未示出)。在一个示例中,陈列表面可以包括货架结构等。如此,在一个示例中,前导轨1802可以被配置为可拆卸地联接在陈列表面(未示出)的前边缘处。然而,本领域技术人员将认识到,前导轨1802可以在陈列表面的边缘之外的位置处可拆卸地联接到陈列表面等。在一个实施方式中,前导轨 1802具有前导轨长度1808。在一个示例中,前导轨1802可以被配置为使得前导轨长度1808平行于陈列表面(未示出)的前边缘。因此,前轨道长度 1808可以以任何尺寸实施,而不背离本文所述的公开范围。如此,前导轨长度1808可以被配置为适配给定陈列表面(未示出)的一个或多个物理尺寸。在一个示例中,陈列管理系统1800可以包括推动器1804。在一个实施方式中,推动器1804通常可以被称为陈列管理系统(诸如陈列管理系统1800) 的可移动机构。这样,并且如图18B所示,推动器1804可以被配置成沿着地板结构1810将一个或多个陈列产品(未示出)从地板结构的第二端1814 推向地板结构的第一端1812。另外或替代地,陈列管理系统1800可以包括一个或多个分隔件1806。这样,分隔件1806,特别是分隔壁1803,可以被配置为将陈列表面(未示出)上的与第一推动器1804相关联的第一组陈列产品(未示出)和与第二推动器相关联的第二组陈列产品分开。在一个示例中,包括分隔壁1803、地板结构1810和/或屏障1818的分隔件1806可以具有分隔件长度1816。这样,在一个实施方式中,分隔件1806可以被配置成可移除地联接到前导轨1802,使得前导轨长度1808基本上垂直于分隔件长度1816。然而,本领域普通技术人员将认识到,陈列管理系统1800可以被实现为使得前导轨长度1808可以被配置为相对于分隔件长度1816以任何角度定位,并且使得前导轨长度1808和分隔件长度1816之间的角度可以基本上不是90°,并且不偏离本文所述的公开的范围。18A-18C depict an alternate embodiment of an exhibit management system 1800. In particular, the display management system 1800 includes a front rail 1802 that is configured to be removably coupled to a display surface (not shown). In one example, the display surface may include a shelf structure or the like. As such, in one example, the front rail 1802 may be configured to be removably coupled at the front edge of a display surface (not shown). However, those skilled in the art will recognize that the front rails 1802 may be removably coupled to the display surface or the like at locations other than the edges of the display surface. In one embodiment, the front rail 1802 has a front rail length 1808. In one example, the front rail 1802 may be configured such that the front rail length 1808 is parallel to the front edge of the display surface (not shown). Accordingly, the front track length 1808 may be implemented in any size without departing from the scope of the disclosure described herein. As such, the front rail length 1808 can be configured to fit one or more physical dimensions of a given display surface (not shown). In one example, display management system 1800 may include pusher 1804 . In one embodiment, the pusher 1804 may generally be referred to as a movable mechanism of an exhibit management system, such as the exhibit management system 1800 . As such, and as shown in Figure 18B, the pusher 1804 may be configured to push one or more display products (not shown) along the floor structure 1810 from the second end 1814 of the floor structure to the first end 1812 of the floor structure . Additionally or alternatively, display management system 1800 may include one or more dividers 1806 . In this way, divider 1806, and in particular divider wall 1803, can be configured to separate a first set of display products (not shown) associated with first pusher 1804 on a display surface (not shown) with a second pusher A second set of display products associated with the device is separated. In one example, divider 1806 including divider wall 1803 , floor structure 1810 , and/or barrier 1818 may have divider length 1816 . As such, in one embodiment, divider 1806 may be configured to be removably coupled to front rail 1802 such that front rail length 1808 is substantially perpendicular to divider length 1816 . However, those of ordinary skill in the art will recognize that display management system 1800 can be implemented such that front rail length 1808 can be configured to be positioned at any angle relative to divider length 1816, and such that front rail length 1808 and divider length 1816 The angle between may be substantially other than 90° without departing from the scope of the disclosure described herein.

在一个实施方式中,并且如图18B和图18C所示,推动器1804可以通过螺旋弹簧1820被推向地板结构1812的第一端。这样,屏障1818可以被配置成当由螺旋弹簧1820推动的推动器1804在一个或多个陈列产品上施加力以将其朝向屏障1818滑动时将一个或多个陈列产品(在图18A-18C中未示出)保持在陈列管理系统1800内。此外,在一个实施方式中,推动器1804 可以被配置成沿着地板结构1810滑动而不被一个或多个导轨结构引导。特别地,陈列管理系统1800的一个或多个元件,并且具体地包括前导轨1802、推动器1804、分隔件1806、分隔壁1803、地板结构1810、螺旋弹簧1820 和屏障1818可以提供与2014年7月28日提交的美国专利申请No.14/444357 (其全部内容通过引用并入本文用于任何和所有非限制性的目的)的图58、图62和图72中所述的前导轨580、推动器520、分隔件550、分隔壁552、地板554、螺旋弹簧534和屏障556类似的功能。In one embodiment, and as shown in FIGS. 18B and 18C , the pusher 1804 may be urged toward the first end of the floor structure 1812 by a coil spring 1820 . In this way, barrier 1818 may be configured to push one or more display items (in Figures 18A-18C ) when pusher 1804 urged by coil spring 1820 exerts a force on the display item or items to slide it toward barrier 1818 not shown) is maintained within the display management system 1800. Additionally, in one embodiment, pusher 1804 may be configured to slide along floor structure 1810 without being guided by one or more rail structures. In particular, one or more elements of display management system 1800, and specifically including front rails 1802, pushers 1804, dividers 1806, divider walls 1803, floor structures 1810, coil springs 1820, and barriers 1818 may be provided as of July 2014. Front rails 580, 580, 580, The pusher 520, divider 550, divider wall 552, floor 554, coil spring 534 and barrier 556 function similarly.

在一个实施方式中,并且如图18B和18C所示,陈列管理系统1800可以包括电容式传感器1822。如此,电容式传感器1822可以被配置为输出信号,该信号可以被处理以确定陈列管理系统1800的一个或多个元件的位置。在一个示例中,电容式传感器1822可以被配置为输出信号,该信号可被处理以确定推动器1804的位置。如此,电容式传感器1822可以被用来确定保持在陈列管理系统1800内的陈列产品的数量。在下面的描述中,讨论电容式传感器1822的一个或多个方面。如此,本领域普通技术人员将认识到,可以利用电容式传感器1822来独立于陈列管理系统1800的特定几何特征来确定陈列管理系统1800内的推动器1804的位置。这样,在此描述的与电容式传感器1822相关的系统和方法可以通过贯穿本文描述的替代陈列管理系统以及美国专利申请No.14/444357来实践,该专利申请已经通过引用并入本文。In one embodiment, and as shown in FIGS. 18B and 18C , the display management system 1800 may include a capacitive sensor 1822 . As such, capacitive sensor 1822 may be configured to output a signal that may be processed to determine the location of one or more elements of display management system 1800. In one example, capacitive sensor 1822 can be configured to output a signal that can be processed to determine the position of pusher 1804 . As such, capacitive sensor 1822 may be used to determine the number of displayed products maintained within display management system 1800. In the following description, one or more aspects of capacitive sensor 1822 are discussed. As such, those of ordinary skill in the art will recognize that capacitive sensors 1822 may be utilized to determine the position of the pushers 1804 within the display management system 1800 independently of the specific geometrical features of the display management system 1800 . As such, the systems and methods described herein in relation to capacitive sensors 1822 may be practiced by the alternative display management systems described throughout this document and US Patent Application No. 14/444,357, which has been incorporated herein by reference.

在一个实施方式中,电容式传感器1822可以被配置为沿着分隔件长度 1816定位在地板结构1810上,并且使得螺旋弹簧1820的展开长度1823与沿着分隔件长度1816延伸的电容式传感器1822的一部分接触。相应地,关于图20更详细地描述电容式传感器1822。In one embodiment, the capacitive sensor 1822 may be configured to be positioned on the floor structure 1810 along the divider length 1816 and such that the deployed length 1823 of the coil spring 1820 is the same as the capacitive sensor 1822 extending along the divider length 1816 part of the contact. Accordingly, capacitive sensor 1822 is described in more detail with respect to FIG. 20 .

图19A和19B示意性地描绘了陈列管理系统1800的平面图。因此,图 19A示意性地描绘了处于第一配置的陈列管理系统1800,其具有夹置在屏障 1818和推动器1804之间的第一多个陈列产品1902a-1902f。如此,在所描绘的陈列管理系统1800的第一配置中,螺旋弹簧1820具有第一展开长度1904。转到图19B,陈列管理系统1800被描绘成处于第二配置,其具有包含在系统1800内的减少数量的陈列产品1902a-1902c。因此,螺旋弹簧1820具有减小的展开长度或第二展开长度1906。19A and 19B schematically depict a plan view of an exhibit management system 1800. Thus, FIG. 19A schematically depicts display management system 1800 in a first configuration with a first plurality of display products 1902a-1902f sandwiched between barrier 1818 and pusher 1804. As such, in the depicted first configuration of display management system 1800 , coil spring 1820 has a first deployed length 1904 . Turning to FIG. 19B , the display management system 1800 is depicted in a second configuration with a reduced number of display products 1902a - 1902c contained within the system 1800 . Accordingly, the coil spring 1820 has a reduced or second deployed length 1906 .

在一个示例中,构造成螺旋弹簧1820的导电材料(在一个示例中为金属或合金)与电容式传感器1822接触。在一个实施方式中,螺旋弹簧1820 与电容式传感器1822接触的程度与未展开的长度(诸如在一个示例中为未展开的长度1904或1906)成比例。进而,来自电容式传感器1822的输出信号可以基于与电容式传感器1822接触的螺旋弹簧1820的长度而变化。因此,来自电容式传感器1822的输出信号可基于推动器1804的位置以及相应地保持在陈列管理系统1800内的陈列产品(1902a-1902f)数量而变化。In one example, a conductive material (a metal or alloy in one example) configured as coil spring 1820 is in contact with capacitive sensor 1822 . In one embodiment, the degree to which the coil spring 1820 contacts the capacitive sensor 1822 is proportional to the undeployed length (such as the undeployed length 1904 or 1906 in one example). In turn, the output signal from capacitive sensor 1822 may vary based on the length of coil spring 1820 in contact with capacitive sensor 1822 . Accordingly, the output signal from capacitive sensor 1822 may vary based on the position of pusher 1804 and, accordingly, the number of displayed products (1902a-1902f) held within display management system 1800.

图20A示意性地描绘了电容式传感器1822的详细视图。在一个实施方式中,电容式传感器1822包括电路板2002,电路板2002具有纵向长度2016。如在图18A-18C中示意性描绘的,电容式传感器1822可以联接到分隔件 1806的地板结构1812,并且使得电容式传感器1822的纵向长度2016基本平行于分隔件长度1816。在一个实施方式中,电容式传感器1822可以被配置为被改装到陈列管理系统1800中,使得与电容式传感器1822相关联的所有电子部件可以被独立地包含在电路板2002上。在一个示例中,电容式传感器1822可以包括多个电容式传感器元件2004a-2004f。如此,本领域普通技术人员将认识到,图20A中所描绘的电容式传感器元件2004a-2004f仅表示电容式传感器1822的一个示例实施方式,并且可以实现电容式传感器 1822的各种替代实施方式,其具有与图20A中所描绘的那些电容式传感器元件2004a-2004f不同数量的电容式传感器元件。20A schematically depicts a detailed view of capacitive sensor 1822. In one embodiment, the capacitive sensor 1822 includes a circuit board 2002 having a longitudinal length 2016 . As schematically depicted in FIGS. 18A-18C , capacitive sensor 1822 may be coupled to floor structure 1812 of divider 1806 such that longitudinal length 2016 of capacitive sensor 1822 is substantially parallel to divider length 1816. In one embodiment, capacitive sensor 1822 may be configured to be retrofitted into display management system 1800 such that all electronic components associated with capacitive sensor 1822 may be independently contained on circuit board 2002. In one example, capacitive sensor 1822 may include a plurality of capacitive sensor elements 2004a-2004f. As such, those of ordinary skill in the art will recognize that the capacitive sensor elements 2004a-2004f depicted in FIG. 20A represent only one example implementation of the capacitive sensor 1822 and that various alternative implementations of the capacitive sensor 1822 may be implemented, It has a different number of capacitive sensor elements 2004a-2004f than those depicted in Figure 20A.

在一个示例中,电容式传感器1822可以被配置为输出与电容值成比例的信号,并且使得电容值基于螺旋弹簧1820的展开长度(例如展开长度1904 和1906)。在一个示例中,控制电路2006包括被配置成计算与电容式传感器元件2004a-2004f相关联的一个或多个电容值的电子元件。在另一实施方式中,控制电路2006可以被称为发射器电路,并且被配置为将从电容式传感器元件2004a-2004f接收到的一个或多个数据点传送到远程处理器,诸如来自图24的陈列管理系统控制器装置2400。在另一示例中,一个或多个计算出的电容值可以基于与电路板2002接触的导体的长度而变化。如此,所述一个或多个计算出的电容值可以基于螺旋弹簧1820的展开长度(诸如图19A 和图19B中作为示例描绘的那些展开长度1904和1906)而变化。在一个具体示例中,控制电路2006可以被配置为计算选自电容式传感器元件 2004a-2004f中的一个或多个连续的电容式传感器元件对之间的电容值。因此,如果选自电容式传感器元件2004a-2004f中的一对电容式传感器元件中的一个或多个与螺旋弹簧1820的展开长度的一部分接触,则所计算出的该对电容式传感器元件之间的电容值可以改变。如此,可以利用电容式传感器元件2004a-2004f的连续对之间的电容变化来指示推动器1804的位置。如此,电容式传感器元件2004a-2004f中的一个或多个可以包括被配置为接触螺旋弹簧1820的导电展开长度的一部分的暴露的导电结构。In one example, capacitive sensor 1822 may be configured to output a signal proportional to a capacitance value and make the capacitance value based on the deployed length of coil spring 1820 (eg, deployed lengths 1904 and 1906). In one example, control circuit 2006 includes electronic components configured to calculate one or more capacitance values associated with capacitive sensor elements 2004a-2004f. In another embodiment, the control circuit 2006 may be referred to as a transmitter circuit and is configured to transmit one or more data points received from the capacitive sensor elements 2004a-2004f to a remote processor, such as from FIG. 24 The display management system controller device 2400. In another example, one or more of the calculated capacitance values may vary based on the length of conductors in contact with the circuit board 2002 . As such, the one or more calculated capacitance values may vary based on the deployed lengths of the coil springs 1820, such as those deployed lengths 1904 and 1906 depicted by way of example in Figures 19A and 19B. In one specific example, the control circuit 2006 may be configured to calculate a capacitance value between one or more consecutive pairs of capacitive sensor elements selected from the capacitive sensor elements 2004a-2004f. Thus, if one or more of a pair of capacitive sensor elements selected from capacitive sensor elements 2004a-2004f is in contact with a portion of the deployed length of coil spring 1820, the calculated distance between the pair of capacitive sensor elements The capacitance value can be changed. As such, the change in capacitance between successive pairs of capacitive sensor elements 2004a-2004f can be used to indicate the position of the pusher 1804. As such, one or more of capacitive sensor elements 2004a - 2004f may include exposed conductive structures configured to contact a portion of the conductive deployed length of coil spring 1820 .

在一个实施方式中,电路板2002可以包括被配置为使电容式传感器元件2004a-2004f彼此电绝缘的基本上绝缘的材料。此外,电容式传感器元件 2004a-2004f可以通过电导体(未在图20A中描绘的)连接到控制电路2006。在一个示例中,选自电容式传感器元件2004a-2004f中的一对电容式传感器元件可以被分隔距离2018分开。因此,在一个实施方式中,分离距离2018 在选自电容式传感器元件2004a-2004f中的每对电容式传感器元件之间可以是均匀的,或者可以是不均匀的,使得第一分离距离2018可以不同于第二分隔距离2020。此外,本领域的普通技术人员将认识到,分隔距离2018和 2020可以以任何尺寸来实施,而不脱离本文所描述的公开的范围的。例如,分隔距离2018和2020可以在从一毫米或更小到几百毫米或更大的范围内等。In one embodiment, the circuit board 2002 may include a substantially insulating material configured to electrically insulate the capacitive sensor elements 2004a-2004f from each other. Additionally, capacitive sensor elements 2004a-2004f may be connected to control circuit 2006 by electrical conductors (not depicted in Figure 20A). In one example, a pair of capacitive sensor elements selected from capacitive sensor elements 2004a - 2004f may be separated by separation distance 2018 . Thus, in one embodiment, the separation distance 2018 may be uniform between each pair of capacitive sensor elements selected from the capacitive sensor elements 2004a-2004f, or may be non-uniform, such that the first separation distance 2018 may be Different from the second separation distance 2020. Furthermore, one of ordinary skill in the art will recognize that separation distances 2018 and 2020 may be implemented in any size without departing from the scope of the disclosure described herein. For example, separation distances 2018 and 2020 may range from one millimeter or less to several hundred millimeters or more, and the like.

在一个示例中,选自电容式传感器元件2004a-2004f中的一对电容式传感器元件之间的间隔距离(诸如间隔距离2018和/或2020)可以确定电容式传感器1822的分辨率。如此,电容式传感器1822的分辨率可以与这样的精度成比例,电容式传感器1822可以利用该精度确定推动器(诸如推动器 1804)的位置。特别地,随着诸如电容式传感器元件2004a-2004f的电容式传感器元件的数量增加,电容式传感器1822可以利用其确定推动器在地板结构1810上的位置的精度也可以增加。In one example, the separation distance between a pair of capacitive sensor elements selected from capacitive sensor elements 2004a-2004f, such as separation distances 2018 and/or 2020, may determine the resolution of capacitive sensor 1822. As such, the resolution of capacitive sensor 1822 can be proportional to the accuracy with which capacitive sensor 1822 can determine the position of a pusher, such as pusher 1804. In particular, as the number of capacitive sensor elements such as capacitive sensor elements 2004a-2004f increases, the accuracy with which capacitive sensor 1822 can determine the position of a pusher on floor structure 1810 can also increase.

在一个实施方式中,电容式传感器1822可以用于计算地板结构1810上的推动器1804的绝对位置。这样,推动器1804的位置可以不基于地板结构 1810上的归零位置而被校准。因此,推动器1804的位置可以不相对于电容式传感器1822上的另一位置等来确定。In one embodiment, capacitive sensors 1822 may be used to calculate the absolute position of pushers 1804 on floor structure 1810. In this way, the position of the pusher 1804 may not be calibrated based on the zeroing position on the floor structure 1810. Thus, the position of the pusher 1804 may not be determined relative to another position on the capacitive sensor 1822 or the like.

在又一个实施方式中,控制电路2006可以被利用以使用内插方法来计算电容式传感器1822上的推动器1804的位置。具体而言,控制电路2006 可以从来自电容式传感器元件2004a-2004f的多个电容式传感器元件接收信号(另外称为传感器数据),并且通过处理接收到的信号,确定推动器1804 的位置位于选自电容式传感器元件2004a-2004f中的一对电容式传感器元件之间。具体而言,控制电路2006可以用于将推动器1804到第一电容式传感器元件对第二、相邻电容式传感器元件的接近度插值。以这种方式,本领域普通技术人员将认识到,在一个示例中,电容式传感器1822可以使用在地板结构1810的第一端1812和第二端1814之间间隔开的单对电容传感器元件对2004来实现。In yet another embodiment, the control circuit 2006 may be utilized to calculate the position of the pusher 1804 on the capacitive sensor 1822 using an interpolation method. Specifically, control circuitry 2006 may receive signals (otherwise referred to as sensor data) from a plurality of capacitive sensor elements 2004a-2004f and, by processing the received signals, determine that the position of pusher 1804 is within a selected Between a pair of capacitive sensor elements of self-capacitance sensor elements 2004a-2004f. In particular, the control circuit 2006 may be used to interpolate the proximity of the pusher 1804 to a first capacitive sensor element to a second, adjacent capacitive sensor element. In this manner, those of ordinary skill in the art will recognize that, in one example, capacitive sensor 1822 may use a single pair of capacitive sensor elements spaced between first end 1812 and second end 1814 of floor structure 1810 . 2004 to achieve.

图20B示意性地描绘了控制电路2006的更详细的视图。具体而言,在一个示例中,控制电路2006包括电源2008、存储器2010、接口2012和处理器2014。在一个实施方式中,存储器2010、接口2012和处理器2014可以实现为单个微控制器电路,或者可以被实现为分立的电子元件。在一个示例中,电源2008可以表示由一个或多个电化学电池单体(cell)(另外简称为电池单体或电池)提供的电能的源。在一个具体示例中,电源2008可以实现为具有多年电池寿命的单个“纽扣电池单体(button cell)”或“硬币电池单体(coin cell)”。在另一示例中,电源2008可以是可充电电池或不可充电电池。在另一示例中,电源2008可以表示电子硬件,该电子硬件被配置为接收并且可能地调节(校正AC到DC,和/或升高/降低电压,平稳,等) 有线电力供应。在又一示例中,电源2008可以表示电子硬件,该电子硬件被配置成无线地接收并可能地调节从外部源接收的功率供应,诸如通过电磁感应(电动力学感应,静电感应等)。在另一实施方式中,电源2008可以包括一个或多个光伏(太阳能电池单体)。此外,本领域的普通技术人员将认识到,电源2008可以表示被配置成向控制电路2006提供电功率的任何技术或技术的组合,而不偏离本文所描述的公开的范围。类似地,电源2008可以被配置为存储任何量的能量(J),和/或提供具有任何值的电势(电压(V)) 或电流(A),而不偏离本文所描述的公开的范围。另外,这些电源示例可以与本文讨论的任何装置结合使用。FIG. 20B schematically depicts a more detailed view of the control circuit 2006 . Specifically, in one example, control circuit 2006 includes power supply 2008 , memory 2010 , interface 2012 , and processor 2014 . In one embodiment, memory 2010, interface 2012, and processor 2014 may be implemented as a single microcontroller circuit, or may be implemented as discrete electronic components. In one example, power source 2008 may represent a source of electrical energy provided by one or more electrochemical cells (otherwise simply referred to as cells or batteries). In one specific example, the power source 2008 may be implemented as a single "button cell" or "coin cell" with a multi-year battery life. In another example, the power source 2008 may be a rechargeable battery or a non-rechargeable battery. In another example, the power supply 2008 may represent electronic hardware configured to receive and possibly condition (correct AC to DC, and/or step up/down voltage, smooth, etc.) a wired power supply. In yet another example, the power source 2008 may represent electronic hardware configured to wirelessly receive and possibly regulate a power supply received from an external source, such as through electromagnetic induction (electrodynamic induction, electrostatic induction, etc.). In another embodiment, the power source 2008 may include one or more photovoltaics (solar cells). Furthermore, one of ordinary skill in the art will recognize that the power supply 2008 may represent any technique or combination of techniques configured to provide electrical power to the control circuit 2006 without departing from the scope of the disclosure described herein. Similarly, power supply 2008 may be configured to store any amount of energy (J), and/or provide any value of electrical potential (voltage (V)) or current (A) without departing from the scope of the disclosure described herein. Additionally, these power supply examples can be used in conjunction with any of the devices discussed herein.

存储器2010可以是永久形式、易失性存储器形式或其组合。如此,存储器2010可以包括通过控制电路2006的功率循环或其他重新启动操作而清除的随机存取存储器(RAM)的形式。在其他实施例中,存储器2010可以是非易失性的,使得其不需要来自电源2008的功率来维持信息。如此,存储器2010可以包括只读存储器(ROM)或闪存的形式。通常,存储器2010可以被称为非暂时性计算机可读介质的形式,并且被用来存储可以由处理器 2014执行的指令。Memory 2010 may be in permanent form, volatile memory form, or a combination thereof. As such, memory 2010 may include the form of random access memory (RAM) that is cleared by power cycling or other restarting operations of control circuit 2006 . In other embodiments, memory 2010 may be non-volatile such that it does not require power from power source 2008 to maintain information. As such, memory 2010 may include the form of read only memory (ROM) or flash memory. Generally, memory 2010 may be referred to as a form of non-transitory computer-readable medium and used to store instructions executable by processor 2014.

接口2012可以包括被配置为便于控制电路2006与一个或多个外部装置之间的通信的硬件和/或固件。例如,可以利用接口2012来便于处理器2014 与外部计算机装置之间通过网络的通信。以这种方式,接口2012可以被配置为经由诸如利用以太网连接的有线连接,或诸如利用蓝牙连接、Wi-Fi连接的无线连接,或者工业、科学和医疗(ISM)无线电频段中的一个或多个通信。然而,本领域普通技术人员将认识到,接口2012可以被配置为便于控制电路2006与任何有线或无线链路或网络之间的通信。Interface 2012 may include hardware and/or firmware configured to facilitate communication between control circuitry 2006 and one or more external devices. For example, interface 2012 may be utilized to facilitate communication between processor 2014 and external computer devices over a network. In this manner, interface 2012 may be configured via a wired connection, such as with an Ethernet connection, or a wireless connection, such as with a Bluetooth connection, a Wi-Fi connection, or one of the Industrial, Scientific, and Medical (ISM) radio frequency bands or multiple communications. However, those of ordinary skill in the art will recognize that interface 2012 may be configured to facilitate communication between control circuitry 2006 and any wired or wireless link or network.

在一个实施方式中,处理器2014包括具有一个或多个处理核的微处理器。如此,处理器2014可以被配置为执行存储器2010内存储的指令。此外,可以利用由处理器2014执行的一个或多个过程来驱动与电路板2002和多个电容式传感器元件2004a-2004f相关联的一个或多个电路。另外,处理器2014 可以被配置为经由接口2012接收并处理来自多个电容式传感器元件 2004a-2004f的一个或多个传感器读数。在一个具体示例中,来自多个电容式传感器元件2004a-2004f的电容式传感器元件可以被配置为输出模拟信号 (电压,电流等)或数字信号(例如,二进制信号等)。In one embodiment, the processor 2014 includes a microprocessor having one or more processing cores. As such, the processor 2014 may be configured to execute instructions stored within the memory 2010 . In addition, one or more circuits associated with the circuit board 2002 and the plurality of capacitive sensor elements 2004a-2004f may be driven using one or more processes performed by the processor 2014. Additionally, the processor 2014 may be configured to receive and process one or more sensor readings from the plurality of capacitive sensor elements 2004a-2004f via the interface 2012. In one specific example, capacitive sensor elements from the plurality of capacitive sensor elements 2004a-2004f may be configured to output analog signals (voltage, current, etc.) or digital signals (eg, binary signals, etc.).

在一个示例中,处理器2014可以接收从多个电容式传感器元件 2004a-2004f传达的一个或多个信号。进而,处理器2014可以在经由接口2012 将接收到的信号传达到远程处理器(诸如与图24中描述的陈列管理系统控制器装置2400相关联的处理器2404)之前,对接收到的信号执行一个或多个处理。这一个或多个处理可以包括确定接收到的信号高于阈值,压缩接收到的信号以进行通信,或者对接收到的信号进行滤波等等。因此,在这个示例中,陈列管理系统控制器装置2400的处理器2404可以如先前关于图20A 所描述的那样计算一个或多个电容值,并且还在陈列管理系统1800上计算推动器1804的位置。在另一示例中,可以由处理器2014处理从多个电容式传感器元件2004a-2004f传达的一个或多个信号,以如之前关于图20A所描述的来计算一个或多个电容值。进而,所计算的电容值可以被用来计算陈列管理系统1800上的推动器1804的位置。在又一示例中,可以使用处理器2014 和处理器2404的组合来确定推动器1804的位置,等。In one example, the processor 2014 may receive one or more signals communicated from the plurality of capacitive sensor elements 2004a-2004f. In turn, the processor 2014 may perform execution on the received signal prior to communicating the received signal via the interface 2012 to a remote processor, such as the processor 2404 associated with the display management system controller device 2400 described in FIG. 24 . one or more treatments. The one or more processes may include determining that the received signal is above a threshold, compressing the received signal for communication, or filtering the received signal, and the like. Thus, in this example, the processor 2404 of the display management system controller device 2400 may calculate one or more capacitance values as previously described with respect to FIG. 20A and also calculate the position of the pusher 1804 on the display management system 1800 . In another example, one or more signals communicated from the plurality of capacitive sensor elements 2004a-2004f may be processed by the processor 2014 to calculate one or more capacitance values as previously described with respect to FIG. 20A. In turn, the calculated capacitance value can be used to calculate the position of the pusher 1804 on the display management system 1800. In yet another example, a combination of processor 2014 and processor 2404 may be used to determine the position of pusher 1804, or the like.

在一个实施方式中,控制电路2006可以被配置为直接与移动装置通信。这样,在一个具体示例中,控制电路2006可以被配置为与商店中的购物者的智能手机或平板电脑建立蓝牙连接,以便接收与购物者相关联的一条或多条传记信息。以这种方式,当随着从陈列管理系统1800移除诸如陈列产品 1902a-1902f的一个或多个陈列产品而激活推动器1804时,控制电路2006 可以被配置为查询移除一个或多个陈列产品的用户的移动装置以接收与该用户相关联的一条或多条传记信息。在另一个实施方式中,当随着从陈列管理系统移除一个或多个陈列产品而激活推动器1804时,控制电路2006可以被配置为与陈列管理系统控制器装置2400通信。进而,陈列管理系统控制器装置2400可以尝试建立到与移除一个或多个陈列产品的用户相关联的移动装置的连接(经由蓝牙等)。In one embodiment, the control circuit 2006 may be configured to communicate directly with the mobile device. As such, in one particular example, the control circuit 2006 may be configured to establish a Bluetooth connection with a shopper's smartphone or tablet in the store in order to receive one or more pieces of biographical information associated with the shopper. In this manner, when the pusher 1804 is activated with the removal of one or more display products, such as display products 1902a-1902f, from the display management system 1800, the control circuit 2006 may be configured to query the removal of one or more display products. A mobile device of a user of the product to receive one or more pieces of biographical information associated with the user. In another embodiment, the control circuit 2006 may be configured to communicate with the display management system controller device 2400 when the pusher 1804 is activated in response to removal of one or more display products from the display management system. In turn, the display management system controller device 2400 may attempt to establish a connection (via Bluetooth, etc.) to the mobile device associated with the user who removed one or more display products.

在一个示例中,电容式传感器1822可以被配置为在低功率模式下操作,直到推动器1804由于诸如陈列产品1902a-1902f的一个或多个陈列产品从陈列管理系统1800移除而移动。特别地,该低功率模式可以包括处理器2014,该处理器2014以连续监控来自电容式传感器元件2004a-2004f的传感器输出的低功率配置操作。相应地,在该示例中,处理器2014可以在接收到指示推动器1804的移动的一个或多个传感器信号时执行一个或多个处理以进入高功率配置。具体而言,高功率配置可以包括执行一个或多个处理以向存储器2010、接口2012和/或处理器2014输送额外的电功率,以便对所接收到的传感器数据执行额外的处理和/或将所接收到的传感器数据传达到远程处理器。以这种方式,电容式传感器1822可以被配置为在推动器1804保持静止的同时消耗减少量的电能。这样,可以利用这种低功率配置来延长与电源 2008相关联的电池寿命。在另一个示例中,电容式传感器1822可以被配置成在推动器1804保持静止的同时在低功率配置内操作,并且使得低功率配置向多个电容式传感器元件2004a-2004f中的一个或多个输送电能。因此,响应于推动器1804的运动,电容式传感器元件2004a-2004f中的一个或多个可以被配置为将唤醒信号传达到控制电路2006以进入高功率配置。这样,唤醒信号可以由控制电路2006接收,并且作为响应,额外的功率可以被输送给存储器2010、接口2012和/或处理器2014中的一个或多个。以此方式,对于推动器是静止的期间的时间段,将电容式传感器1822、特别是控制电路 2006保持在低功率配置中可以允许降低总体能量消耗,并且在一个示例中,增加电容式传感器1822的电池寿命。In one example, capacitive sensor 1822 may be configured to operate in a low power mode until pusher 1804 is moved due to removal of one or more display products, such as display products 1902a-1902f, from display management system 1800. In particular, the low power mode may include processor 2014 operating in a low power configuration that continuously monitors sensor outputs from capacitive sensor elements 2004a-2004f. Accordingly, in this example, the processor 2014 may perform one or more processes upon receipt of one or more sensor signals indicative of movement of the pusher 1804 to enter a high power configuration. In particular, high power configurations may include performing one or more processes to deliver additional electrical power to memory 2010, interface 2012, and/or processor 2014 in order to perform additional processing on received sensor data and/or to The received sensor data is communicated to the remote processor. In this manner, capacitive sensor 1822 may be configured to consume a reduced amount of electrical power while pusher 1804 remains stationary. In this way, the battery life associated with the power supply 2008 can be extended with this low power configuration. In another example, the capacitive sensor 1822 can be configured to operate in a low power configuration while the pusher 1804 remains stationary, and cause the low power configuration to apply to one or more of the plurality of capacitive sensor elements 2004a-2004f transmit electricity. Thus, in response to movement of the pusher 1804, one or more of the capacitive sensor elements 2004a-2004f may be configured to communicate a wake-up signal to the control circuit 2006 to enter a high power configuration. As such, a wake-up signal may be received by the control circuit 2006, and in response, additional power may be delivered to one or more of the memory 2010, the interface 2012, and/or the processor 2014. In this way, maintaining the capacitive sensor 1822, particularly the control circuit 2006, in a low power configuration for the time period during which the pusher is stationary may allow for a reduction in overall energy consumption, and in one example, increasing the capacitive sensor 1822 battery life.

图21A和21B描绘了陈列管理系统2100的替代实施方式。具体地,图 21A描绘了被配置为箱式货架的陈列管理系统2100的等距视图。特别地,箱式货架陈列管理系统2100包括顶部2102和两个侧面2104,其可以连接在一起以形成外壳2106的一部分。凹陷部分2108设置成使得在箱式货架陈列管理系统2100安装在货架(未示出)下方的情况下,凹陷部分2108将有助于确保不会与支撑货架的支架或可以向下延伸的其他结构(未示出)干涉。一个或多个货架支撑件2110被安装到箱式货架陈列管理系统2100,以便于箱式货架陈列管理系统2100以传统的方式被安装到竖直支撑件(未示出)。21A and 21B depict an alternate embodiment of an exhibit management system 2100. Specifically, FIG. 21A depicts an isometric view of a display management system 2100 configured as a box rack. In particular, case rack display management system 2100 includes a top 2102 and two sides 2104 that may be joined together to form part of a housing 2106 . The recessed portion 2108 is provided such that in the event that the case rack display management system 2100 is installed under a rack (not shown), the recessed portion 2108 will help ensure that it does not interfere with a shelf supporting the rack or other structure that may extend downwardly (not shown) interference. One or more shelf supports 2110 are mounted to the rack display management system 2100 so that the rack display management system 2100 is mounted to a vertical support (not shown) in a conventional manner.

可滑动货架2112安装到一个或多个轨道2114,所述一个或多个轨道 2114可以至少部分由侧面2104支撑。如所描绘的,可滑动货架2112可以包括支撑分隔件2118的支撑表面2116。在一个示例中,支撑表面2116可以支撑一个或多个陈列管理系统,诸如之前描述的系统1800。在一个实施方式中,支撑表面2116包括安装到货架2112的前部的轨道2120。轨道又进而撑保持器2122。如所描绘的,具有一个或多个手柄2126的门2124可以经由铰链系统2128安装到顶部2102。在另一实施方式中,门2124可以被称为翻转窗 2124,并且使得翻转窗2124可以对可见光部分或全部透明。以这种方式,翻转窗2124可以便于观看箱式货架陈列管理系统2100内的一个或多个陈列产品。在一个具体示例中,箱式货架陈列管理系统2100可以类似于2013年 10月4日提交的美国申请No.14/046385中描述的箱式货架3405,该申请的全部内容通过引用并入本文,以用于所有非限制性的目的。The slidable shelves 2112 are mounted to one or more rails 2114, which may be at least partially supported by the sides 2104. As depicted, slidable shelves 2112 may include support surfaces 2116 that support dividers 2118 . In one example, support surface 2116 may support one or more display management systems, such as system 1800 previously described. In one embodiment, the support surface 2116 includes a track 2120 mounted to the front of the shelf 2112. The rails in turn support retainers 2122. As depicted, door 2124 with one or more handles 2126 may be mounted to top 2102 via hinge system 2128. In another embodiment, the door 2124 may be referred to as a flip window 2124, and the flip window 2124 may be made partially or fully transparent to visible light. In this manner, the flip window 2124 may facilitate viewing of one or more displayed products within the case rack display management system 2100. In one specific example, the box rack display management system 2100 may be similar to the box rack 3405 described in US Application No. 14/046385, filed October 4, 2013, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety, for all non-limiting purposes.

在一个实施方式中,箱式货架陈列管理系统2100可以被配置为保持一个或多个陈列产品,诸如图19A中示意性描绘的陈列产品1902a-1902f。因此,在一种配置中,箱式货架陈列管理系统2100将可滑动货架2112定位在外壳2106内。如此,为了从箱式货架陈列管理系统2100移除一个或多个陈列产品(图21A中未示出),用户可以将翻转窗2124从基本竖直的位置(在图21B中描绘)旋转(到在图21A中描绘的大致水平的位置)。In one embodiment, the case rack display management system 2100 may be configured to hold one or more display products, such as the display products 1902a-1902f schematically depicted in Figure 19A. Thus, in one configuration, the case rack display management system 2100 positions the slidable racks 2112 within the housing 2106 . As such, in order to remove one or more display products (not shown in FIG. 21A ) from the case rack display management system 2100, the user may rotate the flip window 2124 from the substantially vertical position (depicted in FIG. 21B ) (to approximately horizontal position depicted in Figure 21A).

在一个实施方式中,箱式货架陈列管理系统2100可以配置有传感器 2130。特别地,传感器2130可以是加速度计。此外,加速度计传感器2130 可以对沿着单个轴的加速度(由于重力或其他方式)敏感(单轴加速度计)、对沿着两个相互垂直的轴的加速度敏感(2轴加速度计)或对沿着三个相互垂直的轴的加速度敏感(3轴加速度计)。本领域普通技术人员将认识到,在不脱离本文所描述的公开的情况下可以与箱式货架陈列管理系统2100或其他陈列管理系统(诸如系统1800和2300)一起使用的单轴、双轴和三轴加速度计电子电路的各种具体实施方式。而且,本领域的普通技术人员将认识到,可以利用加速度计传感器2130来确定其固定到的结构的取向。如此,来自图21A的加速度计传感器2130可被用来确定翻转窗2124的取向。有利地,与定位为铰链2128的一个或多个替代传感器技术相比,加速度计传感器2130可以在确定翻转窗2124的取向时提供提高的精度,其中铰链2128 的运动范围可能相对更受限制。In one embodiment, the case rack display management system 2100 may be configured with sensors 2130. In particular, sensor 2130 may be an accelerometer. Additionally, the accelerometer sensor 2130 may be sensitive to acceleration along a single axis (due to gravity or otherwise) (single-axis accelerometer), to acceleration along two mutually perpendicular axes (2-axis accelerometer), or to Sensitive to acceleration in three mutually perpendicular axes (3-axis accelerometer). One of ordinary skill in the art will recognize that single-axis, dual-axis and Various embodiments of the electronic circuit of the triaxial accelerometer. Furthermore, one of ordinary skill in the art will recognize that the accelerometer sensor 2130 may be utilized to determine the orientation of the structure to which it is affixed. As such, the accelerometer sensor 2130 from FIG. 21A can be used to determine the orientation of the rollover window 2124. Advantageously, the accelerometer sensor 2130 may provide improved accuracy in determining the orientation of the flip window 2124 as compared to one or more alternative sensor technologies positioned as the hinge 2128, where the range of motion of the hinge 2128 may be relatively more limited.

在一个实施方式中,加速度计传感器(诸如加速度计传感器2130)可以用于确定翻转窗2124的取向。如此,本领域的普通技术人员将认识到,在不脱离本文描述的本公开的范围的情况下,加速度计传感器2130可以位于翻转窗2124上的被配置为与翻转窗2124的移动一起移动的任何位置处。另外,本领域的普通技术人员将认识到,加速度计传感器2130可以被通常用于确定作为任何陈列管理系统的一部分的翻转窗(类似于翻转窗2124)的取向。这样,具有反转窗2124的陈列管理系统2100仅仅是可以与加速度计传感器2130一起使用的陈列管理系统的一个示例。因此,本领域的普通技术人员将容易认识到类似于具有类似于翻转窗2124的可移动特征的外壳2106 的陈列管理结构的各种附加或替代实现方式,可移动特征被配置为移动以从陈列管理结构移除一个或多个产品。进而,加速度计传感器2130可以联接到本领域普通技术人员可以设想的陈列管理结构的各种附加或替代实施方式的可移动特征。In one embodiment, an accelerometer sensor, such as accelerometer sensor 2130 , may be used to determine the orientation of rollover window 2124 . As such, one of ordinary skill in the art will recognize that the accelerometer sensor 2130 may be located on any rollover window 2124 that is configured to move with movement of the rollover window 2124 without departing from the scope of the present disclosure described herein. location. Additionally, those of ordinary skill in the art will recognize that accelerometer sensor 2130 may be commonly used to determine the orientation of a flip window (similar to flip window 2124) as part of any display management system. As such, exhibit management system 2100 with inverted window 2124 is only one example of an exhibit management system that may be used with accelerometer sensor 2130. Accordingly, those of ordinary skill in the art will readily recognize various additional or alternative implementations of a display management structure similar to housing 2106 having movable features similar to flip windows 2124 that are configured to move to remove from the display. The management structure removes one or more products. Further, the accelerometer sensor 2130 may be coupled to movable features of various additional or alternative implementations of the display management structure that one of ordinary skill in the art may contemplate.

在一个示例中,加速度计传感器2130可以被实现为集成加速度计装置的一部分,如图22A中示意性地描绘的。如此,集成加速度计装置2130可以包括加速度计电路板2200、电源2202和接口2203。因此,如前所述,本领域普通技术人员将认识到可以实施为加速度计电路板2200的各种特定的加速度计电路,而不脱离本文所述的公开范围。在一个示例中,电源2202 可以被配置为向加速度计电路板2200和接口2203提供电能。如此,电源2202 可以类似于电源2008,并且可以被实施为有线电源、一个或多个电池、被配置为适应电能的无线传输的硬件、或其组合。在另一个示例中,接口2203 可以与接口2012类似,并且使得接口2203可以被配置为经由有线或无线网络传达来自加速度计传感器2130的一个或多个加速度信号。In one example, the accelerometer sensor 2130 may be implemented as part of an integrated accelerometer device, as schematically depicted in Figure 22A. As such, integrated accelerometer device 2130 may include accelerometer circuit board 2200 , power supply 2202 and interface 2203 . Accordingly, as previously described, those of ordinary skill in the art will recognize various specific accelerometer circuits that may be implemented as accelerometer circuit board 2200 without departing from the scope of the disclosure described herein. In one example, power supply 2202 may be configured to provide power to accelerometer circuit board 2200 and interface 2203 . As such, power supply 2202 may be similar to power supply 2008, and may be implemented as a wired power supply, one or more batteries, hardware configured to accommodate wireless transfer of power, or a combination thereof. In another example, interface 2203 may be similar to interface 2012, and such that interface 2203 may be configured to communicate one or more acceleration signals from accelerometer sensor 2130 via a wired or wireless network.

在一个实施方式中,集成加速度计装置2130可以被配置成输出指示翻转窗2124的取向的一个或多个传感器信号(另外称为运动数据)。在一个示例中,所述一个或多个传感器信号可以包括指示沿着轴中的一个或多个轴的加速度的模拟或数字信号,集成加速度计装置2130对所述一个或多个轴敏感。因此,在一个示例中,从集成加速度计装置2130输出的传感器信号可以是由沿着一个、两个或三个相互垂直的轴(x-,y-和/或z-轴)分解的重力导致的加速度的结果,集成加速度计装置2330对一个、两个或三个相互垂直的轴敏感。在一个示例中,集成加速度计装置2130被配置为经由接口2203 将传感器信号(另外称为运动数据)传达到诸如图22B中描绘的控制电路2006的控制电路。如此,在一个实施方式中,控制电路2006和集成加速度计装置2130之间的通信可以经由硬件(有线)连接。然而,控制电路2006 与集成加速度计装置2130之间的通信可以附加地或替代地经由无线连接。这样,来自集成加速度计装置2130的输出信号可以以与先前描述的来自电容式传感器1822的传感器输出类似的方式被处理和使用。在另一个实施方式中,来自集成加速度计装置2130的传感器输出可被直接传达到陈列管理系统控制器装置2400,其关于图24被进一步详细描述。In one embodiment, the integrated accelerometer device 2130 may be configured to output one or more sensor signals (otherwise referred to as motion data) indicative of the orientation of the flip window 2124 . In one example, the one or more sensor signals may include analog or digital signals indicative of acceleration along one or more of the axes to which the integrated accelerometer device 2130 is sensitive. Thus, in one example, the sensor signal output from the integrated accelerometer device 2130 may be caused by gravity decomposed along one, two or three mutually perpendicular axes (x-, y- and/or z-axes) As a result of the acceleration, the integrated accelerometer device 2330 is sensitive to one, two or three mutually perpendicular axes. In one example, integrated accelerometer device 2130 is configured to communicate sensor signals (otherwise referred to as motion data) via interface 2203 to a control circuit such as control circuit 2006 depicted in Figure 22B. As such, in one embodiment, the communication between the control circuit 2006 and the integrated accelerometer device 2130 may be via a hardware (wired) connection. However, communication between the control circuit 2006 and the integrated accelerometer device 2130 may additionally or alternatively be via a wireless connection. As such, the output signal from the integrated accelerometer device 2130 may be processed and used in a similar manner to the sensor output from the capacitive sensor 1822 described previously. In another embodiment, the sensor output from the integrated accelerometer device 2130 may be communicated directly to the display management system controller device 2400 , which is described in further detail with respect to FIG. 24 .

在一个示例中,加速度计传感器(另外称为集成加速度计装置)2130 可以被配置成在与加速度计传感器2130联接的可移动结构保持静止的同时以低功率配置操作。这样,加速度计传感器2130可以被配置成在自加速度计电路板2200的输出不变的同时(在一个示例中,指示翻转窗2124保持在固定的取向)以该低功率配置操作。因此,在检测到翻转窗2124的运动时,加速度计电路板2200、控制电路2006和/或陈列管理系统控制器装置2400中的一个或多个可以被配置为实现高功率配置。如此,该高功率配置可以被配置为响应于翻转窗2124的移动来执行一个或多个过程,其中翻动窗2124 的移动可以指示一个或多个陈列产品(诸如陈列产品1902a-1902f)正从诸如系统2100、1800和/或2300的陈列管理系统移除。In one example, the accelerometer sensor (otherwise referred to as an integrated accelerometer device) 2130 may be configured to operate in a low power configuration while the movable structure to which the accelerometer sensor 2130 is coupled remains stationary. In this way, the accelerometer sensor 2130 can be configured to operate in this low power configuration while the output from the accelerometer circuit board 2200 is unchanged (in one example, indicating that the flip window 2124 remains in a fixed orientation). Accordingly, upon detection of movement of the flip window 2124, one or more of the accelerometer circuit board 2200, the control circuit 2006, and/or the display management system controller device 2400 may be configured to implement a high power configuration. As such, the high power configuration can be configured to perform one or more processes in response to movement of the rollover window 2124, wherein movement of the rollover window 2124 can indicate that one or more display products (such as display products 1902a-1902f) are The display management system of systems 2100, 1800 and/or 2300 is removed.

图23描绘了陈列管理系统2300的替代实施方式。具体而言,图23描绘了螺旋挂钩安保装置2301。这样,螺旋挂钩安保装置2301可以包括通过支承轨道2308刚性联接到后部结构2306的前部结构2314。此外,后部结构 2306可以包括一个或多个联接元件(未示出),其被构造成将螺旋挂钩安保装置2301可移除地联接到表面2312。在一个示例中,表面2312可以与关于图14描述的陈列台壁905类似。然而,本领域普通技术人员将认识到,表面2312可以包括被构造成接收螺旋挂钩安保装置2301的一个或多个联接元件(未示出)的任何支撑结构。在一个实施方式中,螺旋挂钩安保装置2301 包括旋钮2304,该旋钮2304可旋转地联接到前部结构2314,并且构造成围绕轴承2316的中心轴线旋转。另外,前部结构2340可以被配置为接收与由螺旋挂钩安保装置2301支撑的一个或多个陈列产品相关联的一个或多个标签。FIG. 23 depicts an alternate embodiment of an exhibit management system 2300. Specifically, FIG. 23 depicts a screw hook security device 2301 . As such, the screw hook security device 2301 may include a front structure 2314 rigidly coupled to the rear structure 2306 by support rails 2308. Additionally, the rear structure 2306 may include one or more coupling elements (not shown) configured to removably couple the screw hook security device 2301 to the surface 2312. In one example, surface 2312 may be similar to display stand wall 905 described with respect to FIG. 14 . However, one of ordinary skill in the art will recognize that surface 2312 may include any support structure configured to receive one or more coupling elements (not shown) of screw hook security device 2301 . In one embodiment, the screw hitch security device 2301 includes a knob 2304 rotatably coupled to the front structure 2314 and configured to rotate about the central axis of the bearing 2316 . Additionally, the front structure 2340 may be configured to receive one or more labels associated with one or more display products supported by the screw hook security device 2301 .

在一个示例中,在沿第一方向(例如由箭头2318指示的方向)向旋钮 2304施加手动旋转力时,螺旋轨道2302可以被配置成围绕轴承2316的中心轴线旋转。进而,基于螺旋轨道2302的旋转,由支撑轨道2310支撑(从支撑轨道2310悬挂)的一个或多个陈列产品可以被螺旋轨道2302朝向前部结构2314推动。相反,在沿第二方向(例如,与箭头2318相反的方向)向旋钮2304施加手动旋转力时,螺旋轨道2302可以被配置成将从支撑轨道2310 悬挂的一个或多个陈列产品朝向后部结构2306推动。In one example, the helical track 2302 may be configured to rotate about the central axis of the bearing 2316 upon application of a manual rotational force to the knob 2304 in a first direction (eg, the direction indicated by arrow 2318). In turn, based on the rotation of the helical rail 2302, one or more display products supported by (suspended from) the support rail 2310 may be pushed by the helical rail 2302 toward the front structure 2314. Conversely, upon application of a manual rotational force to knob 2304 in a second direction (eg, opposite to arrow 2318), helical track 2302 may be configured to orient one or more displays suspended from support track 2310 toward the rear structure 2306 push.

在一个示例中,螺旋挂钩安保装置2301可以被配置为陈列商店内的一个或多个产品。这样,在一个实施例中,螺旋挂钩安保装置2301可用于防止由支撑轨道2310支撑的多个产品从螺旋挂钩安保装置2301被快速移除。以这种方式,由于为了从装置2301移除一个或多个产品而旋转旋钮2304和螺旋轨道2302所需的延长的时间,可以利用螺旋挂钩安保装置2301来阻止盗窃从支撑轨道2310悬挂的一个或多个产品。In one example, the screw hook security device 2301 may be configured to display one or more products within a store. As such, in one embodiment, the screw hook security device 2301 may be used to prevent rapid removal of a plurality of products supported by the support rail 2310 from the screw hook security device 2301 . In this manner, due to the extended time required to rotate knob 2304 and helical track 2302 in order to remove one or more products from device 2301, screw hook security device 2301 can be utilized to deter theft of one or more items suspended from support track 2310. multiple products.

在一个实施方式中,加速度计传感器2130可与陈列管理系统2300一起使用,以检测旋钮2304和/或螺旋轨道2302的运动。如前所述,螺旋轨道2302可以被旋转以便从陈列管理系统2300插入和/或移除一个或多个陈列产品。以这种方式,加速度计传感器2130可以联接到被配置成在向手柄2304 施加手动力时旋转的结构。在一个具体示例中,加速度计传感器2130可以被联接在旋钮2304的结构内,如在图23中示意性地描绘的。然而,本领域普通技术人员将认识到,可以使用用于加速度计传感器2130的另外的或替代的放置选项,而不偏离本文所描述的公开的范围。在一个示例中,当螺旋轨道2302正被旋转时来自加速度计传感器2130的传感器输出的变化可以由加速度计电路板2200、控制电路2006和/或陈列管理系统控制器装置2400 中的一个或多个使用,以追踪螺旋轨道2302的旋转,并且因此确定插入到陈列管理系统2300上/从陈列管理系统2300移除的陈列产品的数量。In one embodiment, accelerometer sensor 2130 may be used with display management system 2300 to detect movement of knob 2304 and/or spiral track 2302. As previously discussed, the helical track 2302 may be rotated to insert and/or remove one or more display products from the display management system 2300 . In this manner, the accelerometer sensor 2130 may be coupled to a structure configured to rotate when manual force is applied to the handle 2304. In one specific example, the accelerometer sensor 2130 may be coupled within the structure of the knob 2304 as schematically depicted in FIG. 23 . However, one of ordinary skill in the art will recognize that additional or alternative placement options for the accelerometer sensor 2130 may be used without departing from the scope of the disclosure described herein. In one example, changes in the sensor output from the accelerometer sensor 2130 when the helical track 2302 is being rotated may be caused by one or more of the accelerometer circuit board 2200 , the control circuit 2006 , and/or the display management system controller device 2400 . is used to track the rotation of the spiral track 2302 and thus determine the number of display products inserted into/removed from the display management system 2300.

类似于陈列管理系统2100,陈列管理系统2300可以利用加速度计传感器2130来检测运动,并且作为响应,执行一个或多个处理。在一个示例中,螺旋轨道2302的运动可以执行一个或多个处理,以如前所述地将加速度计传感器2130从低功率配置转换为高功率配置。Similar to display management system 2100, display management system 2300 may utilize accelerometer sensors 2130 to detect motion and, in response, perform one or more processes. In one example, the motion of the helical track 2302 may perform one or more processes to convert the accelerometer sensor 2130 from a low power configuration to a high power configuration as previously described.

图24示意性地描绘了传感器网络2401,该传感器网络2401被配置为结合一个或多个陈列管理系统(诸如系统1800、2100和2300等)来实现一个或多个库存管理、安保和/或识别功能。具体而言,传感器网络2401包括陈列管理系统控制器装置2400。相应地,陈列管理系统控制器装置2400可以包括存储器2402。如此,存储器2402可以是永久或易失性存储器的形式,或其组合。以这种方式,存储器2402可以包括由装置2400的功率循环或其他重新启动操作清除的随机存取存储器(RAM)的形式。在其他实施例中,存储器2402可以是非易失性的,使得其不需要功率来维持信息。如此,存储器2402可以包括只读存储器(ROM)或闪存等的形式。通常,存储器2402 可以被称为非暂时性计算机可读介质的形式,并且被用来存储可以由处理器 2404执行的指令。另外,装置2400可以包括接口2406,其中接口2406配置有允许装置2400连接到网络2408的硬件和支撑固件。此外,装置2400 可以包括处理器2404,其中处理器2404可以包括具有一个或多个处理核的微处理器。如此,处理器2404可以被配置为执行存储器2402内存储的指令。Figure 24 schematically depicts a sensor network 2401 configured to implement one or more inventory management, security and/or identification in conjunction with one or more display management systems (such as systems 1800, 2100 and 2300, etc.) Function. Specifically, the sensor network 2401 includes the display management system controller device 2400 . Accordingly, display management system controller device 2400 may include memory 2402 . As such, memory 2402 may be in the form of permanent or volatile memory, or a combination thereof. In this manner, memory 2402 may include the form of random access memory (RAM) that is cleared by power cycling or other restart operations of device 2400. In other embodiments, the memory 2402 may be non-volatile such that it does not require power to maintain information. As such, memory 2402 may include the form of read only memory (ROM) or flash memory, among others. Generally, memory 2402 may be referred to as a form of non-transitory computer-readable medium and used to store instructions that may be executed by processor 2404. Additionally, the device 2400 may include an interface 2406 configured with hardware and supporting firmware that allows the device 2400 to connect to the network 2408. Additionally, apparatus 2400 may include a processor 2404, which may include a microprocessor having one or more processing cores. As such, processor 2404 may be configured to execute instructions stored within memory 2402.

通常,陈列管理系统控制器装置2400可以被配置为响应于从电容式传感器1822(经由控制电路2006)、或者从加速度计传感器2130(直接地或者经由控制电路2006)中的一个或多个接收传感器信息来执行一个或多个处理。在一个示例中,控制电路2006、加速度计传感器2130和陈列管理系统控制器装置2400中的一个或多个之间的通信可以是单向的,或者可以是双向的。在一个实施方式中,陈列管理系统控制器装置2400可以被称为远程处理器,并且可以从一个或多个陈列管理系统(1800、2100和/或2300)远程地定位,一个或多个传感器(1822、2130)被附接到所述一个或多个陈列关联系统以用于检测指示一个或多个陈列产品正被移除的运动。如此,陈列管理系统控制器装置2400和可以与之通信的一个或多个传感器之间的距离可以是任何给定的距离,而不偏离本文所描述的公开的范围。例如,陈列管理系统控制器装置2400可以定位在一个或多个传感器装置相同的地理位置 (在一个示例中,相同的商店)内,陈列管理系统控制器装置2400与所述一个或多个传感器装置通信。在另一个示例中,陈列管理系统控制器装置 2400可以定位在与一个或多个陈列管理系统(例如1800、2100和/或2300) 不同的地理位置处,装置2400经由网络2408与所述一个或多个陈列管理系统通信。In general, display management system controller device 2400 may be configured to respond to receiving sensors from one or more of capacitive sensor 1822 (via control circuit 2006 ), or from accelerometer sensor 2130 (either directly or via control circuit 2006 ) information to perform one or more processes. In one example, communication between one or more of the control circuitry 2006, the accelerometer sensor 2130, and the display management system controller device 2400 may be unidirectional, or may be bidirectional. In one embodiment, the display management system controller device 2400 may be referred to as a remote processor and may be located remotely from one or more display management systems (1800, 2100 and/or 2300), one or more sensors ( 1822, 2130) are attached to the one or more display association systems for detecting motion indicating that one or more display products are being removed. As such, the distance between the display management system controller device 2400 and one or more sensors with which it can communicate can be any given distance without departing from the scope of the disclosure described herein. For example, the display management system controller device 2400 may be located within the same geographic location (in one example, the same store) with one or more sensor devices with which the display management system controller device 2400 is located communication. In another example, display management system controller device 2400 may be located at a different geographic location than one or more display management systems (eg, 1800, 2100, and/or 2300) with which device 2400 communicates via network 2408 with the one or more display management systems (eg, 1800, 2100 and/or 2300). Communication with multiple display management systems.

在一个实施方式中,陈列管理系统控制器装置2400可以被配置为计算推动器1804、翻转窗2124和/或螺旋轨道2302的位置。因此,陈列管理系统控制器装置2400可以被配置成基于一个或多个推动器1804、翻转窗2124 和/或螺旋轨道2302的检测到的运动来计算从一个或多个陈列管理系统(例如,1800、2100和/或2300)移除的陈列产品的数量。In one embodiment, the display management system controller device 2400 may be configured to calculate the position of the pusher 1804 , the flip window 2124 and/or the spiral track 2302 . Accordingly, the display management system controller device 2400 may be configured to calculate the data from the one or more display management systems (eg, 1800 based on the detected movement of the one or more pushers 1804 , the flip windows 2124 , and/or the helical rails 2302 ). , 2100 and/or 2300) the number of displayed products removed.

在一个具体示例中,陈列管理系统控制器装置2400可以被配置为基于推动器1804的第一位置与所述推动器1804的第二位置的比较来确定从陈列管理系统1800移除的陈列产品的数量。特别地,处理器2404可以计算由推动器1804移动的距离,并且执行一个或多个处理来查阅与保持在陈列管理器系统1800内的多个产品相关联的深度尺寸的查找表(例如存储在存储器 2402中)。如此,处理器2404可以基于由用户输入的信息或由一个或多个传感器2410感测到的信息(例如,通过扫描一个或多个产品上的条形码或者检测与陈列管理系统1800内的一个或多个产品相关联的RFID信号,等)来确定保持在陈列管理系统1800内的产品类型。以这种方式,在从存储器2402 内的查找表接收到保持在陈列管理系统1800内的产品的深度尺寸并且已经计算了由推动器1804移动的距离时,处理器2404可以确定从陈列管理系统 1800被移除的产品的数量。类似地,处理器2404可以被用来确定插入到陈列管理系统1800中的产品的数量(例如,在补货过程期间等等)。In one specific example, the display management system controller device 2400 may be configured to determine the amount of display product removed from the display management system 1800 based on a comparison of the first position of the pusher 1804 with the second position of the pusher 1804 quantity. In particular, processor 2404 may calculate the distance moved by pusher 1804 and perform one or more processes to consult a look-up table of depth dimensions associated with a plurality of products held within display manager system 1800 (eg, stored in in memory 2402). As such, the processor 2404 may be based on information entered by the user or sensed by the one or more sensors 2410 (eg, by scanning barcodes on one or more products or detecting and communicating with one or more RFID signals associated with each product, etc.) to determine the type of product maintained within the display management system 1800. In this manner, upon receipt of the depth dimension of a product held within display management system 1800 from a look-up table within memory 2402 and the distance moved by pusher 1804 has been calculated, processor 2404 may determine that from display management system 1800 The number of products removed. Similarly, processor 2404 may be used to determine the quantity of products inserted into display management system 1800 (eg, during a replenishment process, etc.).

在另一示例中,陈列管理系统控制器装置2400可以推断存储在陈列管理系统1800内的产品类型的深度尺寸。具体而言,在存储在存储器2402中的查找表内没有可用信息的情况下,处理器2404可以基于推动器1804的一个或多个离散运动来确定产品的深度尺寸。具体来说,在从陈列管理系统 1800移除产品的重复实例之后,处理器2404可以执行一个或多个处理以识别由推动器1804移动的一致距离,并且从该识别的距离推断在响应于推动器1804的未来移动而确定从处理管理系统1800移除的产品的数量时要使用的产品的深度尺寸。In another example, the display management system controller device 2400 may infer the depth dimensions of product types stored within the display management system 1800 . Specifically, the processor 2404 may determine the depth dimension of the product based on one or more discrete movements of the pusher 1804 in the absence of information available in the look-up table stored in the memory 2402. Specifically, after removing duplicate instances of the product from the display management system 1800, the processor 2404 may perform one or more processes to identify a consistent distance moved by the pusher 1804, and infer from this identified distance that the The depth dimension of the product to be used when determining the quantity of product removed from the process management system 1800 based on future movement of the processor 1804.

因此,陈列管理系统控制器装置2400可以被配置为基于从诸如控制电路2006的一个或多个控制电路或诸如加速度计传感器2130的加速度计传感器接收到的信息来执行一个或多个处理。另外,陈列管理系统控制器装置 2400可以被配置为与装置2410通信。在一个示例中,装置2410可以包括照相机、扬声器、麦克风、接近传感器、运动传感器、环境光传感器或电子显示器等等。在一个具体示例中,陈列管理系统控制器装置2400可以被配置为在电子显示装置2410上显示与存储在陈列管理系统(例如系统1800、2100 或2300)内的一个或多个产品相关联的消息。Accordingly, display management system controller device 2400 may be configured to perform one or more processes based on information received from one or more control circuits, such as control circuit 2006, or an accelerometer sensor, such as accelerometer sensor 2130. Additionally, display management system controller device 2400 may be configured to communicate with device 2410. In one example, device 2410 may include a camera, a speaker, a microphone, a proximity sensor, a motion sensor, an ambient light sensor, or an electronic display, among others. In one specific example, display management system controller device 2400 may be configured to display on electronic display device 2410 a message associated with one or more products stored within the display management system (eg, system 1800, 2100, or 2300) .

陈列管理系统控制器装置2400可以被配置为与诸如移动装置2412的一个或多个移动装置进行通信。如此,陈列管理系统控制器装置2400与控制电路2006、加速度计传感器2130、装置2410和/或移动装置2412中的一个或多个之间的通信可以经由网络2408。进而,网络2408可以是可以利用任何通信协议的有线或无线网络。如此,网络2408可以是因特网、广域网 (WAN)、局域网(LAN)或蓝牙连接等等。在一个具体示例中,网络2408 可以利用工业、科学和医疗(ISM)无线电频带中的一个或多个频带。Display management system controller device 2400 may be configured to communicate with one or more mobile devices, such as mobile device 2412 . As such, communication between display management system controller device 2400 and one or more of control circuitry 2006 , accelerometer sensor 2130 , device 2410 , and/or mobile device 2412 may be via network 2408 . Further, network 2408 may be a wired or wireless network that may utilize any communication protocol. As such, the network 2408 may be the Internet, a wide area network (WAN), a local area network (LAN), or a Bluetooth connection, among others. In one specific example, the network 2408 may utilize one or more of the Industrial, Scientific and Medical (ISM) radio frequency bands.

在一个实施方式中,陈列管理系统控制器装置2400可以执行一个或多个处理以接收和存储与用户相关联的一条或多条传记信息,诸如用户从与装置2400通信的一个或多个陈列管理系统(例如1800、2100和/或2300)移除一个或多个陈列产品。在一个示例中,陈列管理系统控制器装置2400可以接收与用户相关联并且从用户携带的移动装置2412接收到的一条或多条传记信息。具体的,移动装置2412可以包括用户携带的智能手机或平板电脑,并且被配置为经由蓝牙连接、NFC连接或Wi-Fi连接等等中的一个或多个与陈列管理系统控制器装置2400通信。In one embodiment, the exhibit management system controller device 2400 may perform one or more processes to receive and store one or more pieces of biographical information associated with the user, such as the user from one or more exhibit management devices in communication with the device 2400. The system (eg, 1800, 2100, and/or 2300) removes one or more display products. In one example, the exhibit management system controller device 2400 may receive one or more pieces of biographical information associated with the user and received from the mobile device 2412 carried by the user. Specifically, the mobile device 2412 may comprise a smartphone or tablet carried by a user and configured to communicate with the display management system controller device 2400 via one or more of a Bluetooth connection, an NFC connection, or a Wi-Fi connection, among others.

在一个实施方式中,陈列管理系统控制器装置2400可以响应于从与一个或多个陈列管理系统(例如,1800、2100和/或2300)相关联的一个或多个传感器(例如,一个或多个传感器1822和/或2130)接收到的运动数据来执行一个或多个处理以从另外的传感器2410接收数据。在一个具体示例中,陈列管理系统控制器装置2400可以与照相机装置2410通信,并且执行一个或多个面部识别处理以确定与从陈列管理系统移动一个或多个产品的用户相关联的一条或多条人口统计信息(demographic information),运动数据从所述陈列管理系统接收。以这种方式,陈列管理系统控制器装置2400可以被用来收集可以用来规划商店内的产品陈列的购物者行为信息等。In one embodiment, the display management system controller device 2400 may respond to data from one or more sensors (eg, one or more sensors) associated with one or more display management systems (eg, 1800, 2100, and/or 2300). Motion data received by the other sensors 1822 and/or 2130 ) to perform one or more processes to receive data from the additional sensors 2410 . In one specific example, the display management system controller device 2400 can communicate with the camera device 2410 and perform one or more facial recognition processes to determine one or more facial recognition processes associated with a user who moved one or more products from the display management system Demographic information and athletic data are received from the display management system. In this manner, the display management system controller device 2400 can be used to collect shopper behavior information and the like that can be used to plan product displays within the store.

在又一个实施方式中,陈列管理系统控制器装置2400可以执行一个或多个处理,以从与一个或多个陈列管理系统(例如系统1800、2100和/或系统2300)的运动相关联的传感器接收到的数据识别一个或多个模式。如此,处理器2404可以从多个传感器(例如,一个或多个传感器1822和/或2130) 接收运动数据,并且基于所接收到的运动数据确定传感器数据是否表示由从一个或多个陈列管理系统(例如,系统1800、2100和/或2300)移除产品而导致的识别的模式(存储在存储器2402中)。In yet another embodiment, the display management system controller device 2400 may perform one or more processes to obtain information from sensors associated with movement of one or more display management systems (eg, systems 1800, 2100, and/or system 2300). The received data identifies one or more patterns. As such, the processor 2404 may receive motion data from a plurality of sensors (eg, one or more of the sensors 1822 and/or 2130 ) and determine, based on the received motion data, whether the sensor data represents data generated from the one or more display management systems (eg, systems 1800, 2100, and/or 2300) the identified patterns (stored in memory 2402) resulting from removal of the product.

在一个具体示例中,陈列管理系统控制器装置2400可以从单个陈列管理系统(例如系统1800、2100或2300)接收运动数据,并确定所接收到的运动数据表示多个相同的产品从陈列管理系统的移除。此外,陈列管理系统控制器装置2400可以计算从该陈列管理系统移除产品的速率。在一个示例中,如果产品从该显示管理系统被移除的速率高于阈值水平,则陈列管理系统控制器装置2400可以确定产品的移除可以代表企图盗窃。例如,在30秒内移除10个或更多个产品的情况下,系统控制器装置2400可以识别正在发生企图的盗窃。作为响应,陈列管理系统控制器装置2400可以执行一个或多个处理,以向安保人员传达警告消息。在一个示例中,该警告消息可以作为经由网络2408输送的电子消息来传达。另外或替代地,陈列管理系统控制器装置2400可以响应于确定运动数据表示与企图盗窃相关联的模式,而与照相机装置2410通信,以捕捉运动数据从其接收到的陈列管理系统的用户的一个或多个图像。以这种方式,可以记录可疑窃贼的一个或多个图像。此外,陈列管理系统控制器装置2400可以响应于确定所接收到的运动数据可以表示企图盗窃而执行一个或多个处理,以使可听消息和/或警笛响起。In one specific example, the display management system controller device 2400 may receive movement data from a single display management system (eg, system 1800, 2100, or 2300) and determine that the received movement data represents multiple identical products from the display management system 's removal. Additionally, the display management system controller device 2400 may calculate the rate at which products are removed from the display management system. In one example, if the rate at which products are removed from the display management system is above a threshold level, the display management system controller device 2400 may determine that the removal of products may represent attempted theft. For example, where 10 or more products are removed within 30 seconds, the system controller device 2400 may identify that an attempted theft is taking place. In response, the display management system controller device 2400 may perform one or more processes to communicate a warning message to security personnel. In one example, the warning message may be communicated as an electronic message delivered via network 2408 . Additionally or alternatively, the display management system controller device 2400 may communicate with the camera device 2410 to capture one of the users of the display management system from which the movement data was received in response to determining that the movement data represents a pattern associated with an attempted theft or multiple images. In this way, one or more images of the suspected thief can be recorded. Additionally, the display management system controller device 2400 may perform one or more processes to sound an audible message and/or a siren in response to determining that the received motion data may indicate attempted theft.

在另一个示例中,陈列管理系统控制器装置2400可以从与多个陈列管理系统(例如1800、2100和/或2300)相关联的多个传感器(例如,一个或多个传感器1822和/或2130等)接收传感器数据,其又被称为运动数据。因此,陈列管理系统控制器装置2400可以执行一个或多个处理,以从自传感器接收到的数据识别一个或多个模式。以这种方式,陈列管理系统控制器装置2400可以响应于产品正从商店内的彼此非常接近的陈列管理系统移除的速率高于阈值速率水平,而确定接收到的传感器数据可以表示企图的盗窃。作为响应,陈列管理系统控制器装置2400可以与照相机2410通信,或者将消息传达给安保人员等等。In another example, the display management system controller device 2400 may retrieve data from multiple sensors (eg, one or more sensors 1822 and/or 2130) associated with multiple display management systems (eg, 1800, 2100, and/or 2300). etc.) receive sensor data, also known as motion data. Accordingly, the merchandising management system controller device 2400 may perform one or more processes to identify one or more patterns from data received from the sensors. In this manner, the display management system controller device 2400 may determine that the received sensor data may be indicative of attempted theft in response to the rate at which products are being removed from the display management systems in close proximity to each other within the store above a threshold rate level. . In response, the display management system controller device 2400 may communicate with the camera 2410, or communicate a message to security personnel, or the like.

在一个实施方式中,陈列管理系统控制器装置2400可以从联接到翻转窗2124的加速度计传感器2130接收传感器数据。这样,从加速度计传感器 2130接收到的数据可以表示翻转窗2124的取向。在一个实施例中,陈列管理系统控制器装置2400可以被配置成重新校准与加速度计传感器2130相关联的止动位置(又被称为归零位置)。具体地,处理器2404可以执行一个或多个处理,以在翻转窗2124未被移动时识别翻转窗2124被定位在特定角度。如此,该特定角度可以不等于与竖直取向的0°的角度。作为响应,处理器 2404可以确定特定角度表示止动位置,加速度计传感器2130的运动将从该止动位置被计算。In one embodiment, the display management system controller device 2400 may receive sensor data from the accelerometer sensor 2130 coupled to the rollover window 2124 . In this way, the data received from the accelerometer sensor 2130 may represent the orientation of the rollover window 2124. In one embodiment, the display management system controller device 2400 may be configured to recalibrate the detent position (also referred to as the home position) associated with the accelerometer sensor 2130 . Specifically, the processor 2404 may perform one or more processes to identify that the rollover window 2124 is positioned at a particular angle when the rollover window 2124 is not moved. As such, this particular angle may not be equal to an angle of 0° from the vertical orientation. In response, the processor 2404 may determine that a particular angle represents a stop position from which motion of the accelerometer sensor 2130 will be calculated.

在一个实施方式中,陈列管理系统控制器装置2400可以被配置为推迟与识别企图的盗窃相关联的一个或多个处理。这样,处理器2404可以执行一个或多个处理,以允许与陈列管理系统控制器装置2400进行通信的一个或多个陈列管理系统的补货,等等。在一个示例中,可以利用物理键来解除陈列管理系统(1800、2100和/或2300)与陈列管理系统控制器装置2400 之间的通信。在另一个示例中,电子通信装置(未示出)可以由对与陈列管理系统控制器装置2400通信的陈列管理系统中的一个或多个补货的用户携带。这样,电子药物装置可以通过网络2408通信,以将用户识别为参与对陈列管理系统补货的人员。在又一示例中,基于陈列管理系统控制器装置 2400从用户接收到的指令,与陈列管理系统控制器装置2400相关联的被配置为识别潜在的企图盗窃的一个或多个安保特征可以被临时暂停。在一个具体示例中,该用户可以是商店经理等。这样,临时暂停可以被应用于与陈列管理系统控制器装置2400通信的陈列管理系统的子集(例如,陈列管理系统1800、2100和/或2300中的一个或多个)。In one embodiment, the display management system controller device 2400 may be configured to defer one or more processes associated with identifying an attempted theft. As such, processor 2404 may perform one or more processes to allow replenishment of one or more display management systems in communication with display management system controller device 2400, and the like. In one example, a physical key may be utilized to disengage communication between the exhibit management system (1800, 2100 and/or 2300) and the exhibit management system controller device 2400. In another example, an electronic communication device (not shown) may be carried by a user restocking one or more of the display management systems in communication with the display management system controller device 2400 . In this way, the electronic medication device can communicate over the network 2408 to identify the user as a person involved in replenishing the display management system. In yet another example, one or more security features associated with the exhibit management system controller device 2400 that are configured to identify a potential attempted theft may be temporarily disabled based on instructions received by the exhibit management system controller device 2400 from the user. pause. In one specific example, the user may be a store manager or the like. As such, a temporary suspension may be applied to a subset of exhibit management systems (eg, one or more of exhibit management systems 1800, 2100, and/or 2300) in communication with exhibit management system controller device 2400.

在又一示例中,陈列管理系统控制器装置2400可连接到库存控制系统 (未示出)。这样,由陈列管理系统控制器装置2400收集的与从一个或多个陈列管理系统(例如,陈列管理系统1800、2100和/或2300中的一个或多个) 移除的产品数量有关的信息可被传达到库存控制系统,使得与保持在商店内的库存相关的信息可以被实时更新,等等。In yet another example, the display management system controller device 2400 may be connected to an inventory control system (not shown). As such, the information collected by the display management system controller device 2400 regarding the quantity of products removed from one or more display management systems (eg, one or more of the display management systems 1800, 2100, and/or 2300) may be is communicated to the inventory control system so that information related to the inventory held in the store can be updated in real time, and so on.

在另一个示例中,陈列管理系统控制器装置2400可以与被配置为提供与一个或多个陈列管理系统(例如,陈列管理系统1800、2100和/或2300 中的一个或多个)相关联的数据的一个或多个装置、商店内的一个或多个个体(例如,从陈列管理系统移除一个或多个产品的顾客)和/或一个或多个通信装置(例如照相机、电子显示屏、麦克风、环境光传感器、运动传感器、移动装置等)等等通信。这样,陈列管理系统控制器装置2400可以与装置 2006、2330、2410和/或2412中的一个或多个通信。然而,在一个实施方式中,装置2006、2130、2410和/或2412中的一个或多个装置之间的通信可以不使用直接网络连接。这样,在一个示例中,所描绘的装置2006、2130、2410 和/或2412中的一个或多个装置之间的通信可以利用网状网络方法,而不脱离本文所描述的公开的范围。In another example, the exhibit management system controller device 2400 may be configured to provide a system that is associated with one or more exhibit management systems (eg, one or more of exhibit management systems 1800, 2100, and/or 2300). One or more devices of data, one or more individuals within the store (eg, a customer removing one or more products from the display management system) and/or one or more communication devices (eg, cameras, electronic displays, microphones, ambient light sensors, motion sensors, mobile devices, etc.) As such, the merchandising management system controller device 2400 may communicate with one or more of the devices 2006, 2330, 2410, and/or 2412. However, in one embodiment, communication between one or more of the devices 2006, 2130, 2410, and/or 2412 may not use a direct network connection. As such, in one example, communications between one or more of the depicted devices 2006, 2130, 2410, and/or 2412 may utilize a mesh networking approach without departing from the scope of the disclosure described herein.

图25示意性地描绘了可以由陈列管理系统控制器装置2400、并且特别由处理器2404执行的过程2500的流程图。特别地,处理器2404可以从一个或多个传感器(例如,一个或多个传感器1822和/或2130等)接收传感器数据。在一个示例中,在框2502处,可以接收传感器数据。响应于接收到传感器数据,处理器2404可以执行一个或多个处理,以确定所接收到的传感器数据的来源。在一个实施方式中,在过程2500的框2504处,处理器2404 可以确定传感器数据的来源。如此,处理器2404可以确定接收到的传感器数据的陈列管理系统源,诸如陈列管理系统1800、2100和/或2300中的一个或多个。FIG. 25 schematically depicts a flow diagram of a process 2500 that may be performed by the display management system controller device 2400 , and in particular by the processor 2404 . In particular, processor 2404 may receive sensor data from one or more sensors (eg, one or more sensors 1822 and/or 2130, etc.). In one example, at block 2502, sensor data may be received. In response to receiving the sensor data, the processor 2404 may perform one or more processes to determine the source of the received sensor data. In one embodiment, at block 2504 of the process 2500, the processor 2404 may determine the source of the sensor data. As such, the processor 2404 may determine the source of the display management system, such as one or more of the display management systems 1800, 2100, and/or 2300, of the received sensor data.

在确定接收到的传感器数据的来源之后,处理器2404可以执行一个或多个处理来计算陈列管理系统的机构的运动。特别地,处理器2404可以计算推动器1804、翻转窗2124和/或螺旋轨道2302中的一个或多个的位置。处理器2404可以从这个位置信息计算由相应的机构(1804、2124和/或2302) 中的一个或多个所移动的距离。如此,在框2506处,可以根据本文先前描述的运动计算方法执行用于计算陈列管理系统的机构的运动的这一个或多个处理。After determining the source of the received sensor data, the processor 2404 may perform one or more processes to calculate the movement of the mechanism of the display management system. In particular, the processor 2404 may calculate the position of one or more of the pusher 1804 , the flip window 2124 , and/or the helical track 2302 . From this position information, the processor 2404 can calculate the distance moved by one or more of the corresponding mechanisms (1804, 2124 and/or 2302). As such, at block 2506, the one or more processes for calculating the motion of the mechanism of the display management system may be performed in accordance with the motion calculation methods previously described herein.

此外,过程2500可以计算从陈列管理系统移除的产品的数量。特别地,处理器2404可以执行一个或多个处理以从存储在存储器2402内的查找表推断或查找产品的深度。使用该信息,处理器2404可以将产品的深度与在一个示例中由推动器1804移动的距离进行比较。进而,处理器2404可以计算从陈列管理系统1800移除的产品的数量。类似地,处理器2404可以利用实质上相似的处理来确定插入到陈列管理系统1800中的产品的数量。因此,在过程2500的框2508处,可以执行对从陈列管理系统移除的产品的数量的这种确定。Additionally, the process 2500 can count the number of products removed from the display management system. In particular, the processor 2404 may perform one or more processes to infer or look up the depth of the product from a look-up table stored in the memory 2402. Using this information, the processor 2404 can compare the depth of the product to the distance moved by the pusher 1804 in one example. In turn, processor 2404 may calculate the number of products removed from display management system 1800. Similarly, processor 2404 may utilize substantially similar processing to determine the number of products to insert into display management system 1800. Accordingly, at block 2508 of process 2500, this determination of the number of products removed from the display management system may be performed.

在一个示例中,在计算从陈列管理系统移除的产品的数量时,处理器 2404可以执行一个或多个处理以尝试从所接收到的传感器数据识别模式。如此,处理器2404可以执行一个或多个处理,以尝试从诸如系统1800、2100 和/或2300的一个或多个陈列管理系统识别产品移除模式。特别地,处理器 2404可以基于一个或多个产品移除速率高于一个或多个阈值速率水平、和/ 或产品正从相同的陈列管理系统和/或在彼此的预定物理半径内的多个陈列管理系统被移除来识别指示潜在的企图盗窃的一个或多个产品移除模式。在一个示例中,在框2510,处理器2404可以尝试从接收到的传感器数据中识别一个或多个模式。相应地,决定框2512表示由处理器2404执行的一个或多个处理,以检查是否从接收到的传感器数据中找到一个或多个产品移除模式。在一个示例中,如果处理器2404识别了产品移除模式,则过程2500可以继续进行到框2516,其中处理器2404可以传达警报消息。这样,该警报消息可以是由本地音频盒(诸如本地音频盒950)发出的可听消息和/或警鸣。在另一示例中,该警报消息可以是传达给商店内的安保人员的电子消息等等。在另一个示例中,如果产品移除模式未被处理器2404识别,则过程2500 可以继续进行到框2514,并且使得陈列管理系统控制器装置2400可以与外部装置(诸如装置2410和/或2412)通信。In one example, in calculating the number of products removed from the display management system, the processor 2404 may perform one or more processes to attempt to identify patterns from the received sensor data. As such, processor 2404 may perform one or more processes to attempt to identify product removal patterns from one or more display management systems, such as systems 1800, 2100, and/or 2300. In particular, the processor 2404 may be based on the fact that one or more product removal rates are above one or more threshold rate levels, and/or products are being removed from the same merchandising management system and/or multiple products within a predetermined physical radius of each other. The display management system is removed to identify one or more product removal patterns indicative of a potential attempted theft. In one example, at block 2510, the processor 2404 may attempt to identify one or more patterns from the received sensor data. Accordingly, decision block 2512 represents one or more processes performed by the processor 2404 to check whether one or more product removal patterns are found from the received sensor data. In one example, if the processor 2404 identifies a product removal mode, the process 2500 may continue to block 2516, where the processor 2404 may communicate an alert message. As such, the alert message may be an audible message and/or a siren issued by a local audio box, such as local audio box 950 . In another example, the alert message may be an electronic message communicated to security personnel within the store, or the like. In another example, if the product removal mode is not recognized by the processor 2404, the process 2500 may proceed to block 2514 and allow the display management system controller device 2400 to communicate with external devices (such as the devices 2410 and/or 2412) communication.

图26是用于计算从陈列管理系统移除的产品的数量的过程2600的流程图。特别地,基于从传感器(例如,传感器1822和/或2130)接收到的传感器数据来描述过程2600,所述传感器被配置为响应于在诸如陈列管理系统 1800、2100和/或2300的陈列管理系统内的可移动机构(推动器1804、翻转窗2124和/或螺旋轨道2302等)的运动而输出信号。在一个示例中,在过程2600的块2602处,该传感器数据可以由处理器2014接收。作为响应,处理器2014可以执行一个或多个处理,以确定接收到的输出数据的变化。具体而言,处理器2014可以执行一个或多个处理,以在存储器2010中查询存储的传感器值,该存储的传感器值指示来自在框2602处从其接收数据的同一传感器的先前输出。因此,处理器2014可以将所存储的传感器值与从陈列管理系统接收到的新的传感器值进行比较,并且计算来自传感器的输出的变化。26 is a flow diagram of a process 2600 for calculating the number of products removed from the display management system. In particular, process 2600 is described based on sensor data received from sensors (eg, sensors 1822 and/or 2130 ) that are configured to respond to display management systems such as display management systems 1800 , 2100 and/or 2300 The signal is output by the movement of the movable mechanism (the pusher 1804, the flip window 2124 and/or the spiral track 2302, etc.) inside. In one example, at block 2602 of process 2600, the sensor data may be received by processor 2014. In response, the processor 2014 may perform one or more processes to determine changes in the received output data. In particular, processor 2014 may perform one or more processes to query memory 2010 for stored sensor values indicative of previous outputs from the same sensor from which data was received at block 2602. Accordingly, the processor 2014 can compare the stored sensor values to new sensor values received from the display management system, and calculate changes in the output from the sensors.

在一个实施方式中,并且在决定框2606处,处理器2014可以将所计算的来自传感器的输出信号的变化与一个或多个预定阈值进行比较。这样,所述一个或多个预定阈值可以代表运动阈值,低于该运动阈值,处理器2014 可以丢弃在框2602处接收到的传感器数据。具体而言,如果所接收到的传感器数据低于所述一个或多个预定阈值,则其可能不是由于从陈列管理系统移除产品的结果,并且可能是由于商店货架的随机运动/振动等。如此,在一个示例中,框2606可具有电子滤波器的行为等等。In one embodiment, and at decision block 2606, the processor 2014 may compare the calculated change in the output signal from the sensor to one or more predetermined thresholds. As such, the one or more predetermined thresholds may represent a motion threshold below which the processor 2014 may discard the sensor data received at block 2602. Specifically, if the received sensor data is below the one or more predetermined thresholds, it may not be due to product removal from the display management system, but may be due to random movement/vibration of store shelves, etc. As such, in one example, block 2606 may have the behavior of an electronic filter, or the like.

在一个示例中,处理器2014可以在以低功率配置操作的同时执行与框 2602和2604相关联的那些处理。以这种方式,可以在消耗减少的电能量的同时执行对所接收到的传感器数据的评估,并且在一个示例中,由此延长传感器1822和/或2130的电池寿命。因此,在决定框2606处,如果确定所接收到的传感器数据不代表陈列管理系统的机构的运动超过一个或多个阈值,则过程2600继续进行到框2608,并且处理器2014保持在低功耗配置中。然而,如果确定接收到的传感器数据代表陈列管理系统的机构的运动高于一个或多个阈值,则过程2600继续进行到框2610,并且处理器2014可以进入高功率配置。在一个示例中,高功率配置可以包括传感器数据到远程处理器(诸如处理器2404)的传达。在另一个示例中,高功率配置可以包括由同一处理器2014执行一个或多个附加处理,其中这些附加处理相比于低功率配置中的处理器2014所消耗的电能而言可以以更高的速率消耗电能。In one example, the processor 2014 may perform those processes associated with blocks 2602 and 2604 while operating in a low power configuration. In this manner, evaluation of received sensor data can be performed while consuming reduced electrical energy, and in one example, thereby extending the battery life of sensors 1822 and/or 2130 . Accordingly, at decision block 2606, if it is determined that the received sensor data does not represent movement of the mechanism of the display management system exceeding one or more thresholds, the process 2600 proceeds to block 2608 and the processor 2014 remains at low power consumption in configuration. However, if it is determined that the received sensor data represents movement of the mechanism of the display management system above one or more thresholds, the process 2600 proceeds to block 2610 and the processor 2014 may enter a high power configuration. In one example, the high power configuration may include communication of sensor data to a remote processor, such as processor 2404. In another example, a high power configuration may include one or more additional processing performed by the same processor 2014, wherein the additional processing may be performed at a higher rate than the power consumed by the processor 2014 in a low power configuration The rate consumes power.

在一个示例中,过程2600包括计算陈列管理系统的可移动机构(例如,推动器1804、翻转窗2124、和/或螺旋轨道2302等)的位置。特别地,陈列管理系统的可移动机构的该位置计算可以在框2612处执行。这样,陈列管理系统的可移动机构的位置计算可以包括执行一个或多个子处理,以将接收到的传感器数据转换为可移动机构的位置的指示。具体而言,框2612可以包括执行一个或多个处理,以将与传感器1822的电容成比例的值转换成推动器1804的位置。另外或替代地,框2612可以包括执行一个或多个处理,以将与由加速度计2130感测到的加速度成比例的值转换成翻转窗2124或螺旋轨道2302的位置。In one example, process 2600 includes calculating the position of movable mechanisms of the display management system (eg, pusher 1804, flip window 2124, and/or spiral track 2302, etc.). In particular, this position calculation of the movable mechanism of the display management system may be performed at block 2612. As such, the calculation of the position of the movable mechanism of the display management system may include performing one or more sub-processing to convert the received sensor data into an indication of the position of the movable mechanism. Specifically, block 2612 may include performing one or more processes to convert a value proportional to the capacitance of sensor 1822 into the position of pusher 1804 . Additionally or alternatively, block 2612 may include performing one or more processes to convert a value proportional to the acceleration sensed by the accelerometer 2130 into the position of the flip window 2124 or helical track 2302 .

在计算陈列管理系统的可移动机构的位置时,处理器2014和/或处理器 2404可以查询存储在存储器2010和/或2402中的查找表,以获取与存储在陈列管理系统内的一个或多个产品相关联的信息。该信息可以包括存储在陈列管理系统内的产品的深度尺寸。相应地,使用该信息,处理器2014和/或 2404可以计算从陈列管理系统移除的产品的数量。具体而言,处理器2014 和/或2404可以将由陈列管理系统的可移动机构移动的距离与特定产品尺寸进行比较。在一个具体示例中,由推动器1804移动的距离可以被存储在陈列管理系统1800内的产品的深度尺寸除。在一个示例中,在框2616处,可以执行从陈列管理系统移除的产品的数量的这种计算。In calculating the location of the movable mechanism of the display management system, the processor 2014 and/or the processor 2404 may query a look-up table stored in the memory 2010 and/or 2402 to obtain one or more information associated with each product. This information may include depth dimensions of products stored within the display management system. Accordingly, using this information, processors 2014 and/or 2404 can calculate the number of products removed from the display management system. Specifically, processors 2014 and/or 2404 may compare the distance moved by the movable mechanism of the display management system to a particular product size. In one specific example, the distance moved by the pusher 1804 may be divided by the depth dimension of the products stored within the display management system 1800 . In one example, at block 2616, this calculation of the number of products removed from the display management system may be performed.

这里描述的各种实施例可以通过通用或专用计算机硬件来实现。在一个示例中,计算机硬件可以包括一个或多个处理器,或者被称为微处理器,其具有被配置为允许并行处理/执行指令的一个或多个处理核。这样,本文描述的各种公开可以被实现为软件编码,其中本领域技术人员将认识到可以与本文描述的公开一起使用的各种编码语言。此外,本文描述的公开可以用于专用集成电路(ASIC)的实施方式中,或者包括常规电子电路(或者被称为现成部件)的各种电子部件的实施方式中。此外,本领域普通技术人员将理解,包括在本公开内容中的各种描述可以被实现为使用各种不同的技术和过程传达的数据信号。例如,本文描述的各种公开内容的描述可以被理解为包括数据信号、数据指令或请求的一个或多个流,并且物理地传达为由不同电压电平、电流、电磁波、磁场、光学场或其组合表示的比特或符号。The various embodiments described herein can be implemented by general purpose or special purpose computer hardware. In one example, computer hardware may include one or more processors, otherwise referred to as microprocessors, having one or more processing cores configured to allow parallel processing/execution of instructions. As such, the various disclosures described herein can be implemented as software code, wherein those skilled in the art will recognize various coding languages that can be used with the disclosures described herein. Furthermore, the disclosure described herein may be used in the implementation of an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or in the implementation of various electronic components including conventional electronic circuits (or referred to as off-the-shelf components). Furthermore, those of ordinary skill in the art will understand that the various descriptions included in this disclosure may be implemented as data signals communicated using a variety of different technologies and processes. For example, descriptions of various disclosures described herein may be understood to include one or more streams of data signals, data instructions, or requests, and physically conveyed by different voltage levels, currents, electromagnetic waves, magnetic fields, optical fields, or The bit or symbol represented by its combination.

本文描述的一个或多个公开内容可以包括具有计算机可读介质的计算机程序产品,所述计算机可读介质具有存储在其上/其中的指令,所述指令在由处理器执行时被配置为执行一个或多个方法、技术、系统或本文所述的实施例。这样,存储在计算机可读介质上的指令可以包括要被执行的用于执行本文描述的方法、技术、系统或实施例的各个步骤的动作。此外,计算机可读介质可以包括具有被配置为由计算装置处理的指令的存储介质,并且具体地涉及与计算装置相关联的处理器。这样,计算机可读介质可以包括持久性或易失性存储器,诸如硬盘驱动器(HDD)、固态驱动器(SSD)、光盘 (CD-ROM,DVD)、磁带驱动器、软盘、ROM、RAM、EPROM、EEPROM、 DRAM、VRAM、闪存、RAID装置、远程数据存储(云存储等),或者适合于在其上/其中存储数据的任何其他介质类型或存储装置。另外,不同存储介质类型的组合可以被实现为混合存储装置。在一个实施方式中,第一存储介质可以优先于第二存储介质,使得不同的工作负载可以由具有不同优先级的存储介质实现。One or more of the disclosures described herein may include a computer program product having a computer-readable medium having stored thereon/in instructions that, when executed by a processor, are configured to execute One or more of the methods, techniques, systems, or embodiments described herein. As such, instructions stored on a computer-readable medium may include actions to be executed for performing the various steps of the methods, techniques, systems or embodiments described herein. In addition, a computer-readable medium may include a storage medium having instructions configured to be processed by a computing device, and in particular relates to a processor associated with the computing device. As such, computer-readable media may include persistent or volatile memory such as hard disk drives (HDDs), solid-state drives (SSDs), compact disks (CD-ROMs, DVDs), tape drives, floppy disks, ROM, RAM, EPROM, EEPROM , DRAM, VRAM, flash memory, RAID devices, remote data storage (cloud storage, etc.), or any other media type or storage device suitable for storing data on/in. Additionally, a combination of different storage media types may be implemented as a hybrid storage device. In one embodiment, the first storage medium may take precedence over the second storage medium, such that different workloads may be implemented by storage media with different priorities.

此外,计算机可读介质可存储被配置为控制通用或专用计算机中的一个或多个的软件代码/指令。所述软件可以用于便于人类用户和计算装置之间的接口,并且其中所述软件可以包括装置驱动器、操作系统和应用程序。如此,计算机可读介质可存储被配置为执行本文中所描述的一个或多个实施方式的软件代码/指令。In addition, the computer-readable medium may store software codes/instructions configured to control one or more of a general-purpose or special-purpose computer. The software can be used to facilitate an interface between a human user and a computing device, and wherein the software can include device drivers, operating systems, and applications. As such, a computer-readable medium may store software code/instructions configured to perform one or more embodiments described herein.

本领域的普通技术人员将理解,可以将本文描述的那些实施方式的各种说明性逻辑块、模块、电路、技术或方法步骤实现为电子硬件装置、计算机软件或其组合。如此,贯穿本公开已经就一般功能描述了各种说明性模块/ 部件,其中本领域普通技术人员将理解,所描述的公开可以实现为硬件、软件或两者的组合。Those of ordinary skill in the art will understand that the various illustrative logical blocks, modules, circuits, techniques, or method steps of those embodiments described herein can be implemented as electronic hardware devices, computer software, or combinations thereof. As such, various illustrative modules/components have been described throughout this disclosure in terms of general functionality, where those of ordinary skill in the art will understand that the described disclosure may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of both.

贯穿本公开所描述的一个或多个实施方式可利用逻辑块、模块和电路,所述逻辑块、模块和电路可以使用通用处理器、数字信号处理器(DSP)、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(FPGA)或其他可编程逻辑装置、分立门或晶体管逻辑、分立硬件部件、或被设计为执行本文所述功能的其任何组合实现或执行。通用处理器可以是微处理器,或任何常规处理器、控制器、微控制器或状态机。处理器还可以被实现为计算装置的组合(例如 DSP和微处理器的组合),多个微处理器,与DSP内的结合的一个或多个微处理器,或者任何其他这样的配置。One or more embodiments described throughout this disclosure may utilize logical blocks, modules, and circuits that may use general purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSPs), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), A field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic device, discrete gate or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, or any combination thereof designed to perform the functions described herein is implemented or performed. A general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor, or any conventional processor, controller, microcontroller, or state machine. A processor may also be implemented as a combination of computing devices (eg, a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor), multiple microprocessors, one or more microprocessors combined within a DSP, or any other such configuration.

结合本文公开的实施例描述的技术或方法的步骤可直接在硬件、由处理器执行的软件或两者的组合中实施。在一些实施例中,本文描述的任何软件模块、软件层或线程可以包括引擎,该引擎包括被配置为执行本文描述的实施例的固件或软件和硬件。本文所述的软件模块或软件层的功能可以直接在硬件中实施,也可以实施为由处理器执行的软件,也可以实施为二者的结合。软件模块可以驻留在RAM存储器、闪存、ROM存储器、EPROM存储器、EEPROM存储器、寄存器、硬盘、可移动磁盘、CD-ROM或本领域已知的任何其他形式的存储介质中。示例存储介质联接到处理器,使得处理器可以从存储介质读取数据并将数据写入存储介质。在替代方式中,存储介质可以集成到处理器。处理器和存储介质可以驻留在ASIC中。ASIC可以驻留在用户装置中。在替代方式中,处理器和存储介质可以作为分立部件驻留在用户装置中。Steps of techniques or methods described in connection with the embodiments disclosed herein may be implemented directly in hardware, software executed by a processor, or a combination of both. In some embodiments, any software module, software layer, or thread described herein may include an engine comprising firmware or software and hardware configured to perform the embodiments described herein. The functions of the software modules or software layers described herein may be directly implemented in hardware, or may be implemented as software executed by a processor, or may be implemented as a combination of the two. A software module may reside in RAM memory, flash memory, ROM memory, EPROM memory, EEPROM memory, registers, hard disk, removable disk, CD-ROM, or any other form of storage medium known in the art. An example storage medium is coupled to the processor such that the processor can read data from, and write data to, the storage medium. In the alternative, the storage medium may be integrated into the processor. The processor and storage medium may reside in an ASIC. The ASIC may reside in the user device. In the alternative, the processor and storage medium may reside in the user device as discrete components.

图27示出了根据本公开的一个或多个说明性方面的用于传达和分发内容的设备的示例框图。网络27110可以包括具有一个或多个接入点的网络,因特网装置,电话网络,蜂窝电话网络,光纤网络,本地无线网络(例如, WiMAX),卫星网络以及任何其他期望的网络。网络27110可以包括和/或充当云计算基础设施,该云计算基础设施包括各种处理和/或存储器装置(例如,服务器,数据库,应用程序提供者等)。27 shows an example block diagram of an apparatus for communicating and distributing content in accordance with one or more illustrative aspects of the present disclosure. Network 27110 may include a network with one or more access points, Internet appliances, telephone networks, cellular telephone networks, fiber optic networks, local wireless networks (eg, WiMAX), satellite networks, and any other desired network. Network 27110 may include and/or serve as cloud computing infrastructure including various processing and/or memory devices (eg, servers, databases, application providers, etc.).

详细描述Detailed Description

本文所述的各种装置(诸如连续显示货架边缘标签装置,服务器,扫描仪,数据库,计算机等)可以是计算装置,并且图27示出了可用于实现本文讨论的各种计算装置中的任意的通用硬件元件。计算装置27100可以包括一个或多个处理器27101,其可以执行计算机程序的指令以执行本文描述的任何特征。处理器27101可以包括定制的数字集成电路,诸如ASIC。但是,在一些应用中,可以使用市售的处理器。指令可以被存储在任何类型的非暂时性计算机可读介质或存储器中,以配置处理器27101的操作。例如,可以将指令存储在只读存储器(ROM)27102,随机存取存储器(RAM)27103,硬盘驱动器27105,诸如通用串行总线(USB)驱动器的可移除介质27104,光盘(CD)或数字多功能盘(DVD),软盘驱动器或任何其他期望的电子存储介质中。指令也可以存储在附接(或内部)硬盘驱动器27105中。存储器27102、27103、27104和/或27105中的一个或多个可以包括更高级的操作环境,诸如用于高级功能和适应性的操作系统。The various devices described herein (such as continuous display shelf edge label devices, servers, scanners, databases, computers, etc.) may be computing devices, and FIG. 27 illustrates that any of the various computing devices discussed herein may be implemented. common hardware components. Computing device 27100 can include one or more processors 27101 that can execute instructions of a computer program to perform any of the features described herein. The processor 27101 may comprise a custom digital integrated circuit, such as an ASIC. However, in some applications, commercially available processors may be used. Instructions may be stored in any type of non-transitory computer readable medium or memory to configure the operation of the processor 27101. For example, instructions may be stored in read only memory (ROM) 27102, random access memory (RAM) 27103, hard drive 27105, removable media 27104 such as a universal serial bus (USB) drive, compact disc (CD) or digital Versatile Disc (DVD), floppy disk drive or any other desired electronic storage medium. Instructions may also be stored on an attached (or internal) hard drive 27105. One or more of memories 27102, 27103, 27104, and/or 27105 may include a higher-level operating environment, such as an operating system for advanced functionality and adaptability.

一个或多个存储器27102、27103、27104和/或27105可以包括存储的地址位置和显示数据位置数据。地址位置可以包括标识计算装置27100的地址。地址可以唯一地标识计算装置27100。显示数据位置数据可以被处理器27101 用来格式化要在显示器27111上显示的数据。这可以包括文本数据、图形、动态内容和组合。根据至少一个实施例,存储器中的显示数据位置数据可以符合诸如HTML、XML等的标记语言。虽然在图27中显示器27111被示出为在计算装置27100的外部,但是显示器27111也可以被集成到与计算装置 27100相同的物理外壳和/或结构中。在计算装置27100内示出的一个或多个部件类似地可以分开容纳在与计算装置27100的另一个装置中和/或在另一个位置中。One or more of memories 27102, 27103, 27104, and/or 27105 may include stored address location and display data location data. The address location may include an address identifying computing device 27100. The address may uniquely identify computing device 27100. Display data location data may be used by processor 27101 to format data to be displayed on display 27111. This can include textual data, graphics, dynamic content and composition. According to at least one embodiment, the display data location data in memory may conform to a markup language such as HTML, XML, or the like. Although the display 27111 is shown external to the computing device 27100 in FIG. 27, the display 27111 may also be integrated into the same physical housing and/or structure as the computing device 27100. One or more components shown within computing device 27100 may similarly be housed separately in another device and/or in another location than computing device 27100 .

计算装置27100可以包括一个或多个输出装置,诸如显示器27111和打印机27112,并且可以包括一个或多个输出装置控制器27107,诸如视频处理器。还可以有一个或多个用户输入装置(未示出),诸如遥控器、键盘、鼠标、触摸屏、麦克风等。在另一个实施例中,用户的输入/输出功能可以通过显示器27111发生,其中显示器27111可被配置为允许触摸屏输入以便在显示器27111上看到附加的输出。如图29-34B的例子中所示,显示器27111 可被配置为沿着零售商的货架的整个边缘取向。货架的这个区域通常包括:纸标签,纸标签标识在其之上的销售的产品;以及可能的附加信息,诸如价格、成本/盎司等等。电子货架标签允许与纸质标签类似的概念,但是具有单独的计算装置,该计算装置具有用于每个产品的显示屏幕。这样的电子货架标签装置提供关于在其之上销售的单个产品的信息以及可能的附加信息,诸如价格、成本/盎司等,并且可以包括诸如视频之类的附加输出。该视频可以包含促销内容、季节性问候、和/或针对消费者的一般消息。然而,图27的显示器27111被配置为输出与零售商可以提供用于销售的两种不同产品相关的至少两个用户界面。Computing device 27100 may include one or more output devices, such as a display 27111 and a printer 27112, and may include one or more output device controllers 27107, such as a video processor. There may also be one or more user input devices (not shown), such as a remote control, keyboard, mouse, touch screen, microphone, and the like. In another embodiment, the user's input/output functions may occur through display 27111, which may be configured to allow touch screen input to view additional output on display 27111. As shown in the examples of Figures 29-34B, the display 27111 can be configured to be oriented along the entire edge of the retailer's shelf. This area of the shelf typically includes: a paper label that identifies the product being sold on it; and possibly additional information such as price, cost per ounce, and the like. Electronic shelf labels allow a similar concept to paper labels, but with a separate computing device with a display screen for each product. Such electronic shelf label devices provide information about the individual products sold thereon and possibly additional information, such as price, cost per ounce, etc., and may include additional output such as video. The video may contain promotional content, seasonal greetings, and/or general messages for consumers. However, the display 27111 of Figure 27 is configured to output at least two user interfaces related to two different products that the retailer may offer for sale.

与装置控制器27107和/或处理器27101一起操作的显示器27111可以被配置为接收由个人的手指跨其表面的擦过。手指的擦过可以与相对于输出的用户界面数据而要采取的动作的操作表相关联。与装置控制器27107和/或处理器27101一起操作的显示器27111可以被配置为将跨越其表面的一个或多个手指擦过转换为如本文所述的要采取的一个或多个特定动作。说明性示例可以包括将在表面上的两个手指的彼此远离的移动解释为扩大指令,例如由个人用于扩大某些事物的大小的输入,诸如用户界面的文本大小、用户界面的边界设计大小、用户界面的框架大小等。其他示例包括将通过在用户界面的顶部之上两个手指移动创建的“X”解释为删除指令,例如个人用于删除用户界面的输入。还有其他示例包括将手指从显示器的一个区域到显示器的另一个区域的按压并保持并移动解释为移动指令,例如个人用于将用户界面从显示器上的当前位置移动到显示器上的另一个位置的输入。另外的说明性示例包括将通过两个手指敲击的在显示器表面上的双击解释为添加指令,例如由个人用于将用户界面添加到被轻敲的显示器的区域的输入。更进一步的说明性示例包括将表面上的两个手指的朝向彼此的移动解释为缩小指令,例如由个体用于缩小某些事物的大小的输入,诸如用户界面的文本大小、用户界面的边界设计大小、用户界面的框架大小等。这里描述的示例仅仅是说明性的,并且在本文中可以包括跨越显示器27111的表面的许多附加输入移动/ 敲击中的任何,用于个人的多种其他类型的指令请求中的任何,以改变显示器27111上的用户界面的参数。Display 27111, operating in conjunction with device controller 27107 and/or processor 27101, may be configured to receive swipes across its surface by a person's finger. The swipe of the finger may be associated with an action sheet of actions to be taken with respect to the output user interface data. Display 27111 operating in conjunction with device controller 27107 and/or processor 27101 may be configured to translate one or more finger swipes across its surface to one or more specific actions to be taken as described herein. Illustrative examples may include interpreting the movement of two fingers on a surface away from each other as an enlargement instruction, such as an input used by an individual to enlarge the size of something, such as text size for a user interface, border design size for a user interface , the frame size of the user interface, etc. Other examples include interpreting an "X" created by moving two fingers over the top of the user interface as a delete instruction, such as a personal input for deleting the user interface. Still other examples include interpreting a press-and-hold and movement of a finger from one area of the display to another area of the display as a movement instruction, such as is used by an individual to move a user interface from its current location on the display to another location on the display input of. Additional illustrative examples include interpreting a double tap on a display surface by a two-finger tap as an add instruction, such as an input by an individual to add a user interface to the tapped area of the display. Further illustrative examples include interpreting the movement of two fingers on a surface towards each other as a zoom-out instruction, such as an input by an individual to reduce the size of something, such as text size of a user interface, boundary design of a user interface size, frame size of the user interface, etc. The examples described here are merely illustrative and may include any of a number of additional input movements/tappings across the surface of the display 27111 herein, any of a number of other types of instruction requests for individuals, to change Parameters of the user interface on display 27111.

在其他实施例中,显示器27111可以被配置为以与本文关于个人的手指所描述的相似的方式来识别触笔或其它指向装置抵靠其表面的移动。用户和显示器27111可以与作为由用户进行的输入的来源的触笔交互。就个人的潜在授权而言,可以将某种方式的识别/授权建立在触笔中,使得如果触笔接触显示器27111,则触笔可以充当用于授权个人以对如本文所述的连续显示货架边缘标签装置的一个或多个参数进行改变的机构。在更进一步的实施例中,显示器27111可以被配置成识别个人的手指抵靠其表面的移动,用于直接输入用户界面信息。用户可以用她的手指在显示器27111上手写关于特定产品的定价信息和/或其他信息。软件可以被包括在计算装置的存储器中以将接收到的手指擦过转换为对应于定价信息、产品名称信息和/或其他产品数据信息。在这样的示例中,工作人员只能写入产品的当前定价。In other embodiments, display 27111 may be configured to recognize movement of a stylus or other pointing device against its surface in a manner similar to that described herein with respect to an individual's fingers. The user and display 27111 can interact with the stylus as the source of input by the user. In terms of potential authorization of an individual, some form of identification/authorization can be built into the stylus such that if the stylus touches the display 27111, the stylus can act as a tool for authorizing the individual to display the shelf continuously as described herein. A mechanism for changing one or more parameters of an edge label device. In still further embodiments, the display 27111 may be configured to recognize movement of an individual's finger against its surface for direct input of user interface information. The user may handwrite pricing information and/or other information about a particular product on display 27111 with her finger. Software may be included in the memory of the computing device to translate the received finger swipes into information corresponding to pricing information, product name information, and/or other product data information. In such an example, the worker can only write the current pricing of the product.

类似地,显示器27111可以被配置为激活屏幕上的电子键盘和/或电子小键盘。可以在显示器27111上显示数字字母用户界面,以允许授权的个人以某种其他方式输入产品信息数据和/或修改显示器27111上的用户界面。例如,工作人员可以通过在显示的数字小键盘上输入数字序列来输入特定产品的定价。可以由与显示器27111相关联的计算装置的存储器内的软件将具有“$”字符、随后是“1”、“.、“4”、“9”的输入转换为用于特定产品的用户界面的 $1.49的定价标签。在其他情况下,工作人员可以使用字母数字字符键入用于在产品的用户界面中显示的文本,诸如“现在廉价出售!”。在其他情况下,特殊的数字输入选项可用于授权的个人以用于快速输入。收藏列表可以提示工作人员从列表选择,在该列表中,一个输入可以是“现在廉价出售”,第二个输入可以是“明天廉价出售结束”,而另一个输入可以是“买1送1!”。Similarly, display 27111 can be configured to activate an on-screen electronic keyboard and/or electronic keypad. An alphanumeric user interface may be displayed on display 27111 to allow authorized individuals to enter product information data and/or modify the user interface on display 27111 in some other manner. For example, a worker can enter pricing for a particular product by entering a sequence of numbers on the displayed numeric keypad. Inputs with a "$" character followed by a "1", "., "4", "9" may be translated by software within the memory of the computing device associated with the display 27111 to a user interface for a particular product. Pricing label of $1.49. In other cases, staff may use alphanumeric characters to type text for display in the product's user interface, such as "Now on sale! ”. In other cases, special numeric entry options are available to authorized individuals for quick entry. A favorites list can prompt staff to choose from a list where one entry can be “on sale now” and a second One input could be "The bargain sale ends tomorrow", while another input could be "Buy 1 get 1 free! ".

在其他实施例中,授权的个人可以访问显示器27111以便从远程位置访问用户界面的数据。在图28A的示例中,其中可以在数据库28223中维持关于产品的数据,工作人员可以关于产品的特定用户界面而访问显示器27111。工作人员可以通过可视文件/文件夹系统访问数据库。实现本文所述的公开的网络系统的每个部件可以通过连续显示货架边缘标签装置可访问,并且可以在显示器27111上出现为某种类型的视觉指示器。工作人员可以搜索并找到所请求数据的适用部件(诸如找到对应于数据库28223的图标)并访问该部件(启动该图标)以获得期望的数据。可以使用许多附加输入机构中的任何一个,并且这里描述的示例仅仅是说明性的。In other embodiments, authorized individuals may access the display 27111 to access data of the user interface from a remote location. In the example of Figure 28A, where data about the product may be maintained in database 28223, a worker may access display 27111 with respect to the product's specific user interface. Staff can access the database through a visual file/folder system. Each component that implements the disclosed network system described herein may be accessible through a continuous display shelf edge label device, and may appear on display 27111 as some type of visual indicator. A worker can search for and find the appropriate component for the requested data (such as finding an icon corresponding to database 28223) and access the component (activate the icon) to obtain the desired data. Any of a number of additional input mechanisms could be used, and the examples described here are illustrative only.

在另外的实施例中,显示器27111可以被配置为包括基于姿态的界面能力,其作为允许授权的个人在显示器27111上编辑/操纵用户界面的一种方式。显示器27111可以包括适当的硬件和/或软件部件,以经由数学算法来解释个人的姿态(无论是手指、手和/或一些其他部位的姿态)。这些姿态可以包括本文描述的手指到表面的示例中的一个或多个。在这些实施例中的一些实施例中,一个或多个照相机可以与显示器27111相关联和/或与显示器27111一起被包括,用于捕获姿态的成像和识别。尽管本文的大部分示例是针对使用其手指与显示器接口(interfacing with)的个人,但是应当理解的是,可以通过本文所述的基于姿态的技术类似地实现这样的示例。In further embodiments, the display 27111 may be configured to include gesture-based interface capabilities as a way to allow authorized individuals to edit/manipulate the user interface on the display 27111. Display 27111 may include appropriate hardware and/or software components to interpret an individual's gesture (whether finger, hand, and/or some other body gesture) via mathematical algorithms. These gestures may include one or more of the finger-to-surface examples described herein. In some of these embodiments, one or more cameras may be associated with and/or included with display 27111 for capturing imaging and recognition of gestures. Although most of the examples herein are directed to individuals using their fingers to interfacing with a display, it should be understood that such examples can be similarly implemented through the gesture-based techniques described herein.

计算装置27100还可以包括一个或多个网络接口,诸如与外部网络 27110通信的输入/输出电路27109(诸如网络接口电路,扫描仪接口电路等)。输入/输出电路27109可以是有线接口、无线接口或两者的组合。输入/输出电路27109允许在两个计算装置之间的通信,诸如连续显示货架边缘标签装置和扫描仪(例如本文所述的图28中的28200和28221)、连续显示货架边缘标签装置和远程用户终端(例如本文描述的图28中的28200和28227)、和/或连续显示货架边缘标签装置和数据库(例如本文描述的图28中的28200 和28223)、和/或连续显示货架边缘标签装置和货架上的产品(例如本文描述的图28B中的28200A、28200B和28200C)。Computing device 27100 may also include one or more network interfaces, such as input/output circuits 27109 (such as network interface circuits, scanner interface circuits, etc.) that communicate with external network 27110. Input/output circuitry 27109 may be a wired interface, a wireless interface, or a combination of both. Input/output circuitry 27109 allows communication between two computing devices, such as continuous display shelf edge label devices and scanners (eg, 28200 and 28221 in Figure 28 described herein), continuous display shelf edge label devices and remote users Terminals (eg, 28200 and 28227 in Figure 28 described herein), and/or continuous display shelf edge label devices and databases (eg, 28200 and 28223 in Figure 28 described herein), and/or continuous display shelf edge label devices and Products on the shelf (eg, 28200A, 28200B, and 28200C in Figure 28B described herein).

计算装置27100还可以包括电源27113。电源27113允许计算装置操作处理器27101和各种其他部件。例如,从电源113汲取的功率可以用于为货架上的产品供电,例如,本文描述的图28B中的28200A、28200B和28200C。从电源113汲取的功率也可以用于向封装货架上的产品的包装提供功率。电源27113可以包括专用电池电源或外部电源,诸如AC电源连接。在其他实施例中,电源27113可以被配置为通过从计算装置所位于的商店中的环境光采集用于操作的能量来操作。光能可以通过各种转换手段捕获,诸如通过光电传感器、太阳能光伏面板和光电二极管。因为计算装置27100可以在没有外部源连接的情况下操作,所以可以实现计算装置从一个物理位置到另一个物理位置的移动,而不需要重新连接到另一个外部源。此外,因为计算装置 27100可以在没有内部电池的情况下操作,所以计算装置不需要被检查以确保操作,也不需要让技术人员更换内部电池。Computing device 27100 may also include power supply 27113. The power supply 27113 allows the computing device to operate the processor 27101 and various other components. For example, power drawn from power supply 113 may be used to power products on the shelf, eg, 28200A, 28200B, and 28200C in Figure 28B described herein. The power drawn from the power supply 113 may also be used to provide power to the packaging that encapsulates the product on the shelf. Power source 27113 may include a dedicated battery power source or an external power source, such as an AC power connection. In other embodiments, the power supply 27113 may be configured to operate by harvesting energy for operation from ambient light in a store where the computing device is located. Light energy can be captured by various conversion means, such as by photosensors, solar photovoltaic panels, and photodiodes. Because the computing device 27100 can operate without an external source connection, movement of the computing device from one physical location to another can be accomplished without requiring reconnection to another external source. Additionally, because the computing device 27100 can operate without an internal battery, the computing device does not need to be inspected to ensure operation, nor does it require a technician to replace the internal battery.

图28A-28B示出了根据本发明的一个或多个说明性方面的用于传达和分发内容的系统的示例框图。在图28A的示例中,多个计算装置被示出为可操作地连接到网络28210。网络28210可以包括网络27110。示出连接到网络28210的三个连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200A-28200C和产品 28201A-28201C。另外,封装产品28201A-28201C的包装也可以连接到网络 28210。连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200A-28200C可以是计算装置27100 和/或可以包括其中描述的部件中的一个或多个。三个连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200A-28200C可以沿着零售商的商店的通道。如图28B所示,三个连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200A-28200C可以被定位为在彼此上方。产品 28201A-201C可以分别定位于连续显示货架边标签装置28200A-200C中的每一个的上方。产品28201A-201C可以彼此通信并与连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200A-28200C通信。虽然说明性地示出为无线通信,但连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200A-200C与产品28201A-201C之间的传输路径可以是通过网络28210和/或以某种其他方式的有线通信路径。28A-28B illustrate example block diagrams of systems for communicating and distributing content in accordance with one or more illustrative aspects of the invention. In the example of FIG. 28A, a plurality of computing devices are shown operably connected to network 28210. Network 28210 may include Network 27110. Three consecutive display shelf edge label devices 28200A-28200C and products 28201A-28201C are shown connected to network 28210. In addition, packages of packaged products 28201A-28201C can also be connected to network 28210. Continuous display shelf edge label devices 28200A-28200C may be computing device 27100 and/or may include one or more of the components described therein. Three consecutive display shelf edge label devices 28200A-28200C may be along the aisle of a retailer's store. As shown in Figure 28B, three consecutive display shelf edge label devices 28200A-28200C may be positioned over each other. Products 28201A-201C may be positioned over each of the consecutive display shelf edge label devices 28200A-200C, respectively. Products 28201A-201C can communicate with each other and with continuous display shelf edge label devices 28200A-28200C. Although illustratively shown as wireless communication, the transmission path between the continuous display shelf edge label devices 28200A-200C and the products 28201A-201C may be a wired communication path through the network 28210 and/or in some other manner.

连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200A被示为与扫描仪28221通信。虽然说明性地示出为无线通信,但是连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200A和扫描仪28221之间的传输路径可以是通过网络28210和/或以某种其他方式的有线通信路径。扫描仪28221可以通过诸如输入/输出电路27109的通信接口与连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200A交互。连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200A 可以被配置为接收表示关于货架上的这样的产品的信息的数据,连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200A位于所述货架处。授权的个人(诸如零售商的工作人员)可能期望更新当前正在显示的关于货架上的产品的定价数据。通过与扫描仪28221接口,特定产品的价格数据可以由连续显示货架边缘标签装置 28200A以电子方式接收。用于传输这样的数据的示例性方式包括编码用于无线传输的数据,以及将数据无线地转发到连续显示货架边缘标签装置 28200A。在一个示例中,个人可以在扫描仪28221处键入价格,并且代表价格的数据可以被无线地发送到连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200A。然后,连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200A可以更新与本文描述的价格数据对应的产品的用户界面。Continuous display shelf edge label device 28200A is shown in communication with scanner 28221. Although illustratively shown as wireless communication, the transmission path between the continuous display shelf edge label device 28200A and the scanner 28221 may be a wired communication path through the network 28210 and/or in some other manner. The scanner 28221 may interact with the continuous display shelf edge label device 28200A through a communication interface such as the input/output circuit 27109. The continuous display shelf edge label device 28200A may be configured to receive data representing information about such products on the shelf at which the continuous display shelf edge label device 28200A is located. An authorized individual, such as a retailer's staff, may desire to update the pricing data currently being displayed about the products on the shelf. By interfacing with the scanner 28221, price data for a particular product may be electronically received by the continuous display shelf edge label device 28200A. Exemplary means for transmitting such data include encoding the data for wireless transmission, and wirelessly forwarding the data to the continuous display shelf edge label device 28200A. In one example, a person may enter a price at the scanner 28221 and data representing the price may be wirelessly sent to the continuous display shelf edge label device 28200A. The continuous display shelf edge label device 28200A can then update the user interface of the product corresponding to the price data described herein.

连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200B和28200C被示出为彼此通信。尽管说明性地示出为无线通信,但连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200B和28200C之间的传输路径可以是通过网络28210和/或以某种其他方式的有线通信路径。连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200B可以通过通信接口(诸如输入/输出电路27109)与连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200C交互。连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200B可以被配置为接收表示关于架上的产品的信息的数据,连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200B位于所述货架处。授权的个人(诸如零售商的工作人员)可以期望更新当前正在显示的关于货架上的产品的定价数据。通过与连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200C交互,特定产品的价格数据可以由连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200B以电子方式接收。这样的接口可以是工作人员将其手指跨连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200C的显示表面擦过以启动移动指令,以将来自连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200C的用户界面转移到连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200B。在一个示例中,工作人员可以在连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200C上按压并保持用户界面,并且以轻拂动作快速地移动她的手指。这样的动作可以被系统解释为将被轻拂的用户界面转移到下一个货架边缘。这样,因为连续显示货架边缘标签装置 28200B在连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200C上方的下一个货架边缘上,所以轻拂的用户界面可以被添加到连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200B。用于传输这种数据的说明性方式包括编码用于有线传输的数据,以及将数据转发到连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200B。Continuous display shelf edge label devices 28200B and 28200C are shown in communication with each other. Although illustratively shown as wireless communication, the transmission path between the continuous display shelf edge label devices 28200B and 28200C may be a wired communication path through the network 28210 and/or in some other manner. Continuous display shelf edge label device 28200B may interact with continuous display shelf edge label device 28200C through a communication interface, such as input/output circuitry 27109. The continuous display shelf edge label device 28200B may be configured to receive data representing information about the products on the shelf at which the continuous display shelf edge label device 28200B is located. An authorized individual, such as a retailer's staff, may desire to update the pricing data currently being displayed regarding the products on the shelf. By interacting with the continuous display shelf edge label device 28200C, price data for a particular product can be electronically received by the continuous display shelf edge label device 28200B. Such an interface could be a worker swiping their finger across the display surface of the continuous display shelf edge label device 28200C to initiate movement commands to transfer the user interface from the continuous display shelf edge label device 28200C to the continuous display shelf edge label device 28200B . In one example, a worker may press and hold the user interface on the continuous display shelf edge label device 28200C and move her finger quickly in a flicking motion. Such an action can be interpreted by the system as moving the flicked user interface to the next shelf edge. In this way, since the continuous display shelf edge label device 28200B is on the next shelf edge above the continuous display shelf edge label device 28200C, a flicking user interface can be added to the continuous display shelf edge label device 28200B. Illustrative means for transmitting such data include encoding the data for wired transmission, and forwarding the data to the continuous display shelf edge label device 28200B.

位于货架附近的工作人员与扫描仪28221之间的交互的方面可以在与这种货架相隔很远的工作人员之间被类似地实施。示出了用户终端装置28227 通过网络28210和主集线器28225可操作地连接到连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200A-28200C和产品28201A-201C。主集线器28225可以是某种类型的中央处理服务器,其被配置为适应零售商网络的各种后端部件(诸如用户终端28227和数据库28223)之间的通信的传输、以及通过网络28210从后端到店面端(诸如到连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200A-28200C)的传输、以及通过网络28210到产品28201A-201C的传输。主集线器28225、用户终端 28227和/或数据库28223可以包括图27中示出的计算装置27100的一个或多个部件。Aspects of the interaction between a worker located near a shelf and the scanner 28221 can be similarly implemented between workers located far from such a shelf. User terminal device 28227 is shown operably connected to continuous display shelf edge label devices 28200A-28200C and products 28201A-201C via network 28210 and main hub 28225. The main hub 28225 may be some type of central processing server configured to accommodate the transmission of communications between the various back-end components of the retailer's network, such as the user terminals 28227 and the database 28223, and from the back-end over the network 28210 Transmission to the storefront end, such as to continuous display shelf edge label devices 28200A-28200C, and transmission over network 28210 to products 28201A-201C. The main hub 28225, the user terminal 28227 and/or the database 28223 may include one or more components of the computing device 27100 shown in FIG. 27 .

用户终端28227处的工作人员可以通过访问与产品相关联的连续显示货架边缘标签装置来更新关于特定货架上的特定产品的定价数据和/或其他数据。用户终端28227可以访问数据库28223以获取用于潜在显示和/或预定显示的当前产品信息。关于这样的产品信息的指令可以从用户终端28227发送到适当的连续显示货架边缘标签装置。在其他实施例中,数据库28223、主集线器28225和/或用户终端28227可以全局地或专门地将当前产品信息数据周期性地推送到连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200A-200C。连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200A-200C可以接收这样的数据并根据需要改变正在显示的用户界面。Staff at user terminal 28227 can update pricing data and/or other data about a particular product on a particular shelf by accessing the continuous display shelf edge label device associated with the product. User terminal 28227 may access database 28223 to obtain current product information for potential displays and/or scheduled displays. Instructions regarding such product information may be sent from the user terminal 28227 to the appropriate continuous display shelf edge label device. In other embodiments, the database 28223, the main hub 28225, and/or the user terminal 28227 may periodically push current product information data to the continuous display shelf edge label devices 28200A-200C, either globally or exclusively. Continuous Display Shelf Edge Label Devices 28200A-200C can receive such data and change the user interface being displayed as needed.

替代地,连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200A-200C可以被配置为自动启动价格更新。例如,连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200A-28200C可以访问数据库28223以获得连续显示货架边缘标签装置上的相应的用户界面的当前产品信息数据。连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200A-28200C可以周期性地轮询数据库28223以获得当前产品信息数据并且根据需要改变正在显示的用户界面。Alternatively, the continuous display shelf edge label devices 28200A-200C may be configured to automatically initiate price updates. For example, continuous display shelf edge label devices 28200A-28200C may access database 28223 to obtain current product information data for continuous display of the corresponding user interface on the shelf edge label device. The continuous display shelf edge label devices 28200A-28200C may periodically poll the database 28223 for current product information data and change the user interface being displayed as needed.

在一个这样的示例中,数据库28223可以周期性地更新定价变化,诸如由工作人员通过用户终端28227。在第二个这样的示例中,数据库28223可以在被连续显示货架边缘标签装置访问时从外部来源获得当前产品信息。这些来源可以包括竞争的实体零售商和/或竞争的线上零售商,并且这允许数据库28223获得实时的当前产品信息。这样的当前产品信息可以从数据库 28223传送到连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200A-200C。在一个示例中,数据库28223还可以例如使用标志(flag)来传送连续显示货架边缘标签装置是否应该更新用户界面以反映当前产品信息的指示。替代地,连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200A-200C可以被配置为独立地确定是否应该更新用户界面以反映当前产品信息。例如,连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200A-200C可以配置有阈值。如果当前产品信息中的价格落入高于或低于一阈值或在阈值范围内,则连续显示货架边缘标签装置可以用当前产品信息更新用户界面。如果当前产品信息中的价格超出阈值,则连续显示货架边缘标签装置可以确定用户界面不应该被更新。替代地,在这种情况下,连续显示货架边缘标签装置可以针对例外而查询数据库28223。如果数据库28223允许例外,则连续显示货架边缘标签装置可以用当前产品信息更新用户界面;否则,连续显示货架边缘标签装置可以不修改用户界面。In one such example, database 28223 may be periodically updated with pricing changes, such as by staff via user terminal 28227. In a second such example, the database 28223 may obtain current product information from an external source when accessed by a continuous display shelf edge label device. These sources may include competing brick-and-mortar retailers and/or competing online retailers, and this allows the database 28223 to obtain real-time current product information. Such current product information may be communicated from database 28223 to continuous display shelf edge label devices 28200A-200C. In one example, the database 28223 may also transmit an indication that continuously displays whether the shelf edge label device should update the user interface to reflect current product information, eg, using a flag. Alternatively, the continuous display shelf edge label devices 28200A-200C may be configured to independently determine whether the user interface should be updated to reflect current product information. For example, continuous display shelf edge label devices 28200A-200C may be configured with thresholds. If the price in the current product information falls above or below a threshold or within a threshold range, the continuous display shelf edge label device may update the user interface with the current product information. If the price in the current product information exceeds a threshold, the continuous display shelf edge label device may determine that the user interface should not be updated. Alternatively, in this case, the continuous display shelf edge label device may query the database 28223 for exceptions. If the database 28223 allows exceptions, the continuous display shelf edge label device may update the user interface with current product information; otherwise, the continuous display shelf edge label device may not modify the user interface.

图29示出了根据本公开的一个或多个说明性方面的用于传达和分发内容的设备的示例框图。图29示出连续显示货架边缘标签装置29300,诸如连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200A-28200C。在该示例中,连续显示货架边缘标签装置29300包括沿货架29350的整个边缘取向的单个显示区域29301。在一个示例中,货架29350由塑料制成。从营销的角度来看,塑料货架提供多个优势,因为塑料是轻质的。轻质塑料货架的运输成本较低,并且可以拉出来用于例如清洁、检索跌落的产品以及库存目的。这使得更容易和更快地轮换库存和为货架备货。塑料货架可以使用模制工艺来制造,其中货架可以包括底架,在该底架中可以集成连续显示货架边缘标签装置。塑料货架可以具有嵌入货架内的中继器。此外,叶片标牌(blade sign)可以安装在塑料货架上。29 shows an example block diagram of an apparatus for communicating and distributing content in accordance with one or more illustrative aspects of the present disclosure. 29 shows a continuous display shelf edge label device 29300, such as continuous display shelf edge label devices 28200A-28200C. In this example, the continuous display shelf edge label device 29300 includes a single display area 29301 oriented along the entire edge of the shelf 29350. In one example, the shelf 29350 is made of plastic. From a marketing standpoint, plastic shelves offer several advantages because plastic is lightweight. Lightweight plastic shelves are less expensive to ship and can be pulled out for, for example, cleaning, retrieving dropped products, and inventory purposes. This makes it easier and faster to rotate inventory and stock shelves. Plastic shelves can be manufactured using a molding process, wherein the shelf can include a chassis in which a continuous display shelf edge label device can be integrated. Plastic shelves can have repeaters embedded within the shelves. Additionally, blade signs can be mounted on plastic shelves.

此外,由于功率(和其他信号)可以穿透塑料货架而几乎不受或不受干扰,所以塑料货架提供了相比于传统金属货架的优势。电子器件和其他元件可以直接嵌入到塑料货架中。信号穿过塑料货架允许对例如打印机27112、货架上的产品以及将封装在架子上的产品的包装的供电。例如,功率可以从塑料货架通过空中(over air)发送到产品或其封装包装中的接收器。信号穿过塑料货架允许在贯穿整个网络的部件之间更好的通信,包括从后端计算机到货架、推动器和产品的通信。塑料货架也可以用来与产品交互——货架上的显示器可以延伸到产品或封装包装中。Additionally, plastic shelves offer advantages over traditional metal shelves because power (and other signals) can penetrate plastic shelves with little or no interference. Electronics and other components can be embedded directly into plastic shelves. Passing the signal through the plastic shelf allows for powering, for example, the printer 27112, the product on the shelf, and the packaging of the product to be packaged on the shelf. For example, power can be sent over air from a plastic shelf to a receiver in a product or its packaging. Signals traveling through plastic shelves allow for better communication between components throughout the network, including from back-end computers to shelves, pushers, and products. Plastic shelves can also be used to interact with products—displays on shelves can extend into products or packaging.

如上所述,电信号和其他信号穿透塑料货架,与金属架相比具有较小的干扰。因此,更容易将附加的用户装置安装到塑料货架29350(诸如打印机 27112)以及对其供电。这允许更多的用户交互,并且可以激励顾客做出他们否则不会做出的购买。例如,如果顾客选择第一产品,则连续显示货架边缘标签装置29300可以显示第一产品的组件指令以及允许顾客经由打印机 27112打印组件指令的选项。在第二示例中,如果顾客选择第一食品项,则连续显示货架边缘标签装置29300可以提供包含第一食品项的食谱。连续显示货架边缘标签装置29300可以向用户呈现选项,以经由打印机27112打印食谱和/或在食谱中使用的其他配料的列表。As mentioned above, electrical and other signals penetrate plastic shelves with less interference than metal shelves. Therefore, it is easier to mount and power additional user devices to the plastic shelf 29350, such as the printer 27112. This allows for more user interaction and can motivate customers to make purchases they would not otherwise make. For example, if the customer selects the first product, the continuous display shelf edge label device 29300 may display the component instructions for the first product and an option to allow the customer to print the component instructions via the printer 27112. In a second example, if the customer selects the first food item, the continuous display shelf edge label device 29300 may provide a recipe that includes the first food item. The continuous display shelf edge label device 29300 may present the user with options to print via the printer 27112 a list of recipes and/or other ingredients used in the recipe.

连续显示货架边缘标签装置29300还被示出为包括锁定机构29303,其允许个人改变如本文所述的连续显示货架边缘标签装置29300的操作模式。在一个模式中,授权的个人可以编辑一个或多个用户界面29311、29313和 29315,而在第二模式下,用户界面29311、29313和29315不可以被编辑。The continuous display shelf edge label device 29300 is also shown to include a locking mechanism 29303 that allows an individual to change the mode of operation of the continuous display shelf edge label device 29300 as described herein. In one mode, an authorized individual can edit one or more of the user interfaces 29311, 29313 and 29315, while in the second mode, the user interfaces 29311, 29313 and 29315 cannot be edited.

单个连续显示器29301在产品本身(例如29321、29323和29325)上、在封装产品的包装上或其任何组合上提供跨货架29350的连续标签。单个连续显示器29301允许向顾客发送动态和静态消息,包括流式视频/音频。动态消息可以包括定价、广告、图像和善意问候(例如节日快乐)。如以上参照图28所讨论的,定价的改变可以在用户界面上快速且有效地反映出来。价格更新可以每小时、每天、每周、每年等地提供,并且还可以基于当前和预计库存而波动。另外,单个连续显示器29301上的用户界面是有价值的不动产,零售商可利用所述用户界面来收回投资成本。例如,零售商可以将用户界面上的显示空间租借给制造商和其他企业以用于广告。由单个连续显示器 29301经由交互式用户界面收集的数据也可以出售给各个制造商以及专注于收集、分析和货币化数据的众多企业。A single continuous display 29301 provides continuous labeling across shelves 29350 on the product itself (eg, 29321, 29323, and 29325), on the packaging that encloses the product, or any combination thereof. A single continuous display 29301 allows dynamic and static messaging to customers, including streaming video/audio. Newsfeeds can include pricing, advertisements, images, and goodwill (eg, happy holidays). As discussed above with reference to Figure 28, changes in pricing can be quickly and efficiently reflected on the user interface. Price updates can be provided hourly, daily, weekly, yearly, etc., and can also fluctuate based on current and projected inventory. Additionally, the user interface on a single continuous display 29301 is a valuable real estate that retailers can utilize to recoup the cost of their investment. For example, retailers can lease display space on user interfaces to manufacturers and other businesses for advertising. The data collected by the single continuous display 29301 via the interactive user interface can also be sold to various manufacturers as well as numerous businesses focused on collecting, analyzing and monetizing data.

单个连续显示器29301被示出为包括三个单独的用户界面,其提供关于在货架29350上待售的三个单独产品的信息。在此示例中,货架29350保持第一产品29321、第二产品29323和第三产品29325。单个连续显示器29301 包括三个数字用户界面,一个数字用户界面用于每个相应的待售产品。用户界面29311提供关于在用户界面29311正上方的第一产品29321的信息。类似地,用户界面29313和29315分别提供关于在相应用户界面29313、29315 上方的第二产品29323和第三产品29325的信息。可以在单个连续显示器 29301上显示关于产品的多种类型的信息中的任何,包括图形、文本、动画、视频和/或组合。A single continuous display 29301 is shown to include three separate user interfaces that provide information about three separate products for sale on shelf 29350. In this example, shelf 29350 holds a first product 29321, a second product 29323, and a third product 29325. A single continuous display 29301 includes three digital user interfaces, one for each corresponding product for sale. The user interface 29311 provides information about the first product 29321 directly above the user interface 29311. Similarly, user interfaces 29313 and 29315 provide information about a second product 29323 and a third product 29325 above the respective user interfaces 29313, 29315, respectively. Any of a variety of types of information about the product can be displayed on a single continuous display 29301, including graphics, text, animation, video, and/or combinations.

由于单个连续显示器29301被设计为动态的,所显示的消息不限于任何特定的大小或配置。相反,消息可以动态地和连续地改变,并且可以包括任何数量的单个连续显示、用户界面、产品以及封装产品的包装的任何组合。在一个实例中,单个连续显示器29301中的单独的用户界面可以被利用以使每个用户界面显示较大消息的一部分。例如,如果单个连续显示器29301要显示“仅有限时间”,则用户界面29311可被配置为显示“有限”,用户界面 29313可被用于显示“时间”,并且用户界面29315可被配置为显示“仅”。在另一个示例中,消息可以首先在竖直堆叠的多个连续显示器之间分配,然后在连续显示器中的每个上的单独的用户界面和/或与用户界面对应的包装之间进一步细分。该消息可以包括图形、文本、动画、流式视频或其任何组合。然后,竖直堆叠的多个连续显示器、用户界面和包装中的每个可以同时输出消息的不同部分。Since the single continuous display 29301 is designed to be dynamic, the displayed messages are not limited to any particular size or configuration. Rather, messages can change dynamically and continuously, and can include any combination of any number of individual continuous displays, user interfaces, products, and packaging that encapsulates the products. In one example, separate user interfaces in a single continuous display 29301 can be utilized such that each user interface displays a portion of a larger message. For example, if a single continuous display 29301 is to display "limited time only," user interface 29311 may be configured to display "limited," user interface 29313 may be used to display "time," and user interface 29315 may be configured to display "limited time." only". In another example, messages may first be distributed among multiple consecutive displays stacked vertically, and then further subdivided between individual user interfaces on each of the consecutive displays and/or wrappers corresponding to the user interfaces . The message may include graphics, text, animation, streaming video, or any combination thereof. Each of the vertically stacked multiple consecutive displays, user interface, and packaging can then simultaneously output a different portion of the message.

图30A-30B示出了根据本公开的一个或多个说明性方面的改变连续显示器的示例。从图30A到图30B的转变示出了改变单个连续显示器的用户界面的操作之前和之后的一种可能性。在图30A中,示出用于货架29350 的连续显示货架边缘标签装置30400。连续货架标签装置30400可以是连续显示货架边缘标签装置28200A-28200C和29300中的一个。连续显示货架边缘标签装置30400包括沿着货架29350的整个边缘取向的单个显示区域 30401。示出的单个连续显示器30401包括三个单独的用户界面,其提供关于在货架29350上待售的三个单独产品的信息。30A-30B illustrate an example of changing a continuous display in accordance with one or more illustrative aspects of the present disclosure. The transition from Figure 30A to Figure 30B shows one possibility before and after the operation of changing the user interface of a single continuous display. In FIG. 30A, a continuous display shelf edge label device 30400 for shelf 29350 is shown. The continuous shelf label device 30400 may be one of the continuous display shelf edge label devices 28200A-28200C and 29300. Continuous display shelf edge label device 30400 includes a single display area 30401 oriented along the entire edge of shelf 29350. The single continuous display 30401 shown includes three separate user interfaces that provide information about three separate products for sale on shelf 29350.

对于该说明性示例,数字分隔线30441为三个单独的用户界面30411A、 30413A和30415创建三个单独的视觉框。数字分隔线不是分隔两个显示器的物理线,而是产生将单个连续显示器30401分离成多个显示区域的外观的数字线。在此示例中,货架29350保持第一产品30421、第二产品30423和第三产品30425。单个连续显示器30401包括三个数字用户界面,一个数字用户界面用于每个相应的待售产品。用户界面30411A提供关于在用户界面30411正上方的第一产品30421的信息。用户界面30413A提供关于在用户界面30413A正上方的第二产品30423的信息,并且用户界面30415提供关于在用户界面30415正上方的第三产品30425的信息。For this illustrative example, number divider 30441 creates three separate visual boxes for three separate user interfaces 30411A, 30413A, and 30415. A digital divider line is not a physical line that separates two displays, but a digital line that creates the appearance of separating a single continuous display 30401 into multiple display areas. In this example, shelf 29350 holds a first product 30421, a second product 30423, and a third product 30425. A single continuous display 30401 includes three digital user interfaces, one for each corresponding product for sale. The user interface 30411A provides information about the first product 30421 directly above the user interface 30411. User interface 30413A provides information on the second product 30423 directly above the user interface 30413A, and user interface 30415 provides information on the third product 30425 directly above the user interface 30415.

转到图30B,工作人员可能想要改变货架29350的产品布局,并且在这个示例中已经从货架29350中移除了第三产品30425,并且在货架29350上为第一产品30421创建了用以驻留的更大的区域。因此,如本文所描述的,作为响应,工作人员改变了单个连续显示器30401的用户界面。在该示例中,因为用户界面的位置已经改变,所以用户界面30411B现在被示出为已经朝向连续显示器30401的右侧移动,因为第一产品30421已经被移动到货架29350的右侧。类似地,由于第二产品30423已经移动到货架29350的左侧,所以用户界面30413B被示出为已经朝向连续显示器30401的左侧移动。因为第三产品30425不再被提供在货架29350上以用于出售,所以用于第三产品30425的用户界面30415已经从连续显示器30401中删除。在图30B的这个例子中,因为在连续显示器30401上仅示出了两个用户界面30411B和 30413B,所以仅示出一个数字分割线30441来框出两个单独的用户界面 30411B和30413B。Turning to Figure 30B, the worker may want to change the product layout of shelf 29350, and in this example a third product 30425 has been removed from shelf 29350, and a first product 30421 has been created on shelf 29350 to store leave a larger area. Thus, in response, the worker changes the user interface of the single continuous display 30401, as described herein. In this example, the user interface 30411B is now shown as having moved towards the right side of the continuous display 30401 because the position of the user interface has changed since the first product 30421 has been moved to the right side of the shelf 29350. Similarly, since the second product 30423 has moved to the left side of the shelf 29350, the user interface 30413B is shown to have moved towards the left side of the continuous display 30401. Because the third product 30425 is no longer offered on shelf 29350 for sale, the user interface 30415 for the third product 30425 has been removed from the continuous display 30401. In this example of Figure 30B, since only two user interfaces 30411B and 30413B are shown on the continuous display 30401, only one numerical dividing line 30441 is shown to frame the two separate user interfaces 30411B and 30413B.

图31A-31C示出了根据本公开的一个或多个说明性方面的具有锁定机构的示例连续显示器。如本文所述,锁定机构可以被包括在连续显示货架边缘标签装置上,以防止未经授权的个人改变显示在连续显示货架边缘标签装置上的用户界面的一个或多个参数,诸如显示的信息。本文可以包括多种预防性方式中的任何,以下仅是一些说明性例子。在图31A中,诸如用于物理钥匙的手动装置输入31503A可以被包括在连续显示货架边缘标签装置31500A中。通过插入适当的钥匙,授权的个人可以将连续显示货架边缘标签装置的操作模式从显示模式改变为改变模式。31A-31C illustrate an example continuous display with a locking mechanism in accordance with one or more illustrative aspects of the present disclosure. As described herein, a locking mechanism may be included on the continuous display shelf edge label device to prevent unauthorized individuals from changing one or more parameters of the user interface displayed on the continuous display shelf edge label device, such as displayed information . Any of a variety of preventive modalities may be included herein, the following are just some illustrative examples. In FIG. 31A, a manual device input 31503A, such as for a physical key, may be included in a continuous display shelf edge label device 31500A. By inserting the appropriate key, an authorized individual can change the operating mode of the continuous display shelf edge label device from display mode to change mode.

显示模式可以是这样的操作模式,其中连续显示货架边缘标签装置在单个连续显示器上显示一个或多个界面、并且甚至可以允许诸如顾客的用户访问单个连续显示器以获取附加信息。这种访问可以是通过触摸的访问。然而,在显示模式下,这样的顾客不能改变正在显示的用户界面的参数,诸如用户界面的大小、用户界面的形状或用户界面在单个连续显示器上的位置。顾客可以按照允许的方式查看和交互,而不具有改变用户界面的显示区域的参数的能力。改变模式可以是这样的操作模式,其中连续显示货架边缘标签装置在单个连续显示器上显示一个或多个界面并允许授权的用户(诸如工作人员)改变单个连续显示器的一个或多个参数。这种访问可以如本文所述是通过触摸的访问。在改变模式中,工作人员可以改变在单个连续显示器上的正在显示的用户界面的参数,诸如用户界面的大小、用户界面的形状或者用户界面的位置。这样,工作人员可以容易地修改对应于销售点处的产品的用户界面的任何方面。The display mode may be a mode of operation in which the continuous display shelf edge label device displays one or more interfaces on a single continuous display, and may even allow a user, such as a customer, to access the single continuous display for additional information. Such access may be by touch. However, in display mode, such a customer cannot change parameters of the user interface being displayed, such as the size of the user interface, the shape of the user interface, or the position of the user interface on a single continuous display. The customer can view and interact as permissible without the ability to change the parameters of the display area of the user interface. The change mode may be a mode of operation in which the continuous display shelf edge label device displays one or more interfaces on a single continuous display and allows an authorized user (such as a staff member) to change one or more parameters of the single continuous display. Such access may be by touch as described herein. In the change mode, a worker can change parameters of the user interface being displayed on a single continuous display, such as the size of the user interface, the shape of the user interface, or the position of the user interface. In this way, the staff can easily modify any aspect of the user interface corresponding to the product at the point of sale.

31B和31C示出了另外两种类型的锁定机构。在图31B中,诸如用以扫描指纹的生物测定扫描仪(biometric scanner)31503B可以被包括在连续显示货架边缘标签装置31500B中。通过将手指按压抵靠生物测定扫描仪 31503B,授权的个人可以将连续显示货架边缘标签装置的操作模式从显示模式改变为改变模式。在图31C中,诸如用以扫描工作人员的NFC使能的访问卡的近场通信(NFC)读取器31503C可以被包括在连续显示货架边缘标签装置31500C中。通过将NFC使能的访问卡按压抵靠NFC读取器31503C,授权的个人可以将连续显示货架边缘标签装置的操作模式从显示模式改变为改变模式。31B and 31C show two other types of locking mechanisms. In FIG. 31B, a biometric scanner 31503B, such as to scan a fingerprint, may be included in a continuous display shelf edge label device 31500B. By pressing a finger against the biometric scanner 31503B, an authorized individual can change the operating mode of the continuous display shelf edge label device from display mode to change mode. In Figure 31C, a near field communication (NFC) reader 31503C, such as to scan a worker's NFC-enabled access card, may be included in a continuous display shelf edge label device 31500C. By pressing the NFC-enabled access card against the NFC reader 31503C, an authorized individual can change the operating mode of the continuous display shelf edge label device from display mode to change mode.

图31D-31F示出了根据本公开的一个或多个说明性方面的改变具有锁定机构用户界面的连续显示的示例。在图31D-31F的示例中,锁定机构被建立到连续显示货架边缘标签装置31500D中。在这个示例中,工作人员将输入代码以改变连续显示货架边缘标签装置31500D的操作模式。如图31D所示,单个连续显示器31501D包括用于相应的产品的两个用户界面31511和 31513。在图31D中还示出了锁定图标31503D。访问锁定图标31503D允许授权的个人改变连续显示货架边缘标签装置31500D的操作模式。通过点击锁定图标31503D,工作人员可以被示出在图31E中所看到的内容。在图31E 中,出现新的用户界面31503E,其提示个人输入代码以授权改变操作模式。通过在图31E中插入适当的代码,授权的个人可以将连续显示货架边缘标签装置31500D的操作模式从显示模式改变为改变模式。31D-31F illustrate an example of changing a continuous display of a user interface with a locking mechanism in accordance with one or more illustrative aspects of the present disclosure. In the example of Figures 31D-31F, a locking mechanism is built into the continuous display shelf edge label device 31500D. In this example, a worker would enter a code to change the operating mode of the continuous display shelf edge label device 31500D. As shown in Figure 31D, a single continuous display 31501D includes two user interfaces 31511 and 31513 for corresponding products. Also shown in Figure 31D is a lock icon 31503D. Access to the lock icon 31503D allows an authorized individual to change the operating mode of the continuous display shelf edge label device 31500D. By clicking on the lock icon 31503D, the worker can be shown what is seen in Figure 31E. In Figure 31E, a new user interface 31503E appears, which prompts the individual to enter a code to authorize a change of operating mode. By inserting the appropriate code in Figure 31E, an authorized individual can change the operating mode of the continuous display shelf edge label device 31500D from display mode to change mode.

如果个人没有输入正确的代码,则连续显示货架边缘标签装置31500D 可以转换回图31D所示的外观。但是,如果个人确实输入正确的代码,则连续显示货架边缘标签装置31500D可以将操作模式改变为允许个人改变产品的一个或多个用户界面的一个或多个参数的改变模式。在任何改变之后,个人不输入正确的代码,连续显示货架边缘标签装置31500D可以转换回显示模式,如图31F所示。如所示,个人已经在单个连续显示器31501D上改变了用户界面31511和用户界面31513相对于彼此的位置。也示出了锁定图标 31503D。If the individual does not enter the correct code, the continuous display shelf edge label device 31500D can switch back to the appearance shown in Figure 31D. However, if the individual does enter the correct code, the continuous display shelf edge label device 31500D can change the operating mode to a change mode that allows the individual to change one or more parameters of one or more user interfaces of the product. After any change, the individual does not enter the correct code, the continuous display shelf edge label device 31500D can switch back to display mode, as shown in Figure 31F. As shown, the individual has changed the positions of user interface 31511 and user interface 31513 relative to each other on a single continuous display 31501D. A lock icon 31503D is also shown.

图32A到32B示出根据本发明的一个或多个说明性方面的改变用户界面大小的实例。在该说明性示例中,授权的个人已经访问了连续显示货架边缘标签装置32600中的模式改变请求。在该示例中,连续显示货架边缘标签装置32600包括沿货架的整个边缘取向的单个连续显示器32601。图32A可以示出在改变用户界面32613A的参数之前的两个用户界面32611和 32613A。在此示例中,每个用户界面32611和32613A的边界的形状不同,并且边界内的文本的大小也不同。通过本文描述的操作中的一个或多个,图 32B示出了在用以改变用户界面32613A的大小的改变操作之后,连续显示货架边缘标签装置32600可以类似是什么样子。如图32B所示,用户界面 32613B使得在其内的文本缩小了大小。从图32A到图32B的转变,授权的个人已经将用户界面32613A的参数(文本的大尺寸)改变为用户界面32613B的参数(文本的更小尺寸)。32A-32B illustrate an example of resizing a user interface in accordance with one or more illustrative aspects of the invention. In this illustrative example, an authorized individual has accessed a mode change request in continuous display shelf edge label device 32600. In this example, the continuous display shelf edge label device 32600 includes a single continuous display 32601 oriented along the entire edge of the shelf. Figure 32A may show two user interfaces 32611 and 32613A prior to changing parameters of user interface 32613A. In this example, the borders of each user interface 32611 and 32613A are different in shape, and the text within the borders is also different in size. Through one or more of the operations described herein, FIG. 32B illustrates what the continuous display shelf edge label device 32600 may look like after a change operation to change the size of the user interface 32613A. As shown in Figure 32B, the user interface 32613B has the text within it reduced in size. From the transition of Figure 32A to Figure 32B, the authorized individual has changed the parameter of user interface 32613A (large size of text) to the parameter of user interface 32613B (smaller size of text).

图33A-33B示出了根据本公开的一个或多个说明性方面的改变用户界面的形状的示例。在该说明性示例中,授权的个人已经访问了连续显示货架边缘标签装置33700中的模式改变请求。在该示例中,连续显示货架边缘标签装置33700包括沿货架的整个边缘取向的单个连续显示器33701。图33A 可以示出在改变用户界面33713A的参数之前的两个用户界面33711和 33713A。在此示例中,每个用户界面33711和33713A的边界的形状不同,并且边界内的文本的大小也不同。通过在此描述的操作中的一个或多个,图 33B图示了在用以改变用户界面33713A的边界的形状的改变操作之后,连续显示货架边缘标签装置33700可以类似是什么样子。如图33B所示,用户界面33713B具有用户界面的在外观上不同的边界的形状。从图33A到图33B 的转换,授权的个人已经将用户界面33713A的边界的参数(矩形形状)改变为用户界面33713B的边界的参数(具有尖端形状的圆角边角矩形)。33A-33B illustrate an example of changing the shape of a user interface in accordance with one or more illustrative aspects of the present disclosure. In this illustrative example, an authorized individual has accessed a mode change request in continuous display shelf edge label device 33700. In this example, the continuous display shelf edge label device 33700 includes a single continuous display 33701 oriented along the entire edge of the shelf. Figure 33A may show two user interfaces 33711 and 33713A prior to changing parameters of the user interface 33713A. In this example, the borders of each user interface 33711 and 33713A are shaped differently, and the size of the text within the borders is also different. Through one or more of the operations described herein, Figure 33B illustrates what the continuous display shelf edge label device 33700 may look like after a change operation to change the shape of the border of the user interface 33713A. As shown in FIG. 33B, the user interface 33713B has the shape of the borders of the user interface that differ in appearance. From the transition of Figure 33A to Figure 33B, the authorized individual has changed the parameters of the boundaries of user interface 33713A (rectangular shape) to parameters of the boundaries of user interface 33713B (rounded corner rectangles with pointed shapes).

图34A-34B示出了根据本公开的一个或多个说明性方面的改变用户界面的位置的示例。在该说明性示例中,授权的个人已经访问了连续显示货架边缘标签装置34800中的模式改变请求。在该示例中,连续显示货架边缘标签装置34800包括沿货架的整个边缘取向的单个连续显示器34801。图34A 可以示出在改变用户界面34811A和34813A的参数之前的两个用户界面 34811A和34813A。在该示例中,在单个连续显示器34801内的每个用户界面34811A和34813A的位置被改变。通过这里描述的一个或多个操作,图 34B图示了在用以改变两个用户界面34811A和34813A的位置的改变操作之后,连续显示货架边缘标签装置34800可以类似是什么样子。如图34B所示,在单个连续显示器34801内,用户界面34813B相对于用户界面34811B 改变了位置取向。从图34A到图34B的转换,授权的个人已经将每个用户界面34811A和34813A的位置这两个参数改变为每个用户界面34811B和 34813B的位置这两个参数。34A-34B illustrate an example of changing the position of a user interface in accordance with one or more illustrative aspects of the present disclosure. In this illustrative example, an authorized individual has accessed a mode change request in continuous display shelf edge label device 34800. In this example, the continuous display shelf edge label device 34800 includes a single continuous display 34801 oriented along the entire edge of the shelf. Figure 34A may show two user interfaces 34811A and 34813A prior to changing parameters of the user interfaces 34811A and 34813A. In this example, the position of each user interface 34811A and 34813A within a single continuous display 34801 is changed. Through one or more operations described herein, Figure 34B illustrates what a continuous display shelf edge label device 34800 may look like after a change operation to change the position of the two user interfaces 34811A and 34813A. As shown in Figure 34B, within a single continuous display 34801, user interface 34813B has changed positional orientation relative to user interface 34811B. From the transition of Figure 34A to Figure 34B, the authorized individual has changed the two parameters of the location of each user interface 34811A and 34813A to the two parameters of the location of each user interface 34811B and 34813B.

图35示出了根据本公开的一个或多个说明性方面的分发内容的示例方法。在一个示例中,图35步骤中的一个或多个可以由图27中的计算装置 27100和/或图28A-28B中示出的装置来实施。该过程开始,并且在步骤35901 处,连续显示货架边缘标签装置经由单个连续显示器输出两个或更多个用户界面,每个用户界面对应于待售产品。图29中示出了这样的例子。进行到步骤35903,确定连续显示货架边缘标签装置的模式的改变是否被授权。这样的示例可以是工作人员将其手指插置在图31B中的生物测定扫描仪 31503B处,并使系统意识到她被授权以改变连续显示货架边缘标签装置的操作模式。35 illustrates an example method of distributing content in accordance with one or more illustrative aspects of the present disclosure. In one example, one or more of the steps of Figure 35 may be implemented by computing device 27100 in Figure 27 and/or the devices shown in Figures 28A-28B. The process begins, and at step 35901, the continuous display shelf edge label device outputs, via a single continuous display, two or more user interfaces, each user interface corresponding to a product for sale. Such an example is shown in FIG. 29 . Proceeding to step 35903, it is determined whether a change in the mode of continuously displaying the shelf edge label device is authorized. An example of this could be a worker inserting her finger at the biometric scanner 31503B in Figure 31B and making the system aware that she is authorized to change the operating mode of the continuous display shelf edge label device.

如果在步骤35903中操作模式的改变未被授权,则过程移动到步骤 35905,在该步骤中没有改变操作模式的指令,并且过程返回到步骤35901 以经由单个连续显示器输出两个或更多个用户界面,每个用户界面对应于待售产品。如果在步骤35903中授权了操作模式的改变,则过程转到步骤35907,在步骤35907处进行附加的确定。在步骤35907处,对是否已经接收到参数改变输入进行确定。参照图32A和32B、图33A和33B、和/或图 34A和34B示出了参数改变的说明性示例。如果没有接收到参数改变输入,则过程转到步骤35909。如果在步骤35907中接收到参数改变输入,则过程移动到步骤35911,在步骤35911处,在所请求的用户界面上实现参数的改变,诸如增加用户界面的文本的大小。该过程然后进行到步骤35913。If in step 35903 the change of operating mode is not authorized, the process moves to step 35905 where there is no instruction to change the operating mode and the process returns to step 35901 to output two or more users via a single continuous display interfaces, each user interface corresponds to a product for sale. If a change in operating mode is authorized in step 35903, the process proceeds to step 35907 where additional determinations are made. At step 35907, a determination is made as to whether a parameter change input has been received. Illustrative examples of parameter changes are shown with reference to Figures 32A and 32B, Figures 33A and 33B, and/or Figures 34A and 34B. If no parameter change input is received, the process proceeds to step 35909. If a parameter change input is received in step 35907, the process moves to step 35911 where a parameter change is implemented on the requested user interface, such as increasing the size of the text of the user interface. The process then proceeds to step 35913.

返回到步骤35909,进一步对是否已经接收到用以去除和/或添加产品的用户界面的输入进行确定。示出了这样的说明性示例,其中从图30A至图 30B中移除用户界面30415。如果在步骤35909中没有接收到输入,则过程可以返回到步骤35905,并且可以在返回到步骤35901之前进一步从操作的改变模式退出到操作的显示模式。如果在步骤35909中接收到输入,则该过程移动到步骤35915,在步骤35915处,输入所应用的用户界面基于输入被添加或移除。该过程然后进行到步骤35913。Returning to step 35909, a further determination is made as to whether user interface input to remove and/or add products has been received. Such an illustrative example is shown with user interface 30415 removed from Figures 30A-30B. If no input is received in step 35909, the process may return to step 35905 and may further exit from the change mode of operation to the display mode of operation before returning to step 35901. If input is received in step 35909, the process moves to step 35915 where the user interface to which the input applies is added or removed based on the input. The process then proceeds to step 35913.

在步骤35913中,对是否请求操作的改变模式中的附加改变进行确定。如果存在请求的附加改变,则该过程可以返回到步骤35907。如果没有请求附加的改变,则过程进行到步骤35917。在步骤35917中,在返回到步骤35901 之前,发生连续显示货架边缘标签装置从操作的改变模式到操作的显示模式的操作,以经由单个连续显示器输出两个或更多个用户界面,每个用户界面对应于待售产品并与可以已经实施的任何改变一致。In step 35913, a determination is made as to whether additional changes in the change mode of operation are requested. If there are additional changes requested, the process may return to step 35907. If no additional changes are requested, the process proceeds to step 35917. In step 35917, before returning to step 35901, an operation of continuously displaying the shelf edge label device from a change mode of operation to a display mode of operation occurs to output two or more user interfaces via a single continuous display, each user The interface corresponds to the product for sale and is consistent with any changes that may have been implemented.

图36示出了根据本公开的一个或多个说明性方面的分发内容的另一示例方法。在一个示例中,图36的步骤中的一个或多个可以由图27中的计算装置27100和/或图28A-28B中示出的装置来实施。该过程开始,并且在步骤271001处,两个连续显示货架边缘标签装置各自经由单个连续显示器输出两个或更多个用户界面,每个用户界面对应于待售产品。图28B示出了这样的例子。进行到步骤271003,对是否正在由连续显示货架边缘标签装置中的一个接收数据进行确定。如果不是,则该过程可以返回到步骤271001。如果在步骤271003中正在接收数据,则过程移动到步骤271005。36 illustrates another example method of distributing content in accordance with one or more illustrative aspects of the present disclosure. In one example, one or more of the steps of Figure 36 may be implemented by computing device 27100 in Figure 27 and/or the devices shown in Figures 28A-28B. The process begins, and at step 271001, the two continuous display shelf edge label devices each output two or more user interfaces, each corresponding to a product for sale, via a single continuous display. FIG. 28B shows such an example. Proceeding to step 271003, a determination is made as to whether data is being received by one of the continuous display shelf edge label devices. If not, the process can return to step 271001. If data is being received in step 271003, the process moves to step 271005.

在步骤271005中,连续显示货架边缘标签装置确认数据的授权。例如,系统可以确认正在接收的数据是用于连续显示货架边缘标签装置的。如果数据是来自诸如图28A中的数据库28223的数据库的全局传输,则连续显示货架边缘标签装置可以确定在步骤271003中正在接收的数据不旨在用于连续显示货架边缘标签装置。在步骤271005中确认对数据的授权的情况下,过程移动到步骤271007,在步骤271007处可以确定数据的起源。例如,连续显示货架边缘标签装置可以确定数据正在通过从诸如图28A中的扫描仪 27221的扫描仪接收到的无线通信被本地地接收。在另一个示例中,连续显示货架边缘标签装置可以确定数据正在通过经由图28A中的主集线器28225 和网络28210从用户终端(诸如用户终端28227)接收到的有线通信被远程地接收。In step 271005, the authorization of the shelf edge label device confirmation data is displayed continuously. For example, the system can confirm that the data being received is for continuous display of shelf edge labeling devices. If the data is a global transfer from a database such as database 28223 in Figure 28A, the continuous display shelf edge label device may determine that the data being received in step 271003 is not intended for continuous display shelf edge label devices. In the event that authorization of the data is confirmed in step 271005, the process moves to step 271007 where the origin of the data can be determined. For example, a continuous display shelf edge label device may determine that data is being received locally via wireless communications received from a scanner such as scanner 27221 in Figure 28A. In another example, the continuous display shelf edge label device may determine that data is being received remotely via wired communications received from a user terminal, such as user terminal 28227, via main hub 28225 and network 28210 in Figure 28A.

转到步骤271009,可以对是否需要通过连续显示货架边缘标签装置经由单个连续显示器改变当前被输出的一个或多个用户界面进行确定。例如,如果在步骤271003中接收到的并且在步骤271005中被确认为应用于连续显示货架边缘标签装置的数据可以包括与正被输出的用户界面相关联的产品的价格变化。如果在步骤271009中不需要改变,则过程可以返回到步骤 271001。如果在步骤271009中需要通过连续显示货架边缘标签装置经由单个连续显示器改变当前正在输出的一个或多个用户界面,则过程移动到步骤 271011,在步骤271011处通过连续显示货架边缘标签装置经由单个连续显示器实施对当前正被输出的一个或多个用户界面的一个或多个改变。此后,过程可以返回到步骤271001,在步骤271001处两个连续显示货架边缘标签装置各自经由单个连续显示器输出两个或更多个用户界面,每个用户界面对应于待售产品,其中在步骤271003中接收到数据的连续显示货架边缘标签装置的每个用户界面根据在步骤271011中可以已经实施的任何改变而输出一个或多个用户界面。Turning to step 271009, a determination can be made as to whether one or more user interfaces currently being output needs to be changed by continuously displaying the shelf edge label device via a single continuous display. For example, if the data received in step 271003 and confirmed in step 271005 as applied to the continuous display shelf edge label device may include price changes for the product associated with the user interface being output. If no changes are required in step 271009, the process may return to step 271001. If in step 271009 it is desired to change one or more of the user interfaces currently being output by continuously displaying the shelf edge label device via a single continuous display, then the process moves to step 271011 at which step 271011 by continuously displaying the shelf edge label device via a single continuous display The display implements one or more changes to one or more user interfaces that are currently being output. Thereafter, the process may return to step 271001 where the two continuous display shelf edge label devices each output via a single continuous display two or more user interfaces, each user interface corresponding to a product for sale, where at step 271003 Each user interface of the shelf edge label device that continuously displays the data received in step 271011 outputs one or more user interfaces in accordance with any changes that may have been implemented in step 271011.

图37示出了根据本公开的一个或多个说明性方面的用于传达和分发内容的系统的示例框图。在一个示例中,图37的部件中的一个或多个可以由图27中的计算装置27100和/或图28A-36中示出的一个或多个装置来实施。在这个示例中,示出具有一起操作的多个连续显示货架边缘标签装置的系统 371100。在该实例中,存在四个连续显示货架边缘标签装置。每个连续显示货架边缘标签装置包括沿着货架371150A-371150D的整个边缘取向的单个显示区域371101A-371101D。进一步地在此示例中,货架371150A-D各自分别保持第一产品371121A-371121D、第二产品371123A-D和第三产品 371125A-D。单个连续显示器371101A-D各自包括三个数字用户界面,每一个数字用户界面用于相应的待售产品。用户界面371111A-D分别提供关于在用户界面371111A-D正上方的第一产品371121A-D的信息。类似地,用户界面371113A-D和371115A-D分别提供关于在相应用户界面371113A-D、371115A-D上方的第二产品371123A-D和第三产品371125A-D的信息。37 shows an example block diagram of a system for communicating and distributing content in accordance with one or more illustrative aspects of the present disclosure. In one example, one or more of the components of Figure 37 may be implemented by computing device 27100 in Figure 27 and/or one or more of the devices shown in Figures 28A-36. In this example, system 371100 is shown with multiple continuous display shelf edge label devices operating together. In this example, there are four consecutive display shelf edge label devices. Each continuous display shelf edge label device includes a single display area 371101A-371101D oriented along the entire edge of the shelves 371150A-371150D. Further in this example, the shelves 371150A-D each hold a first product 371121A-371121D, a second product 371123A-D, and a third product 371125A-D, respectively. The single sequential displays 371101A-D each include three digital user interfaces, each for a corresponding product for sale. User interfaces 371111A-D provide information about the first product 371121A-D directly above user interfaces 371111A-D, respectively. Similarly, user interfaces 371113A-D and 371115A-D provide information about second products 371123A-D and third products 371125A-D above respective user interfaces 371113A-D, 371115A-D, respectively.

根据本公开的一个或多个方面,各种连续显示货架边缘标签装置可以一致地操作以向顾客提供附加信息。通过将连续显示货架边缘标签装置以并排 (371101A和371101B或371101C和371101D)取向布置、并像货架(371101A 和371101C或371101B和371101D)一样在彼此的顶部堆叠,连续显示货架边缘标签装置的阵列可以被配置。在图37的说明性示例中,存在四个连续显示货架边缘标签装置,其被布置为2x2、两行和两列连续显示货架边缘标签装置的阵列。可以实现多种附加布置中的任何一种,包括但不限于4×1、 3×4、3×3和4×4配置。In accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure, various continuous display shelf edge label devices may operate in unison to provide additional information to customers. By arranging the continuous display shelf edge label devices in a side-by-side (371101A and 371101B or 371101C and 371101D) orientation and stacked on top of each other like the shelves (371101A and 371101C or 371101B and 371101D), an array of continuous display shelf edge label devices can be is configured. In the illustrative example of FIG. 37, there are four consecutive display shelf edge label devices arranged in an array of 2x2, two rows and two columns of consecutive display shelf edge label devices. Any of a variety of additional arrangements may be implemented, including but not limited to 4x1, 3x4, 3x3, and 4x4 configurations.

通过配置用以一起操作的各种连续显示货架边缘标签装置,零售商可以利用显示器以多种期望的方式中的任何一种来吸引顾客。这样的配置可以被用来促销单个产品、单一类型的产品、单个品牌等等。可以实现横跨多个连续显示货架边缘标签装置的动画和/或图形。连续显示货架边缘标签装置的显示器上的不同输出可基于检测到顾客在过道处、特定连续显示货架边缘标签装置附近、和/或零售商店中的某个其他位置处的存在而被实施。如本文所述,取决于期望的结果和/或效果可以实现不同的显示模式。By configuring various continuous display shelf edge label devices to operate together, retailers can utilize the display to attract customers in any of a number of desired ways. Such configurations can be used to promote a single product, a single type of product, a single brand, and the like. Animation and/or graphics may be implemented across a plurality of consecutively displayed shelf edge label devices. Different outputs on the display of the continuous display shelf edge label device may be implemented based on detecting the presence of a customer in the aisle, near a particular continuous display shelf edge label device, and/or at some other location in the retail store. As described herein, different display modes may be implemented depending on the desired results and/or effects.

在一个这样的示例中,每10-15秒,一个或多个连续显示货架边缘标签装置上的显示可能改变以某种方式输出的内容。在其他示例中,一个或多个连续显示货架边缘标签装置可以在充当非常活跃(vibrant)的广告牌的显示输出中保持不变。无论显示的输出是移动的还是用作更恒定的广告牌,连续显示货架边缘标签装置可以一起操作。In one such example, every 10-15 seconds, the display on one or more continuous display shelf edge label devices may change the output in some way. In other examples, one or more continuous display shelf edge label devices may remain unchanged in the display output acting as a very vibrant billboard. Whether the displayed output is moving or used as a more constant billboard, the continuous display shelf edge label unit can operate together.

在一个实施例中,顾客可以从更远处看到并被吸引到这种改变的显示的输出或静止的显示的输出。改变的显示的输出或静止的显示的输出可以是操作的第一显示模式。作为相应,她可能靠近货架。当她靠近货架时,一个或多个连续显示货架边缘标签装置可以感测到她的存在,诸如通过接近传感器,并且可以切换到另一种显示模式。在这样的示例中,可以出现用于产品的特定广告,诸如用于与连续显示货架边缘标签装置相关联的产品。这样的广告可能是产品正在廉价出售的通知。一旦顾客在特定的连续显示货架边缘标签装置的前方持续给定的时间段(诸如3-5秒),连续显示货架边缘标签装置可切换到另一种显示模式,在该另一种显示模式中SKU具体定价和包装信息可以出现在每个产品下面。In one embodiment, a customer may be seen from a further distance and drawn to such a changing displayed output or a stationary displayed output. The changing displayed output or the stationary displayed output may be the first display mode of operation. In return, she may be close to the shelf. When she approaches a shelf, one or more continuous display shelf edge label devices can sense her presence, such as through a proximity sensor, and can switch to another display mode. In such an example, specific advertisements may appear for products, such as for products associated with a continuous display shelf edge label device. Such an advertisement may be a notice that a product is being sold at a bargain price. Once a customer is in front of a particular continuous display shelf edge label device for a given period of time (such as 3-5 seconds), the continuous display shelf edge label device may switch to another display mode in which it is SKU specific pricing and packaging information can appear under each product.

在另一个实施例中,连续显示货架边缘标签装置可以被预先配置为在选定的时间在不同的显示模式之间转换。例如,连续显示货架边缘标签装置可以在上午8点和上午10点期间显示第一产品的第一价格,然后可以在上午 10点和下午12点期间自动显示第二产品的第二价格。这允许零售商使价格适合于在每个时间间隔期间购物的购物者的类型,或者容易地从特定廉价价格(诸如早起价格(early-bird price))转换到正常价格。In another embodiment, the continuous display shelf edge label device may be preconfigured to switch between different display modes at selected times. For example, a continuous display shelf edge label device may display a first price for a first product during 8 am and 10 am and then automatically display a second price for a second product during 10 am and 12 pm. This allows the retailer to tailor prices to the type of shopper shopping during each time interval, or to easily switch from certain bargain prices (such as early-bird prices) to regular prices.

在又一些说明性实施例中,连续显示货架边缘标签装置可以与推动器组件一起操作,该推动器组件包括在货架内,连续显示货架边缘标签装置在该货架上取向的。推动器组件可以包括推进器,该推进器配置成将压力放置在产品堆的后面,并且当产品从堆中移出时将堆向前朝向货架的前部推动。这样的推动器组件可以包括一个或多个部件,以确定推进器相对于组件的某部分的位置。例如,产品堆可以能够适合10个产品。集成在推动器组件中的可以是地板,该地板在10个位置中的每个位置处包括追踪器部件,推动器可以被配置为在这10个位置处与产品一起操作。当推进器到达追踪器部件时,关于推进器的位置的数据可以是已知的并且这样的数据可以被传送到连续显示货架边缘标签装置。In yet other illustrative embodiments, the continuous display shelf edge label device may operate with a pusher assembly included within the shelf on which the continuous display shelf edge label device is oriented. The pusher assembly may include a pusher configured to place pressure behind the stack of products and push the stack forward toward the front of the shelf as the products are removed from the stack. Such pusher assemblies may include one or more components to determine the position of the pusher relative to a portion of the assembly. For example, a product stack may be able to fit 10 products. Integrated into the pusher assembly may be a floor that includes tracker components at each of the 10 locations where the pusher may be configured to operate with the product. When the pusher reaches the tracker component, data about the position of the pusher may be known and such data may be transmitted to the continuous display shelf edge labeling device.

类似地,其他数据也可以根据需要被确定和传送。例如,可以确定推动器相对于货架和/或推动器组件的移动。这样的确定可以基于位置并且可以包括用于确定移动的计时器部件。另外,在其他示例中,可以确定与连续显示货架边缘标签装置相关联的产品的产品水平的变化速率。在这样的示例中,原来备货有50件产品的货架被确定为在一段时间(诸如一小时)之后只剩下15件产品,可以将通知发送给零售商的工作人员以对货架上的产品补货。类似地,这样的数据可以被发送到连续显示货架边缘标签装置,用于改变与产品相关联的用户界面。对于同样的示例,在已经接收到仅剩下15件产品的数据的情况下,连续显示货架边缘标签装置的用户界面可以被配置为改变信息。在一些示例中,可以显示“备货中剩下的最后15个!”的闪光/闪烁显示输出,或者显示器输出可以自动地将用户界面上的价格降低10%,或者在确定在连续显示货架边缘标签装置的区域中存在工作人员的情况下显示器可以闪光/闪烁。连续显示货架边缘标签装置可以感测工作人员的存在,诸如通过感测工作人员的NFC使能访问卡在与连续显示货架边缘标签装置相关联和/或被包括在其内的传感器的感测范围内。Similarly, other data can be determined and transmitted as needed. For example, movement of the pusher relative to the shelf and/or pusher assembly can be determined. Such a determination may be based on position and may include a timer component for determining movement. Additionally, in other examples, the rate of change of the product level of the product associated with the continuous display shelf edge label device may be determined. In such an example, a shelf originally stocked with 50 products is determined to have only 15 products left after a period of time, such as an hour, a notification may be sent to the retailer's staff to replenish the products on the shelf goods. Similarly, such data can be sent to a continuous display shelf edge label device for changing the user interface associated with the product. For the same example, where data has been received for only 15 products remaining, the user interface for continuously displaying the shelf edge label device may be configured to change the information. In some examples, a flashing/blinking display output of "Last 15 left in stock!" may be displayed, or the display output may automatically reduce the price on the user interface by 10%, or upon determination that the shelf edge label is displayed continuously The display can flash/blink in the presence of personnel in the area of the unit. The continuous display shelf edge label device may sense the presence of a worker, such as by sensing the worker's NFC-enabled access card in the sensing range of a sensor associated with and/or included in the continuous display shelf edge label device Inside.

其他数据可以从推动器和/或推动器组件传达到连续显示货架边缘标签装置和/或由连续显示货架边缘标签装置确定。例如,连续显示货架边缘标签装置可以用关于产品的数据被编程,连续显示货架边缘标签装置与该数据相关联,和/或连续显示货架边缘标签装置可以从本地或远程源(诸如图23中的数据库28223)访问这样的数据。在一个示例中,产品可以具有到期数据。例如,产品可以是牛奶,并且待售货架上的特定产品可以具有相同的到期日期。可以建立一阈值来针对到期日期追踪剩余的牛奶物品的数量,以便将牛奶物品移出货架,不管是对于顾客还是用于具有较晚的到期日期的较新的牛奶物品。在一种情况下,随着直到满足到期日期的时间降低到阈值,系统可以降低牛奶的价格。如果到期日期为一周之后,则连续显示货架边缘标签装置可以为牛奶输出价格$2。当到期日期为4天之后时,价格可以下降10 %,或者价格下降$0.25。如果到期日期为2天之后时还剩余一些牛奶,那么价格可以下降50%,或者价格下降$1。在其他情况下,随着到期日期接近阈值时,可以以某种方式向零售商的工作人员提供通知。工作人员可以收到文本或电子邮件、在手持扫描仪上和/或以其他方式的牛奶需要更换或可能很快需要更换的通知。Other data may be communicated from the pusher and/or pusher assembly to and/or determined by the continuous display shelf edge label device. For example, the continuous display shelf edge label device can be programmed with data about the product, the continuous display shelf edge label device is associated with the data, and/or the continuous display shelf edge label device can be obtained from a local or remote source (such as the one in FIG. 23 ). database 28223) to access such data. In one example, a product may have expiration data. For example, a product could be milk, and a specific product on the shelf for sale could have the same expiration date. A threshold can be established to track the number of milk items remaining for expiration dates in order to remove milk items off the shelf, either for customers or for newer milk items with later expiration dates. In one case, the system may reduce the price of milk as the time until the expiration date is met decreases to a threshold. If the expiration date is one week away, the continuous display shelf edge label device may output a price of $2 for milk. When the expiration date is 4 days later, the price can drop by 10%, or the price can drop by $0.25. If there is some milk left when the expiration date is 2 days away, the price can drop by 50%, or by $1. In other cases, as the expiration date approaches a threshold, a notification may be provided to the retailer's staff in some way. Staff can be notified by text or email, on hand-held scanners and/or otherwise that milk needs to be replaced or may soon need to be replaced.

关于产品的其他说明性信息也可以从推动器和/或推动器组件传达到连续显示货架边缘标签装置和/或由连续显示货架边缘标签装置确定。这样的示例包括确定另一产品的剩余产品量,并且作为响应改变连续显示货架边缘标签装置的用户界面。例如,连续显示货架边缘标签装置可以确定或接收来自另一个连续显示货架边缘标签装置的关于竞争产品和/或相关产品(诸如牙膏到牙刷)的数据。利用这样的数据,连续显示货架边缘标签装置可以相应地改变与其相关联的产品的用户界面,诸如产品的价格。以这种方式,可以建立算法用于处理在连续显示货架边缘标签装置处何时和在何种情况下自动发生价格变化。连续显示货架边缘标签装置可以访问远程源以被授权这样做,和/或其自身确定产品的用户界面应该被改变。因此,如果确定竞争者的产品以比移动的产品以快得多的方式从货架上移走,则对于产品可以会发生降价。Other descriptive information about the product may also be communicated from the pusher and/or pusher assembly to and/or determined by the continuous display shelf edge label device. An example of this includes determining the remaining product amount of another product, and changing the user interface of the shelf edge label device continuously in response. For example, a continuous display shelf edge label device may determine or receive data from another continuous display shelf edge label device about competing products and/or related products, such as toothpaste to toothbrushes. Using such data, the continuous display shelf edge label device can change the user interface of the product with which it is associated, such as the price of the product, accordingly. In this way, an algorithm can be built to handle when and under what circumstances price changes automatically occur at the continuous display shelf edge label device. The continuous display shelf edge label device may access a remote source to be authorized to do so, and/or itself determine that the user interface of the product should be changed. Thus, if it is determined that a competitor's product is removed from the shelf in a much faster manner than the moving product, a price reduction may occur for the product.

本文描述的计算装置(其可以是图27中所示的装置中的一个)的特征可以在多个处理器和计算装置中被细分。The features of a computing device described herein, which may be one of the devices shown in Figure 27, may be subdivided among multiple processors and computing devices.

图38-40示出了无线商店智能系统的一个或多个方面,其可以被配置为与本文讨论的各种装置结合使用,以例如整合防盗、管理库存、处理电子价格显示、提供营销消息、提供交互式显示、并提供购物工具。图38描绘了用于实现无线商店智能系统的一个或多个方面的示例性环境。除了其他示例之外,计算机软件、硬件和网络可以用在多个不同的系统环境中,包括独立的、联网的、远程访问(又名,远程桌面)、虚拟化和/或基于云的环境。图 38示出了可以用于在独立和/或联网环境中实现本文描述的一个或多个示例性方面的系统架构和数据处理系统的示例。多个网络节点38103、38105、 38107和38109可以经由广域网(WAN)38101(例如因特网因特网)互连。其他网络和配置也可以或替代地被利用,包括专用内联网、公司网络、局域网(LAN)、城域网(MAN)、无线网络、个人网络(PAN)等等。网络38101是用于说明的目的,并且可以用更少或更多的计算机网络来代替。例如,LAN 可以包括任何已知的LAN拓扑中的一个或多个,并且可以使用多个不同协议中的一个或多个,诸如以太网或WiFi。装置38103、38105、38107、38109 和其他装置(未示出)可以被配置为通过双绞线、同轴电缆、光纤、无线电波或其它通信介质连接到网络中的一个或多个。38-40 illustrate one or more aspects of a wireless store intelligence system that may be configured for use in conjunction with the various devices discussed herein to, for example, integrate anti-theft, manage inventory, handle electronic price displays, provide marketing messages, Provides interactive displays and provides shopping tools. 38 depicts an example environment for implementing one or more aspects of the wireless store intelligence system. Among other examples, computer software, hardware, and networks may be used in a number of different system environments, including stand-alone, networked, remote access (aka, remote desktop), virtualized, and/or cloud-based environments. 38 illustrates an example of a system architecture and data processing system that can be used to implement one or more of the exemplary aspects described herein in a stand-alone and/or networked environment. Multiple network nodes 38103, 38105, 38107, and 38109 may be interconnected via a wide area network (WAN) 38101, such as the Internet. Other networks and configurations may also or alternatively be utilized, including private intranets, corporate networks, local area networks (LANs), metropolitan area networks (MANs), wireless networks, personal networks (PANs), and the like. Network 38101 is for illustration purposes and may be replaced by fewer or more computer networks. For example, a LAN may include one or more of any known LAN topology, and may use one or more of a number of different protocols, such as Ethernet or WiFi. Devices 38103, 38105, 38107, 38109, and other devices (not shown) may be configured to connect to one or more of the networks via twisted pair wires, coaxial cables, fiber optics, radio waves, or other communication media.

本文使用的并且在附图中示出的术语“网络”不仅指其中远程存储装置通过一个或多个通信链路连接在一起的系统,而且还指偶尔可以连接到这样的具有存储容量的系统的独立装置。因此,术语“网络”不仅包括“物理网络”,而且还包括“内容网络”,其由跨所有物理网络而驻留的、包括可归属于单个实体的数据。The term "network," as used herein and shown in the accompanying drawings, refers not only to systems in which remote storage devices are connected together by one or more communication links, but also to occasional systems that may be connected to such systems having storage capacity. Standalone device. Thus, the term "network" includes not only a "physical network," but also a "content network," which consists of data that resides across all physical networks, including data that can be attributed to a single entity.

部件可以包括数据服务器38103、网络服务器(web sever)38105和客户端计算机38107、38109。数据服务器38103提供一般访问、用于处理本文描述的一个或多个说明性方面的数据库和控制软件的控制和管理。数据服务器38103可以链接到网络服务器38105,用户可以根据需要通过该网络服务器38105交互和获取数据。在替代方案中,数据服务器38103本身可以充当网络服务器并直接连接到因特网。通过直接或间接连接、或者通过一些其他网络,数据服务器38103可以通过网络38101(例如因特网)链接到网络服务器38105。用户可以通过利用远程计算机38107、38109而与数据服务器 38103一起工作,例如使用网络浏览器以通过由网络服务器38105托管(host) 的一个或多个外部暴露的网站链接到数据服务器38103。客户端计算机 38107、38109可以与数据服务器38103一起使用,以获得存储在数据服务器 38103中的数据,或者可以用于其他或附加功能。在一个示例中,用户可以从客户端装置38107使用因特网浏览器、或者通过利用通过计算机网络(诸如因特网)与网络服务器38105和/或数据服务器38103通信的软件应用程序来访问网络服务器38105。Components may include a data server 38103, a web server 38105, and client computers 38107, 38109. Data Server 38103 provides general access, control and management of databases and control software for handling one or more illustrative aspects described herein. The data server 38103 can be linked to the web server 38105 through which users can interact and obtain data as needed. In the alternative, the data server 38103 could itself act as a web server and connect directly to the Internet. The data server 38103 may be linked to the web server 38105 through a network 38101 (eg, the Internet) through a direct or indirect connection, or through some other network. A user may work with the data server 38103 by utilizing remote computers 38107, 38109, such as using a web browser to link to the data server 38103 through one or more externally exposed web sites hosted by the web server 38105. Client computers 38107, 38109 may be used with data server 38103 to obtain data stored in data server 38103, or may be used for other or additional functions. In one example, a user may access web server 38105 from client device 38107 using an Internet browser, or by utilizing a software application that communicates with web server 38105 and/or data server 38103 over a computer network, such as the Internet.

服务器和应用程序可以在相同的物理机器上联合,并保留单独的虚拟或逻辑地址,或也可以驻留在单独的物理机器上。图38仅示出了可以利用的网络架构的一个迭代,并且本领域技术人员将认识到,所使用的具体网络架构和数据处理装置可以改变,并且对于它们提供的功能而言是次要的,如本文进一步所述。在一个示例中,由网络服务器38105和数据服务器38103提供的功能可以被加入到单个服务器上。Servers and applications can be federated on the same physical machine and keep separate virtual or logical addresses, or can reside on separate physical machines. Figure 38 shows only one iteration of the network architecture that can be utilized, and those skilled in the art will recognize that the specific network architecture and data processing means used can vary and are secondary to the functionality they provide, as described further herein. In one example, the functionality provided by web server 38105 and data server 38103 can be added to a single server.

每个部件38103、38105、38107、38109可以是本领域已知的任何类型的计算机、服务器或数据处理装置。数据服务器38103例如可以包括指导速率服务器38103的整体操作的处理器38111。数据服务器38103还可以包括 RAM 38113、ROM 38115、网络接口38117、输入/输出接口38119(例如,键盘、鼠标、显示器、打印机、照相机、扫描仪、触摸屏等)以及存储器38121。 I/O 38119可以包括用于读取、写入、显示和/或打印数据或文件的多个接口单元和驱动器。存储器38121可以进一步存储用于控制数据处理装置38103 的整体操作的操作系统软件38123,用于指令数据服务器38103完成本文描述的方面的控制逻辑38125,以及提供辅助、支持和/或其它功能的其他应用软件38127,其可以或不可以与本文描述的特征组合使用。控制逻辑在这里也可以被称为数据服务器软件38125。数据服务器软件的功能可以指基于编码到控制逻辑中的规则自动做出的操作或决定,由提供输入到系统中的用户手动做出的操作或决定,和/或基于用户输入的自动处理的组合(例如查询、数据更新等)。Each component 38103, 38105, 38107, 38109 may be any type of computer, server or data processing device known in the art. The data server 38103 may include, for example, a processor 38111 that directs the overall operation of the rate server 38103. Data server 38103 may also include RAM 38113, ROM 38115, network interface 38117, input/output interface 38119 (eg, keyboard, mouse, display, printer, camera, scanner, touch screen, etc.), and memory 38121. I/O 38119 may include a number of interface units and drivers for reading, writing, displaying and/or printing data or files. Memory 38121 may further store operating system software 38123 for controlling the overall operation of data processing device 38103, control logic 38125 for instructing data server 38103 to perform aspects described herein, and other applications that provide auxiliary, support, and/or other functions Software 38127, which may or may not be used in combination with the features described herein. The control logic may also be referred to herein as data server software 38125. The functionality of the data server software may refer to a combination of actions or decisions made automatically based on rules encoded into the control logic, actions or decisions made manually by a user providing input into the system, and/or automatic processing based on user input (e.g. queries, data updates, etc.).

存储器38121还可以存储在执行本文描述的特征中一个或多个特征的动作中使用的数据,包括存储到第一数据库38129和第二数据库38131中。在一些实施例中,第一数据库可以具有第二数据库(例如,作为单独的表格、报告等)。也就是说,取决于系统设计,信息可以归档在单个数据库中,或被分配到不同的逻辑、虚拟或物理数据库。装置38105、38107、38109可以包括与关于装置38103所讨论的相似或不同的架构。如本文所讨论的数据处理装置38103(或装置38105、38107、38109)的功能可以被定位成跨多个数据处理装置,例如以跨多个计算机分配处理负载,以基于地理位置、用户访问级别、服务质量(QoS)等分离办理,如本领域中所理解的。Memory 38121 may also store data used in performing actions of one or more of the features described herein, including into first database 38129 and second database 38131. In some embodiments, the first database may have a second database (eg, as a separate table, report, etc.). That is, depending on the system design, information can be archived in a single database or distributed to different logical, virtual or physical databases. Apparatus 38105, 38107, 38109 may include a similar or different architecture as discussed with respect to apparatus 38103. The functionality of data processing device 38103 (or devices 38105, 38107, 38109) as discussed herein may be positioned across multiple data processing devices, such as to distribute processing load across multiple computers, based on geographic location, user access level, Quality of Service (QoS) etc. are handled separately, as understood in the art.

此外,任何数量的个人计算机,诸如具有应用程序和其他功能的台式机、笔记本电脑、笔记本、移动电话或智能手机,具有Wi-Fi或其他无线连接的手持装置(例如,无线平板电脑、平板电脑、PDA等),具有内置或外部存储器和处理器的显示器,或者任何其他已知的计算机、计算装置或手持式计算机也可以连接到本文所述的网络中的一个或多个。也可以设想其他类型的装置,诸如售货亭(kiosk)、ATM和其他装置可以连接到本文描述的网络中的一个或多个。可以提供无线接入点用于连接这些装置,并且可以包括由一个或多个服务提供商支持的一系列蜂窝塔。另外,无线接入点可以是Wi-Fi (例如,与IEEE 802.11a/b/g/和类似的无线通信标准兼容)连接,并且计算装置可以在这些连接处获得到因特网的接入。本领域技术人员可以理解的其他技术可以用于允许装置与网络连接。In addition, any number of personal computers, such as desktops, laptops, notebooks, mobile phones, or smartphones with applications and other functions, handheld devices with Wi-Fi or other wireless connectivity (eg, wireless tablet, tablet , PDA, etc.), displays with built-in or external memory and processors, or any other known computer, computing device, or handheld computer may also be connected to one or more of the networks described herein. It is also contemplated that other types of devices, such as kiosks, ATMs, and other devices, may be connected to one or more of the networks described herein. Wireless access points may be provided for connecting these devices and may include a series of cell towers supported by one or more service providers. Additionally, wireless access points may be Wi-Fi (eg, compatible with IEEE 802.11a/b/g/ and similar wireless communication standards) connections, and computing devices may gain access to the Internet at these connections. Other techniques that will be appreciated by those skilled in the art may be used to allow the device to connect to the network.

一个或多个特征可以实施在计算机可用或可读数据和/或计算机可执行指令中、一个或多个程序模块中,其可由一个或多个计算机或本文所述的其他装置执行。通常,程序模块包括例程、程序、对象、部件、数据结构等,其在由计算机或其他装置中的处理器执行时处理特定的任务或实现特定的抽象数据类型。模块可以用随后被编译用于执行的源代码编程语言来编写,或者可以用诸如(但不限于)Javascript或ActionScript之类的脚本语言编写。计算机可执行指令可以被存储在诸如非易失性存储装置之类的计算机可读介质上。可以使用任何合适的计算机可读存储介质,包括硬盘、CD-ROM、光存储装置、磁存储装置、和/或其任何组合。另外,表示本文所描述的数据或事件的各种传输(非存储)介质可以以通过信号传导介质传播的电磁波的形式在源和目的地之间传输,信号传导介质诸如金属线、光纤、和/或无线传输介质(例如,空气和/或空间)。本文描述的各个方面可以实施为方法、数据处理系统或者计算机程序产品。因此,可以全部或部分地以软件、固件和 /或诸如集成电路、现场可编程门阵列(FPGA)等的硬件或硬件等同物来实施各种功能。可以使用特定的数据结构来更有效地实现本文描述的一个或多个方面,并且这样的数据结构被设想在本文描述的计算机可执行指令和计算机可用数据的范围内。One or more features may be implemented in computer-usable or readable data and/or computer-executable instructions, in one or more program modules, which may be executed by one or more computers or other apparatuses described herein. Generally, program modules include routines, programs, objects, components, data structures, etc. that, when executed by a processor in a computer or other apparatus, perform particular tasks or implement particular abstract data types. Modules may be written in a source code programming language that is then compiled for execution, or may be written in a scripting language such as, but not limited to, Javascript or ActionScript. Computer-executable instructions may be stored on computer-readable media such as non-volatile storage devices. Any suitable computer-readable storage medium may be used, including hard disks, CD-ROMs, optical storage devices, magnetic storage devices, and/or any combination thereof. Additionally, various transmission (non-storage) media representing data or events described herein may be transmitted between a source and a destination in the form of electromagnetic waves propagating through a signaling medium such as wire, optical fiber, and/or or wireless transmission medium (eg, air and/or space). Various aspects described herein can be implemented as a method, data processing system, or computer program product. Accordingly, various functions may be implemented in whole or in part in software, firmware, and/or hardware or hardware equivalents such as integrated circuits, field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), and the like. Certain data structures may be used to more efficiently implement one or more aspects described herein, and such data structures are contemplated within the scope of computer-executable instructions and computer-usable data described herein.

图39示出无线商店或设施智能系统的示例配置。如图39所示,可以提供集线器39100。集线器39100可以是集中式数据路由和接收装置,并且可以与各种装置互连。如本文所述,各种输入和输出可以被配置为通过集线器 39100从这些装置路由(route)。Figure 39 shows an example configuration of a wireless store or facility intelligence system. As shown in Figure 39, a hub 39100 may be provided. The hub 39100 may be a centralized data routing and receiving device, and may be interconnected with various devices. As described herein, various inputs and outputs can be configured to be routed from these devices through the hub 39100.

在一个示例中,可以与产品货架相关联的多个端点装置39202-39210可以被配置成经由有线或无线连接而连接到集线器39202-39210,如本文所讨论的。在一个示例中,多个端点装置39202-39210可以被配置为向集线器传送信息或者从集线器39100接收信息。端点装置39202-39210可以被配置为向集线器39100提供库存数据,或者端点装置39202-39210可以被配置为接收产品信息,用于在产品货架或显示器上或附近显示,产品信息可以包括产品描述、价格数据和/或营销材料。集线器39100还可以被配置为基于从端点装置39202-39212接收到的信息来做出决定,诸如通过基于库存数据产生特定的警报并且将警报输出到显示器、扬声器或者灯39328中的一个或者多个。In one example, a plurality of endpoint devices 39202-39210, which may be associated with a product shelf, may be configured to connect to the hubs 39202-39210 via wired or wireless connections, as discussed herein. In one example, the plurality of endpoint devices 39202-39210 may be configured to transmit information to or receive information from the hub 39100. Endpoint devices 39202-39210 may be configured to provide inventory data to hub 39100, or endpoint devices 39202-39210 may be configured to receive product information for display on or near product shelves or displays, product information may include product description, price Data and/or Marketing Materials. The hub 39100 may also be configured to make decisions based on information received from the endpoint devices 39202-39212, such as by generating specific alerts based on inventory data and outputting the alerts to one or more of the display, speakers, or lights 39328.

在特定示例中,端点装置可以包括产品数量和移动感测装置39202、产品安全窗感测装置39204、挂钩产品移动感测装置39206、电子货架标签 39208、交互式显示器39209、信标39207、或其他感测装置和/或显示器39210。例如,端点装置可以是以上关于图18-24描述的陈列管理系统1800、2100 和2300,或者上面关于图28-37描述的连续显示货架边缘标签装置。另外,交互式显示器39209可以互连到为顾客提供交互式购物工具以帮助做出购物决定的系统。与系统互连的信标可以被配置为确定目标装置(例如购物者手机)在其范围内,并且可以在特定情况下为了广告或提供购物支持/帮助的目的而启动与该装置的通信。还设想了提供库存数据和/或被配置为显示产品信息或货架标签的附加端点装置。In certain examples, endpoint devices may include product quantity and movement sensing means 39202, product safety window sensing means 39204, hooked product movement sensing means 39206, electronic shelf labels 39208, interactive displays 39209, beacons 39207, or others Sensing Device and/or Display 39210. For example, the endpoint device may be the display management systems 1800, 2100, and 2300 described above with respect to Figures 18-24, or the continuous display shelf edge label device described above with respect to Figures 28-37. Additionally, the interactive display 39209 can be interconnected to a system that provides customers with interactive shopping tools to aid in shopping decisions. A beacon interconnected with the system may be configured to determine that a target device (eg, a shopper cell phone) is within range, and may initiate communication with the device for advertising or shopping support/assistance purposes under certain circumstances. Additional endpoint devices that provide inventory data and/or are configured to display product information or shelf labels are also contemplated.

集线器39100也可以与网络互连,该网络可以包括各种服务器39322、 39324、39326和云39320。集线器39100还可以被配置为使用如本文所讨论的各种通信协议向各种服务器39322、39324、39326或云39320发送信息以及从各种服务器39322、39324、39326或云39320接收信息。例如,集线器 39100可以从多个端点装置39202-39210下载信息,并将该信息发送到任何期望的服务器或网络的一部分,诸如店内服务器39322、云39320和/或外部客户端服务器39324。所接收的信息然后可以在一个或多个服务器处被处理,并且服务器可以做出关于所接收到的数据的决定,例如通过基于库存数据产生某些警报39330或请求、或者可以使所接收到的信息可用于在门户(portal) 39326上查看。The hub 39100 may also be interconnected with a network, which may include various servers 39322, 39324, 39326, and the cloud 39320. The hub 39100 may also be configured to send and receive information to and from the various servers 39322, 39324, 39326 or the cloud 39320 using various communication protocols as discussed herein. For example, the hub 39100 can download information from the plurality of endpoint devices 39202-39210 and send the information to any desired server or part of the network, such as the in-store server 39322, the cloud 39320 and/or the external client server 39324. The received information can then be processed at one or more servers, and the servers can make decisions about the received data, such as by generating certain alerts 39330 or requests based on inventory data, or can make the received data Information is available for viewing on portal 39326.

图40中示出了示例性集线器39100,其可以被配置为计算装置,该计算装置可以包括与下面讨论的硬件和软件部件结合的或者除了下面讨论的硬件和软件部件之外的本文讨论的部件和特征。另外,与集线器39100互连的任何装置可以被配置为计算装置,并且可以包括与集线器39100相似的部件和特征和本文所讨论的特征。示例集线器39100可以包括一个或多个处理器 40101,其可以执行计算机程序的指令以执行本文描述的任何特征。处理器 40101可以包括定制的数字集成电路,诸如ASIC。但是,在一些应用中,可以使用市售的处理器。指令可以被存储在任何类型的非暂时性计算机可读介质或存储器中,以配置处理器40101的操作。例如,可以将指令存储在只读存储器(ROM)40102,随机存取存储器(RAM)40103,硬盘驱动器40105,诸如通用串行总线(USB)驱动器的可移除介质40104,光盘(CD)或数字多功能盘(DVD),软盘驱动器或任何其他期望的电子存储介质中。指令也可以存储在附接(或内部)硬盘驱动器40105中。存储器40102、40103、40104 和/或40105中的一个或多个可以包括更高级的操作环境,诸如用于高级功能和适应性的操作系统。An example hub 39100 is shown in FIG. 40, which may be configured as a computing device that may include the components discussed herein in combination with or in addition to the hardware and software components discussed below and features. Additionally, any device interconnected with hub 39100 may be configured as a computing device and may include similar components and features as hub 39100 and features discussed herein. The example hub 39100 can include one or more processors 40101 that can execute the instructions of a computer program to perform any of the features described herein. The processor 40101 may comprise a custom digital integrated circuit, such as an ASIC. However, in some applications, commercially available processors may be used. Instructions may be stored in any type of non-transitory computer readable medium or memory to configure the operation of the processor 40101. For example, instructions may be stored in read only memory (ROM) 40102, random access memory (RAM) 40103, hard drive 40105, removable media 40104 such as a universal serial bus (USB) drive, compact disc (CD) or digital Versatile Disc (DVD), floppy disk drive or any other desired electronic storage medium. Instructions may also be stored on an attached (or internal) hard drive 40105. One or more of memories 40102, 40103, 40104, and/or 40105 may include a higher-level operating environment, such as an operating system for advanced functionality and adaptability.

集线器39100可以包括各种外部控制。例如,可以存在一个或多个用户输入装置(未示出),诸如遥控器、键盘、鼠标、触摸屏、麦克风、照相机等。集线器还可以包括可选的显示器40111和/或可选的扬声器40115,并且可以包括一个或多个输出装置控制器40107,诸如视频或音频处理器。显示器在一个示例中可以是LCD显示器,或者任何其他已知的显示器类型。在一个示例中,集线器还可以包括一个或多个灯,例如指示灯。在另一个实施例中,用户的输入/输出功能可以通过显示器40111发生,其中显示器40111 可以被配置为允许触摸屏输入,以便在显示器40111上看到附加的输出。The hub 39100 may include various external controls. For example, there may be one or more user input devices (not shown) such as a remote control, keyboard, mouse, touch screen, microphone, camera, and the like. The hub may also include an optional display 40111 and/or an optional speaker 40115, and may include one or more output device controllers 40107, such as video or audio processors. The display may be an LCD display in one example, or any other known type of display. In one example, the hub may also include one or more lights, such as indicator lights. In another embodiment, user input/output functions may occur through display 40111, which may be configured to allow touch screen input in order to see additional output on display 40111.

一个或多个存储器40102、40103、40104和/或40105可以包括存储的地址位置和显示数据位置数据。地址位置可以包括标识集线器40100的地址,在一个示例中,其可以是唯一的标识符。在一个示例中,显示数据位置数据可以被处理器40101使用以格式化要在可选的显示器40111上显示的数据。这可以包括文本数据、图形、动态内容和组合。根据至少一个实施例,存储器中的显示数据位置数据可以符合诸如HTML、XML等的标记语言(mark-uplanguage)。虽然在图40中显示器40111被示出为在计算装置40100的外部,但是显示器40111和扬声器40115也可以被集成到与集线器39100相同的物理外壳和/或结构中。在集线器39100内示出的一个或多个部件类似地可以分开容纳在与集线器39100的另一个装置中和/或在另一个位置中。One or more of memories 40102, 40103, 40104, and/or 40105 may include stored address location and display data location data. The address location may include an address identifying the hub 40100, which may be a unique identifier in one example. In one example, display data location data may be used by processor 40101 to format data for display on optional display 40111. This can include textual data, graphics, dynamic content and composition. According to at least one embodiment, the display data location data in memory may conform to a mark-up language such as HTML, XML, or the like. Although display 40111 is shown external to computing device 40100 in FIG. 40 , display 40111 and speakers 40115 may also be integrated into the same physical housing and/or structure as hub 39100. One or more of the components shown within hub 39100 may similarly be housed separately in another device and/or in another location with hub 39100.

集线器39100可以包括提供一个或多个输入和输出的I/O模块40109。根据以上关于图39讨论的示例,集线器39100还可以包括一个或多个网络接口(诸如网络接口电路、扫描仪接口电路等),以与外部网络39110进行通信,集线器39100但可以包括任何其他计算装置、端点装置、服务器、云服务器等。I/O模块39109可以是有线接口、无线接口或两者的组合。在一个示例中,集线器39100可以经由双绞线、同轴电缆、光纤、无线电波(固定的或插入式无线电选项)或其他通信介质连接到一个或多个网络39324、 39326、39320、计算装置和/或端点装置39202-39212。例如,上述连接可以经由因特网、以太网、蓝牙、Wi-Fi、蜂窝调制解调器或红外线进行。在一个具体示例中,可以使用降低功耗类型的通信或低功率无线电信号(例如,蓝牙低功耗(也被称为“蓝牙LE”、“蓝牙智能”或“BLE”)、Zigbee和ISM) 来进行上述连接。在一个示例中,ISM可以是315/433MHz ISM或NFC。尽管如此,可以考虑任何其他已知的无线传输方法来形成上述连接,包括其他高效的专有和定制协议。Hub 39100 may include I/O modules 40109 that provide one or more inputs and outputs. Hub 39100 may also include one or more network interfaces (such as network interface circuitry, scanner interface circuitry, etc.) to communicate with external networks 39110, but may include any other computing device, in accordance with the examples discussed above with respect to Figure 39 , endpoint devices, servers, cloud servers, etc. The I/O module 39109 may be a wired interface, a wireless interface, or a combination of both. In one example, the hub 39100 may connect to one or more networks 39324, 39326, 39320, computing devices and /or endpoint devices 39202-39212. For example, the above connection may be via the Internet, Ethernet, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, cellular modem or infrared. In one specific example, reduced power types of communications or low power radio signals (eg, Bluetooth Low Energy (also known as "Bluetooth LE," "Bluetooth Smart," or "BLE"), Zigbee, and ISM) may be used. to make the above connection. In one example, the ISM may be 315/433MHz ISM or NFC. Nonetheless, any other known wireless transmission method may be considered to form the above connection, including other efficient proprietary and custom protocols.

集线器39100也可以包括电源40113。电源40113允许集线器39100操作处理器40101和各种其他部件。电源40113可以包括专用电池电源、以太网供电(power overEthernet)或外部电源,诸如AC电源连接或其组合。Hub 39100 may also include power supply 40113. The power supply 40113 allows the hub 39100 to operate the processor 40101 and various other components. The power source 40113 may include dedicated battery power, power over Ethernet, or an external power source such as an AC power connection or a combination thereof.

在诸如商店的设施中,取决于端点装置39202-39210的数量和位置,可以提供多个集线器39100。集线器39100可以放置在设施天花板上或货架或商品化系统(merchandizingsystem)的顶部处。每个集线器可以被分配给预定的一组端点装置39202-39210,并且多个端点装置39202-39210可以被配置为将信息传送到所述多个集线器39100的邻近的预定集线器或者接收来自所述多个集线器39100中的预定集线器的各种数据。每个集线器39100可以定位在分配给集线器39100的预定的一组端点装置39202-39210附近。还可以设想,所述多个集线器可以被配置为彼此通信并且确定每个集线器应该与哪个端点装置通信。端点装置39202-39210与集线器39100之间的较短距离允许减少信息传送/接收所需的功率设置,因为可以实现较低能量传输协议,诸如蓝牙低功耗、蓝牙LE、Zigbee或ISM。这可以帮助降低整个系统的成本。In a facility such as a store, multiple hubs 39100 may be provided depending on the number and location of endpoint devices 39202-39210. The hub 39100 can be placed on the facility ceiling or at the top of a shelf or merchantizing system. Each hub can be assigned to a predetermined set of endpoint devices 39202-39210, and a plurality of endpoint devices 39202-39210 can be configured to transmit information to or receive information from an adjacent predetermined hub of the plurality of hubs 39100. Various data for a predetermined hub in the hub 39100. Each hub 39100 may be positioned near a predetermined set of endpoint devices 39202-39210 assigned to the hub 39100. It is also contemplated that the plurality of hubs may be configured to communicate with each other and to determine which endpoint device each hub should communicate with. The shorter distance between the endpoint devices 39202-39210 and the hub 39100 allows for reduced power settings required for information transmission/reception, as lower energy transfer protocols such as Bluetooth Low Energy, Bluetooth LE, Zigbee or ISM can be implemented. This can help reduce the cost of the overall system.

另外,在该示例中,多个集线器39100中的每一个可以与服务器互连,服务器如设施服务器,其诸如店内服务器39322或云39320。多个集线器39100可以从多个端点装置39202-39210中的一个或多个接收库存信息,并将库存信息传送到店内服务器、设施服务器或云。集线器39100还可以被配置为从店内服务器、设施服务器或云服务器接收信息,并将信息传送到多个端点装置39202-39210中的一个或多个。Additionally, in this example, each of the plurality of hubs 39100 may be interconnected with a server, such as a facility server, such as an in-store server 39322 or a cloud 39320. The plurality of hubs 39100 can receive inventory information from one or more of the plurality of endpoint devices 39202-39210 and transmit the inventory information to an in-store server, a facility server, or the cloud. The hub 39100 may also be configured to receive information from an in-store server, a facility server, or a cloud server and transmit the information to one or more of the plurality of endpoint devices 39202-39210.

根据这里讨论的示例,多个集线器39100中的每一个可以从店内服务器、设施服务器或云服务器接收诸如价格信息、营销材料和其他产品信息的信息,并将该信息传送到特定的一组端点装置。另外,集线器39100中的每一个可以被配置为将从预定的一组端点装置39202-39210接收到的库存发送到店内服务器、设施服务器或云。According to the examples discussed herein, each of the plurality of hubs 39100 can receive information such as pricing information, marketing materials, and other product information from an in-store server, facility server, or cloud server, and communicate that information to a specific set of endpoint devices . Additionally, each of the hubs 39100 can be configured to send inventory received from a predetermined set of endpoint devices 39202-39210 to an in-store server, a facility server, or the cloud.

如上所述,集线器39100可以被配置为链接到端点装置39202-39212和利用来自端点装置39202-39212的数据的其他系统。在一个示例中,集线器 39100可以被配置为执行以下功能中的一个或多个:(1)充当数据聚合器来累积数据,然后沿着一个或多个网络传递数据,(2)接收、追踪和计算库存水平,(3)取决于从端点装置39202-39212接收到的数据而执行各种动作,诸如产生警报,(4)将各种数据有效地传达到端点装置39202-39212,(5) 以更高级别的协议(诸如WiFi)、以更高的数据速率将数据传达到网络/因特网,(6)监控端点装置并报告端点装置的状态。As described above, the hub 39100 can be configured to link to endpoint devices 39202-39212 and other systems that utilize data from endpoint devices 39202-39212. In one example, the hub 39100 can be configured to perform one or more of the following functions: (1) act as a data aggregator to accumulate data and then pass it along one or more networks, (2) receive, track and Calculate inventory levels, (3) perform various actions, such as generating alerts, depending on data received from endpoint devices 39202-39212, (4) effectively communicate various data to endpoint devices 39202-39212, (5) to Higher level protocols, such as WiFi, communicate data to the network/Internet at higher data rates, (6) monitor endpoint devices and report the status of endpoint devices.

集线器39100可以接收并存储从终点装置39202-39212接收到的数据,因此充当数据聚合器,并且可以被配置为将所存储的数据传递到另一个计算装置、服务器或因特网。例如,集线器可以被配置为从如本文讨论的端点装置接收库存数据或顾客信息。在另一个示例中,集线器可以被配置为从端点装置39202-39212接收各种日志文件数据。The hub 39100 can receive and store data received from the end point devices 39202-39212, thus acting as a data aggregator, and can be configured to communicate the stored data to another computing device, server, or the Internet. For example, a hub may be configured to receive inventory data or customer information from endpoint devices as discussed herein. In another example, the hub may be configured to receive various log file data from endpoint devices 39202-39212.

在一个示例中,集线器39100可以根据请求传输所存储的数据。在替代示例中,集线器39100可以被配置为在通过网络传送数据之前接收预定量的数据。例如,集线器可以基于缺少来自端点装置的输入的预定持续时间来管理何时警报有问题的端点装置的服务器。在一个示例中,一旦端点装置停止与集线器的通信,集线器就可以启动计时器,并且在向网络和/或适当的人的装置发送错误代码或警报之前等待预定的时间段。集线器还可以被配置为将信息聚合成单个文件并将单个文件发送到网络,例如通过发送整个设施的日志文件,而不是单独地发送每个端点装置的报告。这有助于减少网络流量,从而提高整个网络的效率。In one example, the hub 39100 can transmit stored data upon request. In an alternate example, the hub 39100 may be configured to receive a predetermined amount of data prior to transmitting the data over the network. For example, the hub may manage when to alert a server of a problematic endpoint device based on a predetermined duration of lack of input from the endpoint device. In one example, once the endpoint device stops communicating with the hub, the hub can start a timer and wait a predetermined period of time before sending an error code or alert to the network and/or the appropriate human device. The hub can also be configured to aggregate information into a single file and send the single file to the network, for example by sending log files for the entire facility, rather than sending reports for each endpoint device individually. This helps reduce network traffic, thereby increasing the efficiency of the entire network.

在其他示例中,集线器39100可以在预定时间、或者在发生某种情况(诸如低库存状况或盗窃情况)时传送数据。通过这种方式,例如,库存数据可以通过商店库存管理系统起作用,以调度补货或者可以关于潜在的盗窃而通知适当的人员。另外,集线器39100可以被配置成基于从端点装置 39202-39212接收到的库存信息来计算和追踪产品的数量。例如,根据上述示例,端点装置39202-39212中的每个可以收集库存数据,并且集线器39100可以从端点装置39202-39212中的每个接收库存数据并且计算位于由集线器 39101监控的货架中的每个上的产品的数量。例如,数量和移动感测装置 39202、产品安全窗感测装置39204、挂钩产品移动感测装置39206可以向集线器提供由每个装置监控的产品的相应的个体清点(tally),并且集线器 39100可以保持在被监控的每个货架上的库存的流动的清点(running tally)。In other examples, the hub 39100 may transmit data at predetermined times, or when certain conditions occur, such as low inventory conditions or theft conditions. In this way, for example, inventory data can be acted upon by a store inventory management system to schedule replenishment or the appropriate personnel can be notified of potential theft. Additionally, the hub 39100 may be configured to calculate and track the quantity of products based on inventory information received from the endpoint devices 39202-39212. For example, according to the above example, each of the endpoint devices 39202-39212 can collect inventory data, and the hub 39100 can receive inventory data from each of the endpoint devices 39202-39212 and count each of the shelves located in the shelves monitored by the hub 39101 number of products on it. For example, quantity and movement sensing device 39202, product safety window sensing device 39204, hooked product movement sensing device 39206 can provide the hub with a corresponding individual tally of products monitored by each device, and the hub 39100 can maintain A running tally of the inventory on each shelf being monitored.

替代地或另外,集线器39100可以被配置为追踪端点装置的位置,该位置可以与货架上的产品的数量相关,并且集线器39100可以被配置为确定在货架和/或设施上有多少产品。在采用多个集线器39100的情况下,每个集线器39100可以保持库存的流动的清点并且可以被配置为将库存数量报告给诸如店内服务器39322或云39320的集中式服务器。然后,店内服务器39322 可以保持设施内的产品数量的流动的清点,并且基于库存来做出决定,从而将产品水平或何时需要补货通知给适当的人员。另外,可以通过将所有商店库存信息路由到客户公司服务器39324来计算公司的总库存。例如,网络可以被配置为一旦库存水平达到预定值就接收库存信息并发送通知。Alternatively or additionally, the hub 39100 can be configured to track the location of the endpoint devices, which can be correlated to the number of products on the shelf, and the hub 39100 can be configured to determine how many products are on the shelf and/or facility. Where multiple hubs 39100 are employed, each hub 39100 may maintain a flowing inventory of inventory and may be configured to report inventory quantities to a centralized server such as in-store server 39322 or cloud 39320. The in-store server 39322 can then maintain a flowing inventory of product quantities within the facility and make decisions based on inventory to notify the appropriate personnel of product levels or when replenishment is required. Additionally, the company's total inventory can be calculated by routing all store inventory information to the client company server 39324. For example, the network may be configured to receive inventory information and send notifications once inventory levels reach a predetermined value.

根据这里描述的示例,集线器39100自身也可以关于从一个或多个端点装置202-212接收到的数据执行各种动作。例如,集线器可以被编程为检测盗窃情况,并且可以设置各种规则以基于盗窃活动来触发警报。例如,如果可能的盗窃正在发生,集线器还可以被配置为向一个或多个负责方的智能电话或手持装置(诸如设施管理员、职员、备货人员等)发送预定消息,例如警报或文本消息。在其他示例中,集线器100可以与另一计算装置和/或设施 PA系统进行通信,以基于一个或多个预定条件播放消息。另外,集线器可以被配置为在附接的扬声器上播放音频消息(具有本地音频选项),例如,集线器39100可以包括具有扬声器和音频回放电路的音频消息播放器,其可以被配置为播放安保声音。通过这种方式,集中式集线器可以播放安保消息,而不是将每个产品或商品化显示器配置成播放安保消息。在其他示例中,集线器100可以连接到商店安保系统,该商店安保系统可以被编程为定位可选的照相机并且开始潜在盗窃附近的视频的记录,类似于本文讨论的示例。According to the examples described herein, the hub 39100 itself may also perform various actions with respect to data received from one or more of the endpoint devices 202-212. For example, a hub can be programmed to detect theft, and various rules can be set to trigger an alarm based on theft activity. For example, if a possible theft is taking place, the hub may also be configured to send predetermined messages, such as alerts or text messages, to smartphones or handheld devices of one or more responsible parties (such as facility managers, clerks, stockists, etc.). In other examples, the hub 100 may communicate with another computing device and/or a facility PA system to broadcast messages based on one or more predetermined conditions. Additionally, the hub can be configured to play audio messages (with a local audio option) on attached speakers, for example, the hub 39100 can include an audio message player with speakers and audio playback circuitry that can be configured to play security sounds. In this way, a centralized hub can broadcast the security message, rather than configuring each product or commercial display to broadcast the security message. In other examples, the hub 100 may be connected to a store security system that may be programmed to locate an optional camera and initiate recording of video near a potential theft, similar to the examples discussed herein.

在另一个示例中,集线器39100可以被配置为追踪端点装置的位置,该位置可以与可能的盗窃相关联。例如,集线器可以配置为检测异常活动。具体来说,集线器可以检测到推动器的快速和大的移动,以检测不正常的购物情况。In another example, the hub 39100 can be configured to track the location of an endpoint device, which can be associated with possible theft. For example, a hub can be configured to detect unusual activity. Specifically, the hub can detect rapid and large movements of the pusher to detect abnormal shopping situations.

另外,指示灯可以附接到集线器,当预定条件发生时指示灯可以照亮。特别是多个彩色指示灯,例如绿色、黄色和红色,其每个可以提供不同的警报/含义,例如,绿色指示系统正常运行,黄色指示潜在问题,红色指示故障或盗窃情况。某些颜色代码也可以指示预定类型的盗窃情况。Additionally, indicator lights can be attached to the hub that illuminate when predetermined conditions occur. In particular, multiple colored indicator lights, such as green, yellow, and red, each of which can provide a different alert/meaning, eg, green for normal system operation, yellow for potential problems, and red for malfunction or theft. Certain color codes can also indicate a predetermined type of theft.

另外,可以设置各种规则来根据库存水平触发警报。例如,如果库存水平达到某个阈值,集线器或网络也可以被配置为向一个或多个负责方的智能电话或手持装置(诸如设施管理员、职员、备货人员等)发送预定消息,例如警报或文本消息。在其他示例中,集线器或网络可以被设置有使库存动作自动化的各种规则,诸如何时请求补货或什么时候订购附加产品。Additionally, various rules can be set to trigger alerts based on stock levels. For example, if inventory levels reach a certain threshold, the hub or network may also be configured to send predetermined messages, such as alerts or text message. In other examples, a hub or network may be provided with various rules that automate inventory actions, such as when to request replenishment or when to order additional products.

集线器39100还可以被配置为将如本文讨论的所有数据传达到端点装置 39202-39210,诸如定价、营销材料、产品信息、产品位置信息、用户说明、广告、折扣、促销、交易、优惠券、购物支持/帮助信息、折扣信息、对软件的更新、对操作系统的更新等,并且可以是文本、图像、音频、视频、数据文件、可执行文件等的形式。集线器39100可以被配置为将以上讨论的信息中的任何信息传达到端点装置39202-39210,诸如交互式显示器39209或上面关于图28-37描述的连续显示货架边缘标签装置示例。例如,集线器39100 可以被配置成发送或更新表示关于端点装置所位于的货架上的产品的信息的数据,例如,在连续显示货架边缘标签装置或交互式显示器上用于用户界面的当前产品信息数据。信息可以来自如本文讨论的无线智能系统网络中的各种互连部件中的任何,诸如设施服务器、店内服务器或云。The hub 39100 may also be configured to communicate all data as discussed herein to the endpoint devices 39202-39210, such as pricing, marketing materials, product information, product location information, user descriptions, advertisements, discounts, promotions, deals, coupons, shopping Support/help information, discount information, updates to software, updates to operating systems, etc., and may be in the form of text, images, audio, video, data files, executable files, and the like. The hub 39100 may be configured to communicate any of the information discussed above to the endpoint devices 39202-39210, such as the interactive display 39209 or the continuous display shelf edge label device example described above with respect to Figures 28-37. For example, the hub 39100 may be configured to send or update data representing information about products on the shelf where the endpoint device is located, eg, current product information data for a user interface on a continuous display shelf edge label device or interactive display . The information may come from any of the various interconnected components in the wireless intelligent system network as discussed herein, such as facility servers, in-store servers, or the cloud.

集线器39100还可以被配置为利用当前的软件、操作系统和/或更新的内容周期性地更新端点装置39202-39210。如本文所述,更新可以从网络推出。集线器还可以查看端点装置是否被适当地更新,并在预定时间向网络返回报告以指示更新是否成功。The hub 39100 may also be configured to periodically update the endpoint devices 39202-39210 with current software, operating system, and/or updated content. Updates can be rolled out from the web, as described in this article. The hub can also see if the endpoint device is properly updated and report back to the network at a predetermined time to indicate whether the update was successful.

集线器可以被配置为存储以上讨论的从网络接收到的用于端点装置的数据,并确定何时将数据发送出到端点装置,诸如在天、周、月等的预定时间。例如,集线器可以被配置成在端点装置可能不被使用时在设施处在的非高峰时间期间将数据发送到端点装置。因此,集线器可以管理到端点装置的网络流量,并且在端点装置正在使用时不会用某些非关键数据给端点装置带来负担。The hub may be configured to store the data received from the network for the endpoint devices discussed above, and to determine when to send the data out to the endpoint devices, such as at predetermined times of day, week, month, and the like. For example, the hub may be configured to send data to the endpoint devices during off-peak hours at the facility when the endpoint devices may not be in use. Thus, the hub can manage network traffic to the endpoint device without burdening the endpoint device with some non-critical data while the endpoint device is in use.

集线器39100可以被配置为以更高级别的协议(诸如Wi-Fi)以更高的数据速率向网络/因特网传达数据,允许集线器39100双向地发送数据并且有效地接收和发送数据,使得系统更具成本效益和能量效率。在一个示例中,集线器39100可以被配置为以更高级别的协议(例如Wi-Fi)、以更高的数据速率与存储系统或因特网及网络的其它区域通信,并且还可以被配置为经由低能量传输协议与多个端点装置通信。以这种方式,系统可以利用低能量传输以避免必须为端点装置中的每个提供大量电源,而不必牺牲有效收集数据的能力。这允许集线器39100双向发送数据并有效地接收数据,如本文所讨论的,帮助集线器39100更快速和高效地发送诸如使用日志信息、视频和数据更新的较大文件。The Hub 39100 can be configured to communicate data to the network/Internet at higher data rates with higher level protocols such as Wi-Fi, allowing the Hub 39100 to send data bi-directionally and to receive and transmit data efficiently, making the system more Cost-effectiveness and energy efficiency. In one example, the hub 39100 may be configured to communicate with storage systems or the Internet and other areas of the network at higher data rates at higher level protocols (eg, Wi-Fi), and may also be configured to communicate via low An energy transfer protocol communicates with a plurality of endpoint devices. In this way, the system can utilize low energy transfers to avoid having to provide a large amount of power to each of the endpoint devices without having to sacrifice the ability to efficiently collect data. This allows the hub 39100 to send data bidirectionally and to receive data efficiently, as discussed herein, helping the hub 39100 to send larger files such as usage log information, video, and data updates more quickly and efficiently.

集线器39100还可以被配置为监控端点装置并且提供关于端点装置的状态的报告,从而允许评估端点装置的健康以及报告有问题的端点装置。在一个示例中,集线器还可以从端点装置接收定期更新或“心跳”以指示状态。这些心跳可以是本文所讨论的任何传输的形式,并且可以通知集线器39100端点装置连接到系统并操作。心跳传输可以包括与端点装置的操作有关的各种数据,例如,装置序列号、在线状态、电池寿命信息、操作系统/软件版本、更新状态信息、网络上下时间信息等。这有助于监控系统的网络完整性,并确保端点装置适当地连接到系统。在一个示例中,在将端点装置安装在商店或设施中之后,从端点装置传送的心跳可以向集线器指示该装置是在工作的和操作的。通过这种方式,如果集线器在预定时间之后没有从端点装置接收到心跳,则集线器可以向店内服务器、云等发送消息或警报,以指示特定端点装置未操作,并且诸如技术人员的人员可以排除故障或诊断情况。此外,来自端点装置的心跳可以包括软件和硬件信息,以允许人员确定是否需要对端点装置的任何更新。The hub 39100 can also be configured to monitor endpoint devices and provide reports on the status of endpoint devices, allowing assessment of endpoint device health and reporting of problematic endpoint devices. In one example, the hub may also receive periodic updates or "heartbeats" from endpoint devices to indicate status. These heartbeats can be in the form of any of the transmissions discussed herein and can notify the Hub 39100 endpoint device to connect to the system and operate. Heartbeat transmissions may include various data related to the operation of the endpoint device, eg, device serial number, online status, battery life information, operating system/software version, update status information, network up and down time information, and the like. This helps monitor the network integrity of the system and ensures that endpoint devices are properly connected to the system. In one example, after an endpoint device is installed in a store or facility, a heartbeat transmitted from the endpoint device can indicate to the hub that the device is up and operational. In this way, if the hub does not receive a heartbeat from an endpoint device after a predetermined amount of time, the hub can send a message or alert to an in-store server, cloud, etc. to indicate that a particular endpoint device is not operating, and a person such as a technician can troubleshoot the problem or diagnose the condition. Additionally, the heartbeat from the endpoint device may include software and hardware information to allow personnel to determine if any updates to the endpoint device are required.

在替代示例中,集线器39100可以被配置为诊断端点装置的某些错误和故障。例如,如果端点装置不响应对库存数据的请求,则集线器39100可以通过本文所讨论的各种通道提醒合适的人员。在其他示例中,如果遇到某些故障状况或错误代码,诸如电池电量低、故障传感器或故障显示器,端点装置可以被配置使集线器39100发出声音。在接收到故障状况的指示时,集线器39100可以被配置为立即或在预定的时间之后警报适当的人员,这取决于错误或故障、以及问题可以在网络内解决的可能性。然后人员可以排除故障或更换有问题的端点装置。In an alternate example, the hub 39100 may be configured to diagnose certain errors and failures of endpoint devices. For example, if an endpoint device does not respond to a request for inventory data, the hub 39100 can alert the appropriate personnel through the various channels discussed herein. In other examples, the endpoint device may be configured to cause the hub 39100 to emit a sound if certain fault conditions or error codes are encountered, such as a low battery, a faulty sensor, or a faulty display. Upon receiving an indication of a fault condition, the hub 39100 can be configured to alert the appropriate personnel immediately or after a predetermined time, depending on the error or failure, and the likelihood that the problem can be resolved within the network. Personnel can then troubleshoot or replace the faulty endpoint device.

如关于以上关于图18-24讨论的示例所讨论的,端点装置39202-39212 可以被配置为收集各种数据,诸如库存数据和顾客信息。例如,如本文所述,端点装置可以被配置为收集关于商店环境的各种数据并且被配置为一起传递数据。端点装置39202-39212也可以被配置为用于显示包括静态和动态图像的各种数据的显示装置。例如,根据上面关于图28-37的连续显示货架边缘标签装置所讨论的示例,某些端点装置可以被配置为向购物者显示关于产品信息、定价和/或市场信息的实时数据。在多集线器示例中,多个终点装置 39202-39212可以被配置为将库存信息传送到多个集线器中的邻近预定集线器,或者从多个集线器中的预定集线器接收价格信息。As discussed above with respect to the examples discussed above with respect to Figures 18-24, endpoint devices 39202-39212 may be configured to collect various data, such as inventory data and customer information. For example, as described herein, endpoint devices may be configured to collect various data about the store environment and configured to communicate the data together. Endpoint devices 39202-39212 may also be configured as display devices for displaying various data including still and moving images. For example, certain endpoint devices may be configured to display real-time data regarding product information, pricing, and/or marketing information to shoppers in accordance with the examples discussed above with respect to the continuous display shelf edge label devices of Figures 28-37. In the multi-hub example, the plurality of end point devices 39202-39212 may be configured to transmit inventory information to adjacent predetermined ones of the plurality of hubs, or to receive price information from predetermined ones of the plurality of hubs.

另一示例端点装置可以被配置为交互式平板电脑和/或显示装置39209,其示例在图41中描绘。交互式显示装置39209可以被配置为计算装置并且可以包括如本文所讨论的一个或多个各种硬件和软件部件。例如,交互式显示器39209可以设置有多点触摸屏技术和其他输入,诸如条形码扫描仪。交互式显示装置39209可以被配置为向顾客提供用于作出决定以确定要购买哪些产品的帮助,以便为零售商提供机会来弥合店内和线上零售之间的差距。Another example endpoint device may be configured as an interactive tablet and/or display device 39209, an example of which is depicted in FIG. 41 . Interactive display device 39209 may be configured as a computing device and may include one or more of the various hardware and software components as discussed herein. For example, the interactive display 39209 may be provided with multi-touch screen technology and other inputs, such as a barcode scanner. The interactive display device 39209 may be configured to provide assistance to customers in making decisions about which products to purchase in order to provide retailers with an opportunity to bridge the gap between in-store and online retail.

例如,交互式显示器39209可以被配置为在货架边缘处向顾客和/或购物者提供交互式产品信息。界面可以提供许多不同的视图和可以选择的产品菜单,或者可以扫描产品以访问其中存储的产品信息。交互式显示器39209还可以基于顾客的选择或先前的选择来提供向上销售和交叉销售,并向顾客提供相关的建议。例如,如果顾客对鞋子感兴趣,则交互式显示器可以提供其他类似的鞋子选择或匹配的衬衫或裤子。交互式显示装置39209还可以提供即时价格比较和实时更新。交互式显示装置39209可以提供价格匹配或者用于在当天在商店中购买产品的某种激励。交互式显示装置39209可以向购物者提供在线评论。在一个示例中,交互式显示装置39202还可以依靠社交媒体并且可以向购物者提供对来自同龄人的产品推荐的访问。此外,交互式显示装置39209可以将商店的网站集成在商店中,并且可以被配置为检查缺货物品的在线上可用性,并且可以提供电子或线上订购。交互式显示器39209 还可以向顾客和购物者提供邮件列表注册,其中顾客可以将联系人信息输入到显示器中,并且可以使用多触点触摸屏选择感兴趣的话题。所有这些信息都可以经由到集线器的传输转送到网络并由零售商相应地采取行动。For example, the interactive display 39209 can be configured to provide interactive product information to customers and/or shoppers at the edge of the shelf. The interface can offer many different views and a menu of products to choose from, or a product can be scanned to access the product information stored in it. The interactive display 39209 may also provide up-sells and cross-sells based on the customer's selections or previous selections, and provide relevant recommendations to the customer. For example, if a customer is interested in shoes, the interactive display may offer other similar selections of shoes or matching shirts or pants. The interactive display 39209 can also provide instant price comparisons and real-time updates. The interactive display 39209 may provide price matching or some kind of incentive for purchasing products in the store that day. Interactive display 39209 can provide online reviews to shoppers. In one example, the interactive display 39202 can also rely on social media and can provide shoppers with access to product recommendations from peers. In addition, the interactive display device 39209 can integrate the store's website in the store, and can be configured to check online availability of out-of-stock items, and can provide electronic or online ordering. The interactive display 39209 can also provide mailing list registration to customers and shoppers, where customers can enter contact information into the display and select topics of interest using the multi-touch touch screen. All of this information can be forwarded to the network via transmission to the hub and acted accordingly by the retailer.

另外,交互式显示器39209也可以被配置为售货亭以向顾客和购物者出售产品。例如,可以为交互式显示器提供可配置为处理支付的交易界面。在这个示例中,打印机可以连接到交互式显示器或集线器,使得交互式显示器或集线器可以向顾客发出收据。交易数据可以存储在交互式显示器上,并且可以直接路由到集线器,或在预定的时间或者根据来自集线器或网络的请求路由到集线器。Additionally, the interactive display 39209 can also be configured as a kiosk to sell products to customers and shoppers. For example, the interactive display can be provided with a transaction interface that can be configured to process payments. In this example, the printer can be connected to the interactive display or hub so that the interactive display or hub can issue a receipt to the customer. Transaction data can be stored on the interactive display and routed directly to the hub, or at predetermined times or upon request from the hub or network.

另外,来自交互式显示器的日志数据(可以包括交易数据、访问数据、顾客信息等)可以被收集、记录、传送并通过集线器路由。日志文件数据可以包括关于使用特定交互式显示器的顾客或购物者的数量、顾客或购物者是否查看了某些产品信息、以及解释交互式显示器的有效性的任何其他信息的数据。这样,网络可以进一步处理和追踪数据以供以后查看和分析。例如,零售商可以确定哪些顾客在什么时间访问哪些交互显示器,以及哪些顾客进行了购买、以及哪些顾客不确定交互显示器的有效性。Additionally, log data from the interactive display (which may include transaction data, access data, customer information, etc.) may be collected, recorded, transmitted, and routed through the hub. Log file data may include data about the number of customers or shoppers using a particular interactive display, whether customers or shoppers viewed certain product information, and any other information that explains the effectiveness of the interactive display. This way, the network can further process and track the data for later viewing and analysis. For example, a retailer can determine which customers accessed which interactive displays at what time, and which customers made purchases, and which customers were unsure of the effectiveness of the interactive displays.

在一个示例中,端点装置可以包括一个或多个位置信标39207。信标 39207可以被配置为确定诸如顾客计算装置之类的目标装置在其范围内并且在某些情况下为了广告或提供购物支持/帮助的目的而启动与该装置的通信。例如,顾客计算装置可以是台式计算机、膝上型计算机、平板电脑、智能电话等。在一个或多个布置中,顾客计算装置可以是诸如移动计算装置(例如,智能电话、平板电脑、可穿戴计算机、增强现实眼镜或任何其他类型的移动装置)的个人计算装置,个人计算装置属于设施或商店的顾客和/或由设施或商店的顾客使用,该顾客在设施或商店处或在设施或商店附近和/或由设施或商店操作、控制和/或以其它方式与设施或商店相关联的任何其它位置处。位置信标可以被配置为传送一个或多个信号,诸如无线电信号,一个或多个信号可以由位于信标的指定距离附近和/或以其它方式位于信标的指定距离内的装置检测和/或接收。在一个或多个实施例中,位置信标可以实现用以传送低功率无线电信号的低功耗蓝牙(也称为“蓝牙LE”、“蓝牙智能”或“BLE”)、Zigbee或ISM技术。信标可以使用本文讨论的任何协议(包括有线或无线连接)与集线器通信。In one example, an endpoint device may include one or more location beacons 39207. The beacon 39207 may be configured to determine that a target device, such as a customer computing device, is within range and in some cases initiate communication with the device for purposes of advertising or providing shopping support/assistance. For example, the customer computing device may be a desktop computer, laptop computer, tablet computer, smartphone, or the like. In one or more arrangements, the customer computing device may be a personal computing device such as a mobile computing device (eg, a smartphone, tablet, wearable computer, augmented reality glasses, or any other type of mobile device) that belongs to A customer of a facility or store and/or used by a customer of a facility or store who is at or near the facility or store and/or is operated, controlled and/or otherwise associated with the facility or store at any other location in the union. A location beacon may be configured to transmit one or more signals, such as radio signals, that may be detected and/or received by devices located near and/or otherwise within a specified distance of the beacon . In one or more embodiments, a location beacon may implement Bluetooth Low Energy (also known as "Bluetooth LE," "Bluetooth Smart," or "BLE"), Zigbee, or ISM technology to transmit low-power radio signals. Beacons can communicate with the hub using any of the protocols discussed herein, including wired or wireless connections.

由特定位置信标传送的(一个或多个)特定信号可以包括一个或多个特征,诸如分配给特定位置信标和/或以其他方式与特定位置信标连接的唯一标识符,其可以使得位置信标能够由获得由特定位置信标传送的(一个或多个) 特定信号的任何装置识别。在感测由位置信标(其可以例如位于特定位置处) 传送的特定信号并随后识别发送特定信号的位置信标时,计算装置可能能够推断出其位于和/或靠近位置信标所在的特定位置。The particular signal(s) transmitted by the particular location beacon may include one or more characteristics, such as a unique identifier assigned to and/or otherwise connected to the particular location beacon, which may enable A location beacon can be identified by any device that obtains the particular signal(s) transmitted by the particular location beacon. Upon sensing a particular signal transmitted by a location beacon (which may, for example, be located at a particular location) and subsequently identifying the location beacon that transmitted the particular signal, the computing device may be able to infer that it is located at and/or near the particular location where the location beacon is located. Location.

例如,位置信标可以被定位在设施或商店处和/或附近,并且可以被特定地定位在设施或商店的不同区域处和/或附近,诸如在欢迎区域、在各种产品陈列处或在等候区等。信标可以被战略性地放置在零售环境中,以吸引顾客到商店或设施内的某些陈列或位置。另外,每个位置信标可以传送无线电信号,该无线电信号可以被其他装置(诸如客户计算设装置)检测到和/或接收到,其可以使这些装置能够确定它们存在于设施或商店处和/或位于设施或商店的特定区域处和/或附近。信标也可以被配置成追踪关于顾客行为的信息,诸如顾客在商店内行进的位置。该数据可以有助于评估某些促销活动的有效性,并更好地了解商店中的顾客存在和人口统计。零售商还可以追踪某些顾客有多经常在设施或商店中,并根据顾客有多经常访问商店来提供自动化忠诚度折扣或忠诚度计划。For example, location beacons may be positioned at and/or near a facility or store, and may be specifically positioned at and/or near different areas of a facility or store, such as in a welcome area, at various product displays, or at waiting area etc. Beacons can be strategically placed in a retail environment to attract customers to certain displays or locations within a store or facility. Additionally, each location beacon may transmit radio signals that may be detected and/or received by other devices, such as client computing devices, that may enable these devices to determine their presence at the facility or store and/or or located at and/or near certain areas of the facility or store. Beacons may also be configured to track information about customer behavior, such as where customers travel within the store. This data can help assess the effectiveness of certain promotions and better understand customer presence and demographics in the store. Retailers can also track how often certain customers are at a facility or store and offer automated loyalty discounts or loyalty programs based on how often customers visit the store.

信标也可以与集线器通信以整合其数据,并且如本文所讨论的从集线器接收信息,例如广告信息、产品信息或购物信息。例如,集线器可以与客户装置通信并且传送各种广告、折扣、促销、交易或优惠券,或者为附近的特定产品提供购物支持/帮助或位置信息。集线器还可以配置为调整信标传输,以在商店环境内使信标最有效。例如,集线器可以使用来自多个同地协作的信标的实时聚集数据,并调整其功率输出或RF辐射模式以将商店的特定区域作为目标,填充商店内的RF间隙,或者使用来自信标的RSS(接收信号强度)数据,以对目标装置的位置进行三角测量以获得更准确的位置信息,从而允许将更多的相关信息推送到该目标。The beacons may also communicate with the hub to integrate its data, and receive information from the hub as discussed herein, such as advertising information, product information, or shopping information. For example, the hub may communicate with the client device and transmit various advertisements, discounts, promotions, deals or coupons, or provide shopping support/assistance or location information for particular products nearby. Hubs can also be configured to adjust beacon transmission to make beacons most effective within the store environment. For example, a hub can use real-time aggregated data from multiple co-located beacons and adjust its power output or RF radiation pattern to target specific areas of the store, fill RF gaps within the store, or use RSS ( received signal strength) data to triangulate the location of the target device for more accurate location information, allowing more relevant information to be pushed to that target.

在一个示例中,信标可以存在于零售商店中以发送与若干特定品牌相关的广告或折扣信息,并且可以评估信标广告的有效性。当遍布商店的信标与集线器通信时,可以确定特定的购物者是否允许并遵照来自品牌“A”而不是来自“B”的广告和折扣。当系统通过商店追踪购物者时,可以关于呈现的广告或折扣中的内容的强度作出决定以加强品牌“A”或提升“B”。此外,使用来自信标和其他端点装置的聚集数据,可以推测,如果购物者在品牌“A”产品的位置附近被呈现品牌“A”产品的广告或折扣,并且在预定的时间内,端点装置可以通过集线器指示品牌“A”产品被移除并且大概被购买。通过这种方式,可以直接评估信标广告的效果。In one example, beacons may exist in retail stores to send advertisements or discount information related to several specific brands, and the effectiveness of beacon advertisements may be assessed. When beacons throughout the store communicate with the hub, it can be determined whether a particular shopper allows and follows advertisements and discounts from brand "A" rather than from "B". As the system tracks shoppers through the store, decisions can be made regarding the strength of the content in the ad or discount presented to reinforce brand "A" or boost "B". Additionally, using aggregated data from beacons and other endpoint devices, it can be speculated that if a shopper is presented with an advertisement or discount for a Brand "A" product near the location of a Brand "A" product, and within a predetermined period of time, the endpoint device Brand "A" products may be indicated through the hub to be removed and presumably purchased. In this way, the effectiveness of beacon advertising can be directly assessed.

返回参考图39,网络(例如,店内服务器39322、云39320或外部客户端服务器39324)被配置为从集线器39100接收数据。一般而言,如下面进一步详细讨论的,网络(例如,店内服务器39322,云39320或外部客户端服务器39324)可以(1)存储接收到的或传送到集线器和端点装置的任何数据,(2)关于接收到的和传送给集线器和端点装置的数据作出决定,(3)显示接收到的或传送给集线器和端点装置的任何数据,和(4)允许接收到的或传送到集线器和端点装置的数据被修改。Referring back to FIG. 39 , a network (eg, in-store server 39322 , cloud 39320 , or external client server 39324 ) is configured to receive data from hub 39100 . In general, as discussed in further detail below, a network (eg, in-store server 39322, cloud 39320, or external client server 39324) may (1) store any data received or communicated to hub and endpoint devices, (2) Make decisions regarding data received and transmitted to hub and endpoint devices, (3) display any data received or transmitted to hub and endpoint devices, and (4) allow data received or transmitted to hub and endpoint devices Data is modified.

网络可以存储如本文讨论的接收到的或传送到集线器和端点装置的任何数据,例如库存数据、顾客信息、端点装置状态、使用和活动信息、顾客信息、产品信息、定价信息、营销材料、产品信息、用户说明、回扣信息、内容、软件更新、操作系统更新等。通过这种方式,网络可以连续地提供对接收到的或传送到集线器和端点装置的数据的更新,并不断地更新内部网页和显示该信息的任何外部网页。The network may store any data received or transmitted to hub and endpoint devices as discussed herein, such as inventory data, customer information, endpoint device status, usage and activity information, customer information, product information, pricing information, marketing materials, products Information, User Instructions, Rebate Information, Content, Software Updates, OS Updates, etc. In this way, the network can continuously provide updates on data received or transmitted to hub and endpoint devices, as well as continuously update internal web pages and any external web pages that display this information.

网络也可以关于接收到的和传送到端点装置的数据做出各种决定。在一个示例中,可以提供各种规则或算法来监控库存水平并发送指令以请求额外的库存,并且网络可以被配置为请求针对特定区域或位置的额外库存。The network may also make various decisions regarding the data received and transmitted to the endpoint devices. In one example, various rules or algorithms may be provided to monitor inventory levels and send instructions to request additional inventory, and the network may be configured to request additional inventory for a particular area or location.

网络还可以基于所接收到的库存数据做出关于在产生特定警报39330时由端点装置接收到的数据的决定。在一个示例中,店内服务器39322可以与商店安保系统、照相机、显示器、灯指示器或PA系统中的一个或多个相连。在接收到可根据本文讨论的示例确定的可能的盗窃情况的指示时,网络可被配置为打开照相机以捕获潜在盗窃的图像,显示预定的消息以警告人员,根据本文讨论的一个或多个示例通过灯指示器提供警报和/或通过PA系统提供警报。网络也可以被配置成根据上面讨论的示例向人员发送消息以警告人员可能的盗窃。The network may also make decisions regarding the data received by the endpoint device when the particular alert 39330 was generated based on the received inventory data. In one example, the in-store server 39322 may be connected to one or more of store security systems, cameras, displays, light indicators, or PA systems. Upon receiving an indication of a possible theft situation that may be determined according to the examples discussed herein, the network may be configured to turn on a camera to capture an image of the potential theft, display a predetermined message to alert personnel, according to one or more examples discussed herein Alerts are provided via light indicators and/or via the PA system. The network may also be configured to send a message to the person to warn the person of possible theft according to the examples discussed above.

另外,在一个示例中,网络可以关于发送到端点装置的数据做出决定。例如,还可以提供各种规则或算法来更新内容,例如,交互式显示数据或电子货架显示数据,诸如基于需求、供应、市场条件和/或天、周、月或年的时间的定价信息。Additionally, in one example, the network may make decisions regarding the data sent to the endpoint devices. For example, various rules or algorithms may also be provided to update content, eg, interactive display data or electronic shelf display data, such as pricing information based on demand, supply, market conditions and/or time of day, week, month or year.

在网络处接收到的所有信息都可以由设施或公司处的人员以适当的网络凭证查看。在一个示例中,门户可以是基于网络的,并且可以提供由一个或多个集线器提供的信息的不同视图和分解。例如,门户可以提供来自特定端点装置、设施或区域的趋势盗窃情况。通过这种方式,不同的人员可以查看门户,并可以查看趋势,诸如某些产品的盗窃、某些区域中的盗窃或一年中某些时间点的盗窃。All information received at the network can be viewed by personnel at the facility or company with appropriate network credentials. In one example, a portal can be web-based and can provide different views and decompositions of information provided by one or more hubs. For example, a portal can provide trending theft from a particular endpoint device, facility or region. In this way, different people can view the portal and can see trends such as theft of certain products, theft in certain areas, or theft at certain times of the year.

另外,设施或公司可以通过门户查看和管理库存水平。门户还可以向零售商提供库存情报,使得零售商可以从库存补充的角度更好地管理产品趋势并预测事件。这提高了在商店或设施内备货产品的能力,并且可以用于警报库存人员准备库存以用于补货目的。Additionally, a facility or company can view and manage inventory levels through the portal. The portal can also provide inventory intelligence to retailers, allowing retailers to better manage product trends and predict events from an inventory replenishment perspective. This improves the ability to stock products within a store or facility and can be used to alert inventory personnel to prepare inventory for replenishment purposes.

门户还可以提供有关网络完整性的实时数据。例如,门户可以提供有关被监控设施处的端点装置是在线还是离线的信息。特别地,门户可以追踪和接收来自端点装置的定期更新或心跳。例如,如果集线器没有从端点装置中的一个或多个接收到心跳,则集线器可以通过网络发送消息或警报,以指示特定的端点装置未操作,并且该信息然后可以在门户上查看。这可以帮助人员监控各种设施,并聘请合适的人员对故障端点装置进行诊断和故障排除,并整体地监控系统。Portals can also provide real-time data on network integrity. For example, the portal may provide information about whether endpoint devices at the monitored facility are online or offline. In particular, the portal can track and receive periodic updates or heartbeats from endpoint devices. For example, if the hub does not receive a heartbeat from one or more of the endpoint devices, the hub can send a message or alert over the network to indicate that a particular endpoint device is not operational, and this information can then be viewed on the portal. This can help personnel monitor various facilities and hire the right personnel to diagnose and troubleshoot faulty endpoint devices and monitor the system as a whole.

另外,门户可以基于发生的交易和从端点装置接收到的其他数据来提供购物活动数据。门户还可以提供来自某些设施的关于某些产品类型和某些端点装置的购物数据。例如,门户可以提供信息,以帮助零售商了解某些产品的营销效果。特别地,在商店环境内,在产品位于商店或设施内的多于一个的位置处的情况下,通常很难了解顾客哪儿决定进行购买。端点装置可以提供产品位置信息,使得零售商可以了解哪些位置和/或陈列在诱导购买中是最有效的。Additionally, the portal may provide shopping activity data based on transactions that occurred and other data received from endpoint devices. The portal may also provide shopping data from certain facilities on certain product types and certain endpoint devices. For example, portals can provide information to help retailers understand how marketing certain products are doing. In particular, within a store environment, where a product is located in more than one location within a store or facility, it is often difficult to understand where a customer decides to make a purchase. Endpoint devices can provide product location information so that retailers can understand which locations and/or displays are most effective in inducing purchases.

取决于数据被如何查看,门户上提供的任何数据都可以被聚集和提取。门户软件可以配置提供各种输出,诸如表格、图表或曲线图等以说明这些信息。此外,门户软件可以包括各种搜索能力,用于使零售商通过商店、设施、区域、产品和产品类型、盗窃、定价信息、销售量或特定端点装置/端点装置类型等进行搜索。Any data provided on the portal can be aggregated and extracted, depending on how the data is viewed. Portal software can be configured to provide various outputs such as tables, graphs or graphs to illustrate this information. Additionally, the portal software may include various search capabilities for enabling retailers to search by store, facility, region, product and product type, theft, pricing information, sales volume or specific endpoint device/endpoint device type, and the like.

在网络处接收到的所有信息都可以由适当的人员修改,例如具有适当网络凭证的人员。例如,适当的人员可以修改数据,例如提供到门户39326处的端点装置的显示或定价信息。All information received at the network can be modified by appropriate personnel, such as those with appropriate network credentials. For example, appropriate personnel may modify data such as display or pricing information provided to endpoint devices at portal 39326.

本文的示例可以提供集中式无线商店智能系统,其例如可以被配置为全部都在在一个系统下整合防盗、管理货架库存、提供购物者价格显示和营销消息、提供交互式购物工具,以提供单个数字设施内战略。本文提供的示例可以提供用于在一个位置维护和查看库存数据的机制,并提供用于盗窃减少管理和库存数据的集中式机制。此外,系统提供了一种用于匀质化 (homogenize)数据的方法,因此其可以被大规模地考虑。该系统还可以为用户提供一致的外观和感觉,并提供增强的用户体验。Examples herein may provide a centralized wireless store intelligence system that, for example, may be configured to integrate anti-theft, manage shelf inventory, provide shopper price displays and marketing messages, provide interactive shopping tools, all under one system, to provide a single Digital In-Facility Strategies. The examples provided herein can provide a mechanism for maintaining and viewing inventory data in one location, and provide a centralized mechanism for theft reduction management and inventory data. Furthermore, the system provides a method for homogenizing the data so it can be considered on a large scale. The system can also provide users with a consistent look and feel and provide an enhanced user experience.

虽然在上面讨论的某些示例中,关于诸如集线器和/或服务器之类的某些计算装置讨论了从端点装置收集的各种数据的处理和显示,但是可以设想,可以在网络内的任何计算装置(包括本文没有讨论或描述的任何已知的计算装置)处完成从端点装置收集的各种数据的处理和显示。此外,还可以设想,任何集线器也可以被配置为如本文所讨论的任何端点装置。Although in some of the examples discussed above, the processing and display of various data collected from endpoint devices is discussed with respect to certain computing devices, such as hubs and/or servers, it is contemplated that any computing device within a network may The processing and display of various data collected from endpoint devices is accomplished at the device, including any known computing device not discussed or described herein. Furthermore, it is also contemplated that any hub may also be configured as any endpoint device as discussed herein.

如下面关于图42和43中的示例所讨论的,商品化系统也可以被配置为跨货架的底部、在产品自身上、或跨产品和在货架的底部上的屏幕两者提供连续的标签,以允许向顾客发送动态消息。图42示出了根据本公开的一个或多个说明性方面的用于传达和分发内容的系统的示例框图。在一个示例中,图42的一个或多个部件可以由图27中的计算装置27100和/或图2a -12 中示出的装置中的一个或多个来实施。在这个示例中,示出具有一起操作的多个连续显示货架边缘标签装置的系统4200。在该实例中,存在四个连续显示货架边缘标签装置。然而,如下面所讨论的,可以设想的是,取决于货架和产品的大小,可以使用任何数量的货架边缘标签装置。As discussed below with respect to the examples in Figures 42 and 43, the merchandising system may also be configured to provide continuous labels across the bottom of the shelf, on the product itself, or across both the product and the screen on the bottom of the shelf, to allow dynamic messages to be sent to customers. 42 shows an example block diagram of a system for communicating and distributing content in accordance with one or more illustrative aspects of the present disclosure. In one example, one or more components of Figure 42 may be implemented by computing device 27100 in Figure 27 and/or one or more of the devices shown in Figures 2a-12. In this example, a system 4200 is shown with multiple continuous display shelf edge label devices operating together. In this example, there are four consecutive display shelf edge label devices. However, as discussed below, it is contemplated that any number of shelf edge label devices may be used, depending on the size of the shelf and product.

每个连续显示货架边缘标签装置包括沿着货架4230A-4230D的整个边缘取向的单个显示区域4210A-4210D。此外,在该示例中,货架4230A-B保持产品4260A-4260H,其中4260A-B可以属于第一类型,4260C-D可以属于第二类型,4260E-F可以属于第三类型,等等,或其任何组合。货架4230C-D 保持产品4280A-H,其中4280A-B可以属于第一类型,4280C-D可以属于第二类型,4280E-F可以属于第三类型等等,或其任何组合。产品4260A-4260H 和4280A-H每个分别被封装在包装4250A-4250H和4270A-4270H中。Each continuous display shelf edge label device includes a single display area 4210A-4210D oriented along the entire edge of the shelves 4230A-4230D. Also, in this example, shelves 4230A-B hold products 4260A-4260H, where 4260A-B may be of a first type, 4260C-D may be of a second type, 4260E-F may be of a third type, etc., or any combination. Shelves 4230C-D hold products 4280A-H, where 4280A-B can be of a first type, 4280C-D can be of a second type, 4280E-F can be of a third type, etc., or any combination thereof. Products 4260A-4260H and 4280A-H are each packaged in packages 4250A-4250H and 4270A-4270H, respectively.

在一个示例中,显示器4210A-4210D可以被嵌入到它们相应的货架 4230A-4230D中。货架可以由任何合适的材料形成,并且在一个示例中,货架可以由塑料材料形成。这允许功率通过空中和通过货架发送,以便为包装 4250A-4250H和4270A-4270H提供功率。另外,除了显示器4210A-4210D 之外,塑料货架可以允许电子信号通过并且可以嵌入有其他电子元件。这允许附加的硬件被安装并集成到商品化显示系统中,诸如上面和本文讨论的各种部件。另外,塑料货架也可以形成为轻质的以便于处理,使得更容易清洁、运输、备货或移动,例如如果产品在货架后面丢失等。In one example, displays 4210A-4210D may be embedded in their respective shelves 4230A-4230D. The shelves may be formed of any suitable material, and in one example, the shelves may be formed of a plastic material. This allows power to be sent through the air and through the shelf to power the packages 4250A-4250H and 4270A-4270H. Additionally, in addition to the displays 4210A-4210D, the plastic shelves may allow the passage of electronic signals and may be embedded with other electronic components. This allows additional hardware to be installed and integrated into commercial display systems, such as the various components discussed above and herein. Additionally, plastic shelves can also be formed to be lightweight for ease of handling, making it easier to clean, transport, stock or move, for example if a product is lost behind the shelf, etc.

包装4250A-4250H和4270A-4270H可以包括电子显示屏幕或LED。在一个示例中,电子显示屏幕或LED可以位于包装上或嵌入其中。在其他示例中,包装4250A-4250H和4270A-4270H可以设置有双稳态或电泳显示器以显示任何期望的字符或图像。在某些示例中,包装4250A-4250H和 4270A-4270H可以主要由显示器组成,使得大部分包装表面可以显示任何期望的字符或图像。Packages 4250A-4250H and 4270A-4270H can include electronic display screens or LEDs. In one example, the electronic display screen or LEDs may be on or embedded in the package. In other examples, packages 4250A-4250H and 4270A-4270H may be provided with a bistable or electrophoretic display to display any desired characters or images. In some examples, packages 4250A-4250H and 4270A-4270H may consist primarily of displays, such that most of the package surface may display any desired characters or images.

在一个示例中,单个连续显示器4210A-4210D可以由多个显示器形成。例如,每个单个连续显示器4210A-4210D可以包括两个数字显示器 4220A-H,每一个数字显示器用于待售的每个相应类型的产品。每个显示器 4220A-H可以提供关于用户界面上方的产品类型的信息。例如,显示器可以提供关于产品4260A-B的信息,显示器提供关于产品4260C-D的信息,显示器4220C提供关于产品4260E-F的信息,显示器4220D提供关于产品 4260G-H的信息,显示器4220E提供关于产品4280A-B的信息,显示器4220F 提供关于产品4280C-D的信息,显示器4220G提供产品4280E-F的信息,显示器4220H提供关于产品4280G-H的信息。显示器4210C-4210D也可以显示附加信息,诸如广告和促销。此外,显示器4210C-4210D可以被配置为用户界面,使得例如用户可以根据以上关于图41所讨论的示例在货架边缘处获得附加的交互式产品信息,例如用户界面可以设置有许多不同的视图和可以被选择的产品菜单,或者可以扫描产品以访问其中存储的产品信息。In one example, a single sequential display 4210A-4210D may be formed from multiple displays. For example, each single continuous display 4210A-4210D may include two digital displays 4220A-H, one for each respective type of product for sale. Each display 4220A-H can provide information about the product type above the user interface. For example, displays may provide information on products 4260A-B, displays provide information on products 4260C-D, displays 4220C provide information on products 4260E-F, displays 4220D provide information on products 4260G-H, and displays 4220E provide information on products 4260G-H Information on 4280A-B, Display 4220F provides information on Products 4280C-D, Display 4220G provides information on Products 4280E-F, Display 4220H provides information on Products 4280G-H. Displays 4210C-4210D may also display additional information, such as advertisements and promotions. In addition, displays 4210C-4210D can be configured as a user interface such that, for example, a user can obtain additional interactive product information at the edge of the shelf according to the example discussed above with respect to FIG. 41, such as the user interface can be provided with many different views and can The selected product menu, or the product can be scanned to access the product information stored therein.

连续显示货架边缘标签装置4210A-D可以彼此通信,可以与产品 4260A-H和4280A-H以及对应的包装4250A-H和4270A-H通信。例如,连续显示货架边缘标签装置4210A可以与包装4250A-D通信,连续显示货架边缘标签装置4210B可以与包装4250E-H通信,连续显示货架边缘标签装置4210C可以与包装4270A-D通信,并且连续显示货架边缘标签装置4210D 可以与包装4270E-H通信。虽然示例性地示出为无线通信,但连续显示货架边缘标签装置4210A-D与包装4250A-H和4270A-H之间的传输路径可以是通过网络210或根据关于图39所公开的示例和/或以某种其他方式的有线通信路径。另外,可以通过上面关于图39讨论的网络和集线器39100向连续显示货架边缘标签装置4210A-D和包装4250A-H和4270A-H提供诸如定价信息、产品数据和广告之类的信息。Continuous display shelf edge label devices 4210A-D can communicate with each other, with products 4260A-H and 4280A-H and corresponding packages 4250A-H and 4270A-H. For example, continuous display shelf edge label device 4210A can communicate with packages 4250A-D, continuous display shelf edge label device 4210B can communicate with packages 4250E-H, continuous display shelf edge label device 4210C can communicate with packages 4270A-D, and continuously display Shelf edge label device 4210D may communicate with package 4270E-H. Although illustratively shown as wireless communication, the transmission path between the continuous display shelf edge label devices 4210A-D and the packages 4250A-H and 4270A-H may be through the network 210 or in accordance with the examples disclosed with respect to FIG. 39 and/or Or a wired communication path in some other way. Additionally, information such as pricing information, product data, and advertisements may be provided to the continuous display shelf edge label devices 4210A-D and packages 4250A-H and 4270A-H through the network and hub 39100 discussed above with respect to FIG. 39 .

根据本公开的一个或多个方面,各种连续显示货架边缘标签装置可以一致地操作以向顾客提供附加信息,例如产品信息、定价信息、折扣信息、广告和产品标志。通过将连续显示货架边缘标签装置以并排取向设置(4210A 和4210B或4210C和4210D)、像货架(4210A和4210C或4210B和4210D) 一样在彼此的顶部堆叠,连续显示货架边缘标签装置的阵列可以被配置,其可以被配置为组合在一起显示统一的图像或视频。在图42的说明性示例中,存在四个连续显示货架边缘标签装置,其被布置为2x2、两行和两列连续显示货架边缘标签装置的阵列。然而,可以实现多种附加布置中的任何一种,包括但不限于6×1、4×1、3×4、3×3和4×4配置。In accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure, various continuous display shelf edge label devices may operate in unison to provide customers with additional information, such as product information, pricing information, discount information, advertisements, and product logos. Arrays of continuous display shelf edge label devices can be created by placing the continuous display shelf edge label devices in a side-by-side orientation (4210A and 4210B or 4210C and 4210D), stacked on top of each other like shelves (4210A and 4210C or 4210B and 4210D). Configurations, which can be configured to be grouped together to display a unified image or video. In the illustrative example of Figure 42, there are four consecutive display shelf edge label devices arranged in a 2x2, two rows and two columns array of consecutive display shelf edge label devices. However, any of a variety of additional arrangements may be implemented, including but not limited to 6x1, 4x1, 3x4, 3x3, and 4x4 configurations.

此外,各种连续显示货架边缘标签装置可以与包装4250A-H和4270A-H 一起工作,以向顾客提供附加信息或引起顾客的注意。例如,来自4250A-H 和4270A-H的选择包装可以被点亮以促进选择产品,其中所述点亮可以通过连续显示货架边缘标签装置4210-4210D被协调。此外,互补产品可以使用类似或互补的视觉效果使其包装点亮。在一个示例中,包装4250A-F可以持续点亮;包装4250G-H可以在选定时间间隔期间点亮;当连续显示货架边缘标签装置4210C通过接近传感器检测到顾客的存在时包装4270A-D可以被点亮;当顾客与当被配置为用户界面时的显示器4220A-H中的一个或多个交互时包装4270E-F可以被点亮;当在用户界面处执行产品信息(诸如价格) 的改变时或者当信息如本文讨论的通过网络推出时,包装4270G-H可以被点亮。In addition, a variety of continuous display shelf edge label devices can work with Packages 4250A-H and 4270A-H to provide additional information or draw the customer's attention. For example, selection packages from 4250A-H and 4270A-H can be illuminated to facilitate selection of products, wherein the illumination can be coordinated by continuously displaying shelf edge label devices 4210-4210D. Additionally, complementary products can light up their packaging using similar or complementary visuals. In one example, packages 4250A-F may be lit continuously; packages 4250G-H may be lit during selected time intervals; packages 4270A-D may be continuously displayed when shelf edge label device 4210C detects the presence of a customer through proximity sensors illuminated; packaging 4270E-F may be illuminated when a customer interacts with one or more of displays 4220A-H when configured as a user interface; when a change in product information (such as price) is performed at the user interface The package 4270G-H can be illuminated when or when information is pushed out over the network as discussed herein.

在一个示例中,包装4250A-H和4270A-H中的最前面的包装以及最前的包装的向前面向的表面也可以被确定为使得仅最前面的包装的向前面向的表面正在显示信息。例如,可以确定多个货架的前部和后部,并且从多个包装中确定一组最前面的包装。最前面的包装可以被配置为形成连续显示,并且进一步地,最前面的包装的向前面向的表面可以被配置成显示期望的图像。此外,还可以设想的是,包装的多个表面中的任何一个可以具有包装数字显示器,使得包装可以以任何取向放置在货架上以形成连续显示的一部分。In one example, the frontmost package and the forward facing surface of the frontmost package of packages 4250A-H and 4270A-H may also be determined such that only the forward facing surface of the frontmost package is displaying information. For example, the front and back of a plurality of shelves may be determined, and a set of frontmost packages may be determined from a plurality of packages. The foremost package may be configured to form a continuous display, and further, the forward facing surface of the foremost package may be configured to display a desired image. Additionally, it is also contemplated that any of the multiple surfaces of the package may have a digital display of the package, such that the package may be placed on a shelf in any orientation to form part of a continuous display.

根据本公开的一个或多个方面,各种连续显示货架边缘标签装置4210A 可以与产品4260A-D通信,连续显示货架边缘标签装置4210B可以与产品 4260E-H通信,连续显示货架边缘标签装置4210C可以与产品4280A-D通信,并且连续显示货架边缘标签装置4210D可以与产品4280E-H通信。尽管示例性地示出为无线通信,但连续显示货架边缘标签装置4210A-D和包装4250A-H及4270A-H之间的传输路径可以是根据本文讨论的示例中的任何一个从集线器39100通过网络210的和/或以某种其他方式的有线通信路径。In accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure, various continuous display shelf edge label devices 4210A can communicate with products 4260A-D, continuous display shelf edge label devices 4210B can communicate with products 4260E-H, and continuous display shelf edge label devices 4210C can communicate with products 4260E-H. In communication with products 4280A-D, and continuous display shelf edge label device 4210D can communicate with products 4280E-H. Although illustratively shown as wireless communication, the transmission path between the continuous display shelf edge label devices 4210A-D and the packages 4250A-H and 4270A-H may be from the hub 39100 through the network according to any of the examples discussed herein 210 and/or in some other way a wired communication path.

各种连续显示货架边缘标签装置4210A-D可与产品4260A-H和 4280A-H一起工作,以向顾客提供附加信息或吸引顾客的注意。在一个示例中,连续显示货架边缘标签装置可以向连续显示货架边缘标签装置上方的产品发送触发,触发使得产品通电。在第二示例中,产品4260A-B是电子装置,并且连续显示货架边缘标签装置4210A可以将触发传达到产品4260A-B以使电子装置的显示器通电。当检测到顾客与显示器4220A之间的交互时,或者当连续显示货架边缘标签装置4210A通过接近传感器检测到顾客的存在时,连续显示货架边缘标签装置4210A可以在选定时间间隔传达这样的触发。另外,连续显示货架边缘标签装置4210A-D和产品4260A-H及4280A-H 可以由一个或多个集线器39100或本文所述的网络通电。一旦电子产品 4260A-B的显示器已经响应于来自连续显示货架边缘标签装置4210A的触发被通电,顾客可以能够通过则被配置为用户界面时的显示器4220A与电子产品4260A-B的显示器交互。当被配置为用户界面时,用户可以使用参照图 27提供的任何方法与显示器4220A交互。例如,显示器4220A上的用户输入可以被传送到产品4260A-B的显示器并且镜像在产品4260A-B的显示器上。显示器4220A也可以响应于用户的输入而利用从产品4260A-B接收到的数据来更新,并且该交互可以重复一次或多次。下面参照图44a-d详细讨论这个特征。The various continuous display shelf edge label devices 4210A-D can work with products 4260A-H and 4280A-H to provide additional information or attract the customer's attention. In one example, the continuous display shelf edge label device may send a trigger to the product above the continuous display shelf edge label device, the trigger energizing the product. In a second example, the products 4260A-B are electronic devices, and the continuous display shelf edge label device 4210A can communicate a trigger to the products 4260A-B to power up the display of the electronic device. The continuous display shelf edge label device 4210A may communicate such a trigger at selected time intervals when an interaction between the customer and the display 4220A is detected, or when the continuous display shelf edge label device 4210A detects the presence of a customer through a proximity sensor. Additionally, the continuous display shelf edge label devices 4210A-D and products 4260A-H and 4280A-H may be powered by one or more hubs 39100 or the network described herein. Once the displays of the electronic products 4260A-B have been powered up in response to a trigger from the continuous display shelf edge label device 4210A, the customer may be able to interact with the displays of the electronic products 4260A-B through the display 4220A when configured as a user interface. When configured as a user interface, a user may interact with display 4220A using any of the methods provided with reference to FIG. 27 . For example, user input on display 4220A may be communicated to the displays of products 4260A-B and mirrored on the displays of products 4260A-B. Display 4220A may also be updated with data received from products 4260A-B in response to user input, and this interaction may be repeated one or more times. This feature is discussed in detail below with reference to Figures 44a-d.

图43示出了根据本公开的一个或多个说明性方面的用于传达和分发内容的系统的示例框图。图43中的示例可以具有与以上关于图42所讨论的示例类似的特征和功能。在一个示例中,图43的一个或多个部件可以由图27 中的计算装置100,图2a -12中示出的装置中的一个或多个和/或关于图39 讨论的示例来实施。在这个示例中,示出了单个连续显示货架边缘标签装置 43001。连续显示货架边缘标签装置43001可以设置有任何数量的显示器。在该示例中,连续显示货架标签装置43001可以设置有两个显示器,这两个显示器也可以或不可以被配置为用户界面,并且可以与上面关于图42所讨论的示例类似地配置。显示器43002提供关于产品43006A和43006B的信息,并且还可以显示静态或动态广告43004。例如,显示器43002的背景可以显示代表产品43006A和43006B的制造商的标志。显示器43003可以提供关于产品43007A和43007B的信息。此外,显示器43003的背景可以显示代表产品43007A和43007B的制造商的标志,其中在显示器43003的背景上显示的标志可以不同于在显示器43002的背景上显示的标志。然而,可以设想,显示器43002和43003的背景可以显示附加信息,诸如产品 43006A-B和43007A-B的静态图像或流式视频、促销内容、善意消息、广告或任何相关信息。43 shows an example block diagram of a system for communicating and distributing content in accordance with one or more illustrative aspects of the present disclosure. The example in FIG. 43 may have similar features and functionality as the example discussed above with respect to FIG. 42 . In one example, one or more components of FIG. 43 may be implemented by computing device 100 in FIG. 27 , one or more of the devices shown in FIGS. 2a-12 , and/or the examples discussed with respect to FIG. 39 . In this example, a single continuous display shelf edge label device 43001 is shown. The continuous display shelf edge label device 43001 may be provided with any number of displays. In this example, the continuous display shelf label device 43001 may be provided with two displays, which may or may not also be configured as a user interface, and may be configured similarly to the example discussed above with respect to FIG. 42 . Display 43002 provides information about products 43006A and 43006B, and can also display static or dynamic advertisements 43004. For example, the background of display 43002 may display logos representing the manufacturers of products 43006A and 43006B. Display 43003 can provide information about products 43007A and 43007B. Additionally, the background of display 43003 may display logos representing the manufacturers of products 43007A and 43007B, wherein the logos displayed on the background of display 43003 may be different from the logos displayed on the background of display 43002. However, it is contemplated that the background of displays 43002 and 43003 may display additional information, such as still images or streaming video of products 43006A-B and 43007A-B, promotional content, messages of goodwill, advertisements, or any relevant information.

产品43006A和43006B分别封装在包装43004A和43004B中。包装 43004A和43004B可以各自嵌入有电子显示屏幕或LED。产品43006A和 43006B可以由包装43004A和43004B内的接收器或收发器供电。在一个示例中,连续显示货架边缘标签装置43001可以向产品43006A-B和43007A-B 发送触发,触发使得产品43006A-B和43007A-B的显示器通电。当检测到顾客与显示器43002和43003中的一个或多个之间的交互时,或者当连续显示货架边缘标签装置43001通过接近传感器检测到顾客的存在时,连续显示货架边缘标签装置43001可以在选定时间间隔传达这样的触发。还可以设想的是,可以通过如本文所讨论的集线器39100或网络将内容推出到连续显示货架边缘标签装置43001和产品43006A-B和43007A-B的显示器。此外,本文讨论的集线器39100或网络可以被配置为自动地或者当某些情况发生时 (诸如当在连续显示货架边缘标签装置43001的附近内检测到顾客时),对连续显示货架边缘标签装置43001和产品43006A-B及43007A-B的显示器通电。Products 43006A and 43006B are packaged in packages 43004A and 43004B, respectively. Packages 43004A and 43004B can each be embedded with electronic display screens or LEDs. Products 43006A and 43006B can be powered by receivers or transceivers within packages 43004A and 43004B. In one example, the continuous display shelf edge label device 43001 can send a trigger to products 43006A-B and 43007A-B that powers up the displays of products 43006A-B and 43007A-B. The continuous display shelf edge label device 43001 may select the Such triggers are communicated at regular intervals. It is also envisioned that the content may be pushed out to the display continuously displaying the shelf edge label device 43001 and the products 43006A-B and 43007A-B through the hub 39100 or network as discussed herein. Additionally, the hub 39100 or network discussed herein may be configured to automatically or when certain conditions occur (such as when a customer is detected within the vicinity of the continuous display shelf edge label device 43001) Power up the display of Products 43006A-B and 43007A-B.

一旦通电,产品43006A和43006B的显示器可以通过连续显示货架边缘标签装置43001或网络动态地配置有各种静态或流式消息。在一个示例中,产品43006A的显示器可以显示广告,并且产品43006B的显示器显示代表产品43006A和43006B的制造商的标志。产品43006A和43006B上的显示器可以替代地包括针对顾客的促销内容、季节性问候和/或一般消息。产品 43007A和43007B可以分别由包装43005A-B中的接收器或收发器供电。包装43005A-B各自嵌入有电子显示屏幕或LED。产品43007A和43007B的显示器可以由连续显示货架边缘标签装置43001动态地配置,以显示静态或流式视频或图像,其包括关于产品、制造商、促销内容、问候消息和/或广告 (被示出)的信息。Once powered up, the displays of products 43006A and 43006B can be dynamically configured with various static or streaming messages through the continuous display shelf edge label device 43001 or the network. In one example, the display of product 43006A may display an advertisement, and the display of product 43006B displays logos representing the manufacturers of products 43006A and 43006B. Displays on products 43006A and 43006B may alternatively include promotional content, seasonal greetings, and/or general messages for customers. Products 43007A and 43007B can be powered by the receiver or transceiver in packages 43005A-B, respectively. Packages 43005A-B each embed an electronic display screen or LED. Displays for products 43007A and 43007B can be dynamically configured by continuous display shelf edge label device 43001 to display still or streaming video or images including information about the product, manufacturer, promotional content, greeting messages and/or advertisements (shown). )Information.

此外,产品43006A-B和43007A-B上的显示器可以是交互式的。连续显示货架边缘标签装置43001可以动态配置产品43006A-B和43007A-B的显示器。例如,当检测到顾客的存在时,促销内容可以动态地显示在产品 43006A-B和43007A-B中的一个或多个上。顾客然后可以通过显示器43002 或43003与产品43006A-B和43007A-B中的一个的显示器交互。例如,显示器43002上的用户输入可以被传送到产品43006A的显示器并且被镜像在产品43006A的显示器上。显示器43002然后可以响应于用户的输入而利用从产品43006A接收到的数据来被更新,并且该交互可以重复一次或多次。下面参照图44a-d详细讨论这个特征。Additionally, the displays on products 43006A-B and 43007A-B can be interactive. Continuous Display Shelf Edge Label Device 43001 can dynamically configure the display of Products 43006A-B and 43007A-B. For example, promotional content may be dynamically displayed on one or more of products 43006A-B and 43007A-B when the presence of a customer is detected. The customer can then interact with the display of one of products 43006A-B and 43007A-B through display 43002 or 43003. For example, user input on display 43002 may be communicated to the display of product 43006A and mirrored on the display of product 43006A. Display 43002 can then be updated with data received from product 43006A in response to user input, and the interaction can be repeated one or more times. This feature is discussed in detail below with reference to Figures 44a-d.

产品43006A-B和43007A-B分别封装在包装43004A-B和43005A-B中。包装43004A-B和43005A-B的显示器可以由显示货架边缘标签装置43001 供电。在一个示例中,包装43004A-B和43005A-B的显示器可以通过空中持续供电。通过空中的持续供电可以经由高度谐振的无线功率传输过程来实现。具有特殊驱动电线的线圈可放置在塑料货架单元的基部平台中,该塑料货架单元保持包装43004A-B和43005A-B,并且还容纳显示器货架边缘标签装置43001。可以在每个产品包装43004A-B和43005A-B的壁中放置小而薄的盘绕天线电线。包装43004A-B和43005A-B可以各自经由每个包装中的盘绕的天线电线截获由盘绕的电线无线传输的功率的一部分。然后可以使用截获的功率来操作产品包装上的显示器或LED或产品43006A-B及 43007A-B上的显示器。在第二示例中,连续显示货架边缘标签装置43001可以向包装43004A-B和43005A-B中的一个或多个发送触发,所述触发使得包装43004A-B和43005A-B的显示器通电。当检测到顾客与显示器43002 及13003中的一个或多个之间的交互时,或者当连续显示货架边缘标签装置 43001通过接近传感器检测到顾客的存在时,连续显示货架边缘标签装置 43001可以在选定时间间隔传达这样的触发。Products 43006A-B and 43007A-B are packaged in packages 43004A-B and 43005A-B, respectively. The displays of packages 43004A-B and 43005A-B may be powered by display shelf edge label device 43001. In one example, the displays of packages 43004A-B and 43005A-B can be powered continuously over the air. Continuous power over the air can be achieved via a highly resonant wireless power transfer process. Coils with special drive wires can be placed in the base platform of the plastic shelving unit that holds the packages 43004A-B and 43005A-B and also houses the display shelf edge label device 43001. Small, thin coiled antenna wires may be placed in the walls of each product package 43004A-B and 43005A-B. Packages 43004A-B and 43005A-B can each intercept a portion of the power wirelessly transmitted by the coiled wires via the coiled antenna wires in each package. The intercepted power can then be used to operate displays or LEDs on the product packaging or displays on products 43006A-B and 43007A-B. In a second example, the continuous display shelf edge label device 43001 can send a trigger to one or more of the packages 43004A-B and 43005A-B that powers up the displays of the packages 43004A-B and 43005A-B. The continuous display shelf edge label device 43001 may select the Such triggers are communicated at regular intervals.

一旦通电,包装43004A-B和43005A-B的显示器可以通过连续显示货架边缘标签装置43001来动态地配置有各种静态或流式图像或视频。在一个示例中,包装43004A-B和包装43005A-B可以通过连续显示货架边缘标签装置43001动态地配置,以通过分别显示代表产品43006A-B和43007B的制造商的标志来镜像显示器43002和43003。在另一示例中,包装43004A-B 可由显示货架边缘标签装置43001动态配置,以与标志一起显示与产品 43006A和43006B有关的其他信息(这里,其他信息是价格仅持续“有限时间”)。包装43004A-B和43005A-B可以显示附加或替代信息,诸如包装内的产品的流式视频、相关产品、广告或其任何相关信息。Once powered up, the displays of packages 43004A-B and 43005A-B can be dynamically configured with various still or streaming images or videos by continuously displaying shelf edge label device 43001. In one example, packages 43004A-B and 43005A-B can be dynamically configured by continuously displaying shelf edge label device 43001 to mirror displays 43002 and 43003 by displaying logos representing the manufacturers of products 43006A-B and 43007B, respectively. In another example, packages 43004A-B may be dynamically configured by display shelf edge label device 43001 to display additional information about products 43006A and 43006B along with the logo (here, the additional information is that the price is only for a "limited time"). Packages 43004A-B and 43005A-B may display additional or alternative information, such as streaming video of the product within the package, related products, advertisements, or any related information thereof.

尽管示出了用户界面43002、产品43006A和43006B、包装43004A和 43004B中的每一个的显示器是独立的,但是连续显示货架边缘标签装置 43001可以将前述部件中的一个或多个动态地配置成各自显示标志、产品或任何其他所需的视觉内容的一部分。以这种方式,可以在用户界面43002、产品43006A和43006B、以及包装43004A和43004B的全部或任意组合之间分配更大的显示。例如,包装43005A-B联合地显示产品43007A-B的制造商的标志。代替标志,产品的流式视频也可以跨包装43005A-B而被分配。类似地,可以在显示器43003、产品43007A-B和包装43005A-B的全部或任何组合之间分配更大的显示。在一个示例中,连续显示货架边缘标签装置 43001可以跨显示器43001和43003以及与这些用户界面相对应的产品和包装分配显示。因此,综合的视觉显示将在用户界面43002和43003、产品 43006A-B和43007A-B以及包装43004A-B和43005A-B的全部或任意组合之间被分配,其中每个部件可以同时输出视觉显示的不同部分。Although the displays for each of the user interface 43002, products 43006A and 43006B, and packages 43004A and 43004B are shown as being independent, the continuous display shelf edge label device 43001 may dynamically configure one or more of the foregoing components to each Display part of a logo, product or any other desired visual content. In this manner, a larger display can be distributed among all or any combination of user interface 43002, products 43006A and 43006B, and packages 43004A and 43004B. For example, packages 43005A-B collectively display the logo of the manufacturer of products 43007A-B. In lieu of the logo, streaming video of the product can also be distributed across packages 43005A-B. Similarly, larger displays can be distributed among all or any combination of Display 43003, Products 43007A-B, and Packages 43005A-B. In one example, a continuous display shelf edge label device 43001 may be displayed across displays 43001 and 43003 and the product and package distribution corresponding to these user interfaces. Thus, a combined visual display would be distributed among all or any combination of user interfaces 43002 and 43003, products 43006A-B and 43007A-B, and packages 43004A-B and 43005A-B, where each component can simultaneously output a visual display different parts of.

连续显示货架边缘标签装置43001还可以与一个或多个附加的连续显示货架边缘标签装置动态地协调,以创建横跨多个连续显示货架边缘标签装置的用户界面、产品和包装的动态显示。因此,产品的静态图像或流式视频,制造商的标志或任何相关内容将在多个连续的货架边缘标签装置之间分配以及对应于每个连续的货架边缘标签装置的一个或多个用户界面,一个或多个产品和一个或多个包装之间分配。The continuous display shelf edge label device 43001 can also dynamically coordinate with one or more additional continuous display shelf edge label devices to create a dynamic display of the user interface, product, and packaging across multiple continuous display shelf edge label devices. Thus, a still image or streaming video of the product, the manufacturer's logo or any related content will be distributed among multiple successive shelf edge label devices and one or more user interfaces corresponding to each successive shelf edge label device , distributed between one or more products and one or more packages.

在一个示例中,连续显示器货架边缘标签43001或靠近连续显示器货架边缘标签43001放置的其它传感器可以通过接近度传感器来检测顾客的存在。连续显示货架边缘标签43001然后可以向包装43004A-B以及相邻或周围的连续显示货架边缘标签发送触发。相邻和/或周围的连续显示货架边缘标签然后可以将激活触发发送到其对应的包装。连续显示货架边缘标签43001 然后可以在其自身中和周围的连续显示货架边缘标签中分配流式视频。每个连续显示货架边缘标签可以进一步细分其包装之间的分配的视频。或者,连续显示货架边缘标签43001可以控制在所有周围连续显示货架边缘标签及其对应的包装中分配。In one example, the continuous display shelf edge label 43001 or other sensors placed near the continuous display shelf edge label 43001 can detect the presence of a customer through a proximity sensor. Continuous display shelf edge labels 43001 may then send triggers to packages 43004A-B and adjacent or surrounding continuous display shelf edge labels. Adjacent and/or surrounding continuous display shelf edge labels may then send activation triggers to their corresponding packages. The Continuous Display Shelf Edge Label 43001 can then distribute streaming video in the Continuous Display Shelf Edge Label in and around itself. Each successive video showing shelf edge labeling can be further broken down into its distribution between packs. Alternatively, the continuous display shelf edge label 43001 can control the distribution among all surrounding continuous display shelf edge labels and their corresponding packages.

由包装和货架边缘显示器形成的显示或连续显示允许在零售环境中动态调整所需消息的大小。例如,当货架图(planogram)改变时,货架边缘标签的尺寸可以改变。此外,各种显示器或者可以形成为一个大屏幕以显示一个连续消息,或者可以分成各种屏幕以显示各种消息。另外,由包装和货架边缘显示器形成的显示或连续显示可以由零售商通过向产品的分销商出租空间而被支付。Displays or continuous displays formed by package and shelf edge displays allow dynamic resizing of desired messages in retail environments. For example, when the planogram changes, the dimensions of the shelf edge labels can change. In addition, various displays may either be formed into one large screen to display one continuous message, or may be divided into various screens to display various messages. In addition, the display or continuous display formed by the packaging and shelf edge displays may be paid by the retailer by renting space to the distributor of the product.

连续显示货架边缘标签可以进一步与软件应用程序集成。例如,用户可以在诸如蜂窝装置的移动装置上下载和安装软件应用程序。软件应用程序可以与一个或多个零售商相关联,并且用户可以使用软件应用程序为用户希望购买或查看的一个或多个物品编目录。例如,软件应用程序可以与杂货店相关联,并且用户可以使用软件应用程序来存储杂货清单。软件应用程序可以另外或替代地与电子零售商相关联,并且用户可以使用软件应用程序来存储用户想要分析的电子装置的列表。Continuous display of shelf edge labels can be further integrated with software applications. For example, a user may download and install software applications on mobile devices, such as cellular devices. A software application may be associated with one or more retailers, and a user may use the software application to catalog one or more items that the user wishes to purchase or view. For example, a software application may be associated with a grocery store, and a user may use the software application to store a grocery list. A software application may additionally or alternatively be associated with the electronic retailer, and a user may use the software application to store a list of electronic devices that the user wishes to analyze.

用户可以在进入指定场所(诸如杂货店或电子器件零售商)时启动软件应用程序。软件应用程序可以扫描购物清单,并确定与遍布商店而被设置的连续显示货架边缘标签装置相关的购物清单上的每个物品的位置。这种信息可以替代地在由用户作出的初始列表输入时(即在用户在杂货店中启动软件应用程序之前)由软件应用程序存储。然后,软件应用程序可以建立与一个或多个连续显示货架边缘标签装置的无线通信,无线通信在用户靠近物品时将该一个或多个物品保持在购物清单上。The user may launch the software application upon entering a designated location, such as a grocery store or electronics retailer. The software application can scan the shopping list and determine the location of each item on the shopping list in relation to continuous display shelf edge labeling devices placed throughout the store. Such information may instead be stored by the software application upon initial listing entry made by the user (ie, before the user launches the software application in the grocery store). The software application can then establish wireless communication with the one or more continuous display shelf edge label devices that keep the one or more items on the shopping list as the user approaches the item.

例如,软件应用程序可以确定用户列表上的第一物品位于第一通道中,位于容纳第一连续显示货架边缘标签装置的第一塑料货架上。软件应用程序可以追踪用户在商店内的位置并检测用户何时进入第一通道。然后,软件应用程序可以建立到第一连续显示货架边缘标签装置的无线连接。当用户进入第一通道时,软件应用程序可以向第一连续显示货架边缘标签装置发送信号。然后,第一连续显示货架边缘标签装置可利用连续显示货架边缘标签装置本身、周围连续显示货架边缘标签装置、连续显示货架边缘标签装置上的一个或多个包装和/或产品显示器、和/或周围连续显示货架边缘标签装置上的一个或多个包装和/或产品显示器启动预定显示。例如,连续显示货架边缘标签43001可以利用追光效果来将用户引导到产品43006A。这可包括显示各种图形消息或图像,诸如箭头,以帮助将用户引导到列表上的第一物品。另外,封装与用户列表上的第一物品匹配的物品的包装可以被激活,从而引起用户的注意。替代地或另外,连续显示货架边缘标签可以被设置有扬声器,其可以通过声音警报来警报用户以将用户引导到列表上的物品。For example, the software application may determine that the first item on the user's list is located in the first aisle, on the first plastic shelf housing the first continuous display shelf edge label device. The software application can track the user's location within the store and detect when the user enters the first aisle. The software application can then establish a wireless connection to the first continuous display shelf edge label device. When the user enters the first aisle, the software application may send a signal to the first continuous display shelf edge label device. The first continuous display shelf edge label device may then utilize the continuous display shelf edge label device itself, the surrounding continuous display shelf edge label device, one or more package and/or product displays on the continuous display shelf edge label device, and/or Surrounding continuous display of one or more package and/or product displays on the shelf edge label device initiates a predetermined display. For example, continuous display of shelf edge label 43001 can utilize a chase light effect to guide the user to product 43006A. This may include displaying various graphical messages or images, such as arrows, to help guide the user to the first item on the list. Additionally, packaging that encloses items that match the first item on the user's list may be activated to draw the user's attention. Alternatively or additionally, the continuous display shelf edge label may be provided with a speaker which may alert the user with an audible alarm to direct the user to the item on the listing.

当检测到用户进入第一通道时,第一连续显示货架边缘标签装置可以启动综合的视觉显示。这种综合的视觉显示将被分配在用户界面43002和 43003、产品43006A-B和43007A-B以及包装43004A-B和43005A-B的全部或任何组合之间,其中每个部件可以同时输出视觉显示的不同的部分。互补物品的包装也可以以协调的方式被激活。例如,零售商可以使用协调显示器来基于零售商的偏好向上销售或交叉销售不同的产品(诸如,将用户引导到代替用户列表上的品牌名称物品的零售商的通用品牌)。The first continuous display shelf edge label device may initiate an integrated visual display when a user entering the first aisle is detected. This integrated visual display will be distributed between all or any combination of user interfaces 43002 and 43003, products 43006A-B and 43007A-B, and packages 43004A-B and 43005A-B, where each component can output a visual display simultaneously different parts. The packaging of complementary items can also be activated in a coordinated manner. For example, a retailer may use a coordinating display to up-sell or cross-sell different products based on the retailer's preferences (such as directing a user to the retailer's generic brand in place of a brand name item on the user's listing).

当用户穿过不同的通道时,软件应用程序可以继续跟踪用户在商店内的位置。当用户进入通道时,软件应用程序可以交叉引用用户列表上的物品和存储在通道中的物品。如果用户列表上的一个或多个物品或与用户列表上的物品互补的任何物品被存储在用户的当前通道中,则软件应用程序可以建立与用户当前通道中的一个或多个连续显示货架边缘标签装置的无线通信,并且可以启用适当的显示,将用户引导到列表上的物品或互补物品。互补物品可以是通常一起购买的物品。例如,如果用户的购物清单表明用户将要购买花生酱,则视觉显示可以将用户的注意力吸引到保持面包的货架。互补物品也可以是类似的物品,零售商的自家品牌物品、零售商试图向上销售的物品等等。As the user moves through the different aisles, the software application can continue to track the user's location within the store. When a user enters an aisle, the software application can cross-reference items on the user's list with items stored in the aisle. If one or more items on the user's list, or any items complementary to those on the user's list, are stored in the user's current aisle, the software application may establish a continuous display shelf edge with one or more of the user's current aisle The wireless communication of the tag device and the appropriate display can be enabled to direct the user to the item on the list or a complementary item. Complementary items can be items that are usually purchased together. For example, if a user's shopping list indicates that the user is about to buy peanut butter, a visual display can draw the user's attention to the shelf holding the bread. Complementary items can also be similar items, a retailer's house brand item, an item the retailer is trying to upsell, and so on.

图44a-d例示了电子产品的屏幕的示例性状态以及连续显示货架边缘标签内的用户界面的显示。连续显示货架边缘标签装置44001的一部分已被配置为用户界面44002a。连续显示货架边缘标签装置44001可以与产品44003 一致地工作以向顾客提供附加的信息或吸引顾客的注意。在图44a-d中,仅示出了一个示例性的连续显示货架边缘标签装置44001和一个产品44003。然而,任何数量的连续显示货架边缘标签和产品可以被配置为如本文所述地交互。Figures 44a-d illustrate exemplary states of a screen of an electronic product and display of a user interface within a shelf edge label continuously displayed. A portion of the continuous display shelf edge label device 44001 has been configured as a user interface 44002a. The continuous display shelf edge label device 44001 can work in unison with the product 44003 to provide additional information to the customer or to attract the customer's attention. In Figures 44a-d, only one exemplary continuous display shelf edge label device 44001 and one product 44003 are shown. However, any number of continuously displayed shelf edge labels and products may be configured to interact as described herein.

在一个示例中,产品44003是具有数字显示屏幕的电子装置。连续显示货架边缘标签装置44001可以将触发传达到产品44003以对电子装置44003 的显示器44004a通电。替代地,电子装置44003的显示器44004a可以保持被一直地或持续供电。当检测到顾客与连续显示货架边缘标签装置44001之间的交互时,或者当连续显示货架边缘标签装置44001通过接近传感器检测到顾客的存在时,连续显示货架边缘标签装置44001可以在选定时间间隔传达这样的触发。替代地,产品44003可以由如本文所讨论的一个或多个集线器39100或网络供电。In one example, Product 44003 is an electronic device with a digital display screen. Continuous display shelf edge label device 44001 may communicate a trigger to product 44003 to power up display 44004a of electronic device 44003. Alternatively, the display 44004a of the electronic device 44003 may remain powered all the time or continuously. The continuous display shelf edge label device 44001 may be available at selected time intervals when an interaction between a customer and the continuous display shelf edge label device 44001 is detected, or when the continuous display shelf edge label device 44001 detects the presence of a customer through a proximity sensor Communicate such triggers. Alternatively, Product 44003 may be powered by one or more Hubs 39100 or the network as discussed herein.

连续显示货架边缘标签装置44001除了向电子产品44003发送触发之外,还可以将连续显示货架边缘标签装置44001的显示器的至少一部分配置为用户界面44002a。一旦电子产品44003的显示器44004a已经响应于来自连续显示货架边缘标签装置44001(或者一个或多个集线器39100或网络) 的触发而被通电,则显示器44004a可以显示默认屏幕。该默认屏幕也可以在用户界面44002a上被复制。默认屏幕可以包括图标,当用户选择该图标时,该图标显示主菜单屏幕。默认屏幕可以另外地或者替代地包括广告、其他促销内容或者关于电子产品44003的信息。顾客然后可以通过用户界面 44002a与电子产品44003的显示器44004a交互(例如,使用参考图27提供的任何方法)。In addition to sending a trigger to the electronic product 44003, the continuous display shelf edge label device 44001 may also configure at least a portion of the display of the continuous display shelf edge label device 44001 as a user interface 44002a. Once the display 44004a of the electronic product 44003 has been powered up in response to a trigger from the continuous display shelf edge label device 44001 (or one or more of the hubs 39100 or the network), the display 44004a may display a default screen. This default screen can also be replicated on user interface 44002a. The default screen may include an icon that, when selected by the user, displays the main menu screen. The default screen may additionally or alternatively include advertisements, other promotional content, or information about the electronic product 44003. The customer may then interact with the display 44004a of the electronic product 44003 through the user interface 44002a (eg, using any of the methods provided with reference to Figure 27).

如果用户通过用户界面44002a选择显示在默认主屏幕上的图标,则可以将选择从连续显示货架边缘标签装置44001传送到电子产品44003。电子产品44003的显示屏幕44004a然后可以响应于用户选择而转换到显示屏幕 44004b,显示屏幕44004b显示主菜单屏幕。电子产品44003然后可以将用于显示主菜单屏幕所需的数据传送到用户界面44002a。替代地,该数据可以已经存储在连续显示货架边缘标签装置44001中。响应于接收到数据,用户界面44002a中的显示然后可以转换到用户界面44002b中的显示。用户界面 44002b现在通过显示与电子显示器44004b相同的主菜单屏幕来镜像产品 44003的显示屏幕44004b。用户然后可以通过用户界面44002b从主屏幕菜单(当前显示在产品44003的显示屏幕44004b和用户界面44002b中的显示上)选择物品。用户的选择可以从用户界面44002b传送到电子产品44003。响应于接收到用户的选择,产品44003上的电子显示器44004b可以转换到电子显示器44004c。电子显示器44004c显示与用户通过用户界面44002b选择的物品相关联的图形。然后可以将与所选物品相关联的图形的显示所需的数据从电子产品44003发送到用户界面44002b。数据可以经由连续显示货架边缘标签装置44001传送。响应于接收到数据,用户界面44002b上的显示然后可以转变到用户界面44002c上显示的显示。用户界面44002c现在通过显示与所选物品相关联的图形来镜像电子显示器44004c。这种类型的交互可以继续,直到由用户终止。If the user selects an icon displayed on the default home screen through the user interface 44002a, the selection may be communicated from the continuous display shelf edge label device 44001 to the electronic product 44003. Display screen 44004a of electronic product 44003 may then transition to display screen 44004b, which displays the main menu screen, in response to the user selection. The electronics 44003 may then transmit the data required for displaying the main menu screen to the user interface 44002a. Alternatively, this data may already be stored in the continuous display shelf edge label device 44001. In response to receiving the data, display in user interface 44002a may then transition to display in user interface 44002b. The user interface 44002b now mirrors the display screen 44004b of the product 44003 by showing the same main menu screen as the electronic display 44004b. The user can then select an item from the home screen menu (currently displayed on display screen 44004b of product 44003 and the display in user interface 44002b) through user interface 44002b. The user's selection may be communicated to the electronic product 44003 from the user interface 44002b. In response to receiving the user's selection, electronic display 44004b on product 44003 may switch to electronic display 44004c. Electronic display 44004c displays graphics associated with the item selected by the user through user interface 44002b. The data required for the display of the graphics associated with the selected item can then be sent from the electronic product 44003 to the user interface 44002b. Data may be communicated via the continuous display shelf edge label device 44001. In response to receiving the data, the display on user interface 44002b may then transition to the display displayed on user interface 44002c. User interface 44002c now mirrors electronic display 44004c by displaying graphics associated with the selected item. This type of interaction can continue until terminated by the user.

在一个方面中,本公开包括陈列管理系统,该陈列管理系统具有可以被配置为响应于从陈列管理系统移除产品而移动的机构。陈列管理系统可以另外具有响应于机构的移动而输出运动数据的传感器。此外,陈列管理系统可以具有控制电路,该控制电路接收运动数据,并且如果运动数据超过阈值,则将运动数据传达给远程处理器。此外,陈列管理系统可以具有包括计算机可执行指令的非暂时性计算机可读介质,所述计算机可执行指令可以由远程处理器执行以从运动数据计算机构的当前位置,并且基于机构的位置计算从陈列管理系统移除的产品的数量。In one aspect, the present disclosure includes an exhibit management system having a mechanism that can be configured to move in response to removal of a product from the exhibit management system. The display management system may additionally have sensors that output motion data in response to movement of the mechanism. Additionally, the display management system may have control circuitry that receives motion data and communicates the motion data to a remote processor if the motion data exceeds a threshold. Additionally, the display management system may have a non-transitory computer-readable medium comprising computer-executable instructions executable by a remote processor to calculate the current location of the facility from the athletic data, and based on the facility's location to calculate the The number of products removed by the display management system.

在另一方面,本公开包括陈列管理系统,该陈列管理系统可以具有被配置为响应于从陈列管理系统移除产品而移动的机构。陈列管理系统可以进一步具有响应于机构的移动而输出运动数据的传感器。另外,陈列管理系统可以具有将运动数据传送到远程处理器的发射器电路,以及包括计算机可执行指令的非暂时性计算机可读介质,所述计算机可执行指令可由远程处理器执行,以计算机构的当前位置并计算产品移除模式。In another aspect, the present disclosure includes an exhibit management system that may have a mechanism configured to move in response to removal of a product from the exhibit management system. The display management system may further have sensors that output motion data in response to movement of the mechanism. Additionally, the display management system may have transmitter circuitry that communicates motion data to a remote processor, and a non-transitory computer-readable medium including computer-executable instructions executable by the remote processor to compute the mechanism current position and calculate the product removal pattern.

在又一个方面中,本公开包括非暂时性计算机可读介质,其包括计算机可执行指令,所述计算机可执行指令在由处理器执行时可以被配置为从与一个或多个陈列管理系统相关联的传感器接收传感器数据。另外,传感器数据可以用于计算从一个或多个陈列管理系统移除的产品的数量,并且可以用于基于从陈列管理系统移除的产品的数量来检测产品移除模式。In yet another aspect, the present disclosure includes non-transitory computer-readable media comprising computer-executable instructions that, when executed by a processor, can be configured to The connected sensor receives sensor data. Additionally, sensor data may be used to calculate the number of products removed from one or more display management systems, and may be used to detect product removal patterns based on the number of products removed from the display management system.

在另一方面中,提供了用于沿着零售商的货架边缘提供信息的方法和设备。在配置成沿着零售商的货架的边缘取向的显示器上,设置包括关于货架上的第一产品的第一信息的第一用户界面。在显示器上设置至少一个第二用户界面,该第二用户界面包括关于货架上的至少一个第二产品的至少一个第二信息。允许个人编辑第一用户界面和/或至少一个第二用户界面的参数。该参数可以包括以下中的至少一个:显示器上的用户界面的大小、显示器上的用户界面的形状、以及用户界面在显示器上的位置。第一信息和至少一个第二信息可以同时输出到显示器。In another aspect, methods and apparatus are provided for providing information along a retailer's shelf edge. On a display configured to be oriented along an edge of the retailer's shelf, a first user interface is provided that includes first information about a first product on the shelf. At least one second user interface is provided on the display, the second user interface including at least one second information about at least one second product on the shelf. A person is allowed to edit parameters of the first user interface and/or the at least one second user interface. The parameter may include at least one of: the size of the user interface on the display, the shape of the user interface on the display, and the location of the user interface on the display. The first information and the at least one second information may be simultaneously output to the display.

在一个示例中,系统可以包括与被配置为陈列产品的产品货架相关联的多个端点装置,以及每个定位为与所述多个端点装置中的一个或多个邻近的多个集线器。所述多个端点装置中的一个或多个端点装置可以被配置为检测库存信息并将库存信息传送到多个集线器中的预定邻近集线器,并且所述多个端点装置中的一个或多个端点装置可以被配置为接收并且显示来自多个集线器中的预定集线器的价格信息或产品信息。所述多个集线器可以各自被配置为执行以下中的一个或多个,从所述多个端点装置中的一个或多个端点装置接收库存信息,取决于所接收到的库存信息提供一个或多个警报,将库存信息传送到网络,接收价格信息和产品信息,以及将价格信息和产品信息传送到所述多个端点装置中的一个或多个端点装置,经由低能量传输协议与所述多个端点装置进行通信,并且在一个示例中,低能量传输协议可以是蓝牙、低功耗蓝牙或ISM中的一种或多种。In one example, a system may include a plurality of endpoint devices associated with product shelves configured to display products, and a plurality of hubs each positioned adjacent to one or more of the plurality of endpoint devices. One or more of the plurality of end-point devices may be configured to detect inventory information and communicate the inventory information to a predetermined adjacent hub of the plurality of hubs, and one or more of the plurality of end-point devices The device may be configured to receive and display price information or product information from a predetermined one of the plurality of hubs. The plurality of hubs may each be configured to perform one or more of the following, receiving inventory information from one or more of the plurality of endpoint devices, providing one or more depending on the received inventory information: alerts, communicate inventory information to the network, receive price information and product information, and communicate price information and product information to one or more of the plurality of end-point devices, communicate with the plurality of end-point devices via a low energy transmission protocol two endpoint devices, and in one example, the low energy transport protocol may be one or more of Bluetooth, Bluetooth Low Energy, or ISM.

端点装置可以包括以下中一个或多个:产品门传感器,挂钩安保传感器,库存测量推动器传感器,电子货架标签显示器、或交互式触摸屏显示器。端点装置中的一个或多个被配置为向所述多个集线器中的预定的一个集线器发送指示状态的周期性传送。端点装置中的一个或多个可以包括产品推动器并且可以被配置为检测产品推动器的位置。Endpoint devices may include one or more of the following: product door sensors, hook security sensors, inventory measurement pusher sensors, electronic shelf label displays, or interactive touch screen displays. One or more of the endpoint devices are configured to send periodic transmissions indicating status to a predetermined one of the plurality of hubs. One or more of the endpoint devices may include a product pusher and may be configured to detect the position of the product pusher.

多个集线器可以被配置为基于从一个或多个端点装置接收到的库存信息来计算产品的数量。由多个集线器计算出的产品的数量可以由网络接收,并且网络可以计算设施中的产品的数量。多个集线器可以被配置成在检测到产品从产品货架移位的预定速率的情况下传送消息、音频或视觉指示器中的一个或多个。多个集线器可以被配置为在检测到产品预定水平的情况下传送消息、音频或视觉指示器中的一个或多个。多个集线器可以被配置为聚集和累积库存信息并将库存信息传输到网络。多个集线器可以被配置为监控端点装置并报告端点装置的状态。多个集线器中的至少一个可以被配置为追踪端点装置中的一个或多个端点装置的位置,并且多个集线器中的至少一个可以被配置为基于端点装置中的一个或多个端点装置的位置改变来检测盗窃的可能发生、或基于端点装置中的一个或多个端点装置的位置计算库存水平。多个集线器可以各自包括一系列指示灯,其被配置为当预定条件发生时照亮。多个集线器可以被配置为更新端点装置的软件或操作系统。多个集线器可以被配置为在预定的时间将选择的信息发送到端点装置。The plurality of hubs may be configured to calculate the quantity of products based on inventory information received from one or more endpoint devices. The number of products calculated by the plurality of hubs can be received by the network, and the network can calculate the number of products in the facility. The plurality of hubs may be configured to transmit one or more of a message, audio or visual indicator upon detection of a predetermined rate of product displacement from the product shelf. The plurality of hubs may be configured to transmit one or more of a message, audio or visual indicator upon detection of a predetermined level of product. Multiple hubs can be configured to aggregate and accumulate inventory information and transmit inventory information to the network. Multiple hubs can be configured to monitor endpoint devices and report the status of endpoint devices. At least one of the plurality of hubs can be configured to track the location of one or more of the endpoint devices, and at least one of the plurality of hubs can be configured to be based on the location of the one or more of the endpoint devices Changes are made to detect the possibility of theft, or to calculate inventory levels based on the location of one or more of the endpoint devices. The plurality of hubs may each include a series of indicator lights configured to illuminate when predetermined conditions occur. Multiple hubs can be configured to update the software or operating system of the endpoint devices. The plurality of hubs may be configured to transmit selected information to the endpoint devices at predetermined times.

还可以设置用于查看从多个端点装置中的一个或多个端点装置接收到的库存信息并用于修改传送到所述一个或多个端点装置的价格信息和产品信息的门户。网络可以被配置为接收库存信息,并且网络可以被配置为基于从所述多个端点装置中的一个或多个接收到的库存信息来请求额外的库存。网络可以被配置为一旦库存水平达到预定值则接收库存信息并发送通知。A portal may also be provided for viewing inventory information received from one or more of the plurality of endpoint devices and for modifying price and product information communicated to the one or more endpoint devices. The network may be configured to receive inventory information, and the network may be configured to request additional inventory based on the inventory information received from one or more of the plurality of endpoint devices. The network may be configured to receive inventory information and send notifications once the inventory level reaches a predetermined value.

在另一个示例中,一种方法可以包括以下中的一个或多个:提供与被配置为陈列产品的产品货架相关联的多个端点装置;提供多个集线器,并将所述多个集线器中的每个定位成与所述多个端点装置的一个或多个邻近;将所述多个端点装置中的一个或多个配置为传送库存信息到所述多个集线器中的预定邻近集线器,或配置为从所述多个集线器中的预定集线器接收价格或产品信息;将所述多个集线器中的每个配置为接收来自于所述多个端点装置中的一个或多个的库存信息,配置为将库存信息传送到网络,配置为基于所接收到的库存信息计算产品的数量将产品的数量传送到网络,并配置为经由低能量传输协议与所述多个端点装置通信;将网络配置为接收信息和传送信息到所述多个集线器,并且配置为计算设施内的产品的总数量,并且将网络配置为接收价格信息并且将价格信息传送到所述多个端点装置中的一个或多个。In another example, a method may include one or more of: providing a plurality of endpoint devices associated with product shelves configured to display products; providing a plurality of hubs, and placing the plurality of hubs in each of the plurality of endpoint devices is positioned adjacent to one or more of the plurality of endpoint devices; configuring one or more of the plurality of endpoint devices to transmit inventory information to a predetermined adjacent hub of the plurality of hubs, or configured to receive price or product information from a predetermined one of the plurality of hubs; configuring each of the plurality of hubs to receive inventory information from one or more of the plurality of endpoint devices, configuring for communicating the inventory information to the network, being configured to calculate the quantity of the product based on the received inventory information, communicating the quantity of the product to the network, and being configured to communicate with the plurality of endpoint devices via a low energy transfer protocol; the network is configured to receiving information and transmitting information to the plurality of hubs and configured to calculate the total number of products within the facility, and configuring the network to receive price information and transmit the price information to one or more of the plurality of endpoint devices .

另外,该方法还可以包括将端点装置中的一个或多个配置为以下中的一个或多个:产品门传感器,挂钩安保传感器,库存测量推动器传感器,电子货架标签显示器和触摸屏显示器,将端点装置中的一个或多个配置为向多个集线器中的预定的一个集线器发送周期性传送,指示状态。端点装置中的一个或多个可以包括产品推动器,并且该方法可以包括检测产品推动器的位置。Additionally, the method may include configuring one or more of the endpoint devices as one or more of: product door sensors, hook security sensors, inventory measurement pusher sensors, electronic shelf label displays, and touch screen displays, the endpoint One or more of the devices are configured to send periodic transmissions to a predetermined one of the plurality of hubs, indicating the status. One or more of the endpoint devices may include a product pusher, and the method may include detecting the position of the product pusher.

方法还可以包括以下中的一个或多个:将所述多个集线器配置为,在检测产品正从产品货架移位的预定速率的情况下传送消息、音频或视觉指示器中的一个或多个,以聚集和积累库存信息并传输库存信息;将低能量传输协议配置为蓝牙、蓝牙低功耗或ISM中的一个或多个;将所述多个集线器配置为监控端点装置并报告端点装置的状态;将所述多个集线器中的至少一个配置为追踪端点装置中的一个或多个的位置;将所述多个集线器中的至少一个配置为,基于端点装置中的一个或多个的位置改变检测盗窃的可能发生,或基于端点装置中的一个或多个的位置而计算库存水平;为所述多个集线器中的每个设置被配置为在预定状况发生时照亮的一系列指示器灯;将集线器配置为更新端点装置的软件或操作系统;将所述多个集线器配置为更新端点装置的软件或操作系统;和将所述多个集线器配置为在预定时间将选择的信息发送到端点装置。The method may also include one or more of configuring the plurality of hubs to transmit one or more of a message, audio, or visual indicator upon detecting a predetermined rate at which the product is being displaced from the product shelf , to aggregate and accumulate inventory information and transmit inventory information; configure the low-energy transport protocol as one or more of Bluetooth, Bluetooth Low Energy, or ISM; configure the plurality of hubs to monitor endpoint devices and report a state; configuring at least one of the plurality of hubs to track the location of one or more of the endpoint devices; configuring at least one of the plurality of hubs to, based on the location of the one or more of the endpoint devices Changes to detect the possibility of theft, or calculate inventory levels based on the location of one or more of the endpoint devices; provide for each of the plurality of hubs a series of indicators configured to illuminate when a predetermined condition occurs configuring the hub to update the software or operating system of the endpoint device; configuring the plurality of hubs to update the software or operating system of the endpoint device; and configuring the plurality of hubs to send selected information to endpoint device.

方法还可以包括:设置用于查看从所述多个端点装置中的一个或多个接收到的库存信息或用于修改传送到所述一个或多个端点装置的价格信息和产品信息的门户;将网路配置为接收库存信息,并将网络设置为基于从所述多个端点装置中的一个或多个接收到的库存信息请求额外的库存;将网络配置为接收库存信息,并一旦库存水平已经达到预定值则发送通知。The method may further include: providing a portal for viewing inventory information received from one or more of the plurality of endpoint devices or for modifying price and product information communicated to the one or more endpoint devices; configuring the network to receive inventory information, and configuring the network to request additional inventory based on the inventory information received from one or more of the plurality of endpoint devices; configuring the network to receive the inventory information, and once the inventory level A notification is sent when a predetermined value has been reached.

另一示例方法可以包括以下中的一个或多个:配置网络,用于接收信息并传送信息到多个集线器;将端点装置中的一个或多个配置为传送库存信息到所述多个集线器中的预定邻近集线器或从所述多个集线器中的预定集线器接收价格或产品信息;将所述多个集线器中的每个配置为从多个端点装置中的一个或多个接收库存信息,将库存信息传送到网络,基于所接收到的库存信息计算产品的数量,将产品数量传送到网络,接收价格信息并将价格信息传送到所述多个端点装置中的一个或多个;和经由低能量传输协议与所述多个端点装置通信。Another example method may include one or more of: configuring a network to receive and transmit information to a plurality of hubs; configuring one or more of the endpoint devices to transmit inventory information to the plurality of hubs a predetermined proximity hub of the plurality of hubs or to receive price or product information from a predetermined hub of the plurality of hubs; each of the plurality of hubs is configured to receive inventory information from one or more of the plurality of end point devices, the inventory communicating information to the network, calculating the quantity of the product based on the received inventory information, communicating the quantity of the product to the network, receiving price information and communicating the price information to one or more of the plurality of endpoint devices; and via the low energy A transport protocol communicates with the plurality of endpoint devices.

在一个方面中,可以设置用于在沿产品货架定位的一个或多个电子标签装置和存储在产品货架上的多个包装之间形成连续显示的系统,其中多个包装包括嵌入式显示器。电子标签装置可以被配置为接收流式视频并且在所述一个或多个电子标签装置和所述多个包装之间分配流式视频。所述一个或多个电子标签装置可以向所述多个包装发送激活触发。当一个或多个电子标签装置通过接近传感器检测到用户的存在时,可以发送激活触发。所述多个包装可以各自封装产品,并且产品可以包括显示屏幕。所述一个或多个电子标签装置可以将激活触发发送到所述多个包装中的每一个包装的产品的显示屏幕。当用户与所述一个或多个电子标签装置交互时,可以发送对所述多个包装中的一个或多个包装的产品的显示屏幕的激活触发。用户可以通过一个或多个电子标签装置与产品的显示屏幕交互。In one aspect, a system may be provided for forming a continuous display between one or more electronic label devices positioned along a product shelf and a plurality of packages stored on the product shelf, wherein the plurality of packages include embedded displays. The electronic tag device may be configured to receive streaming video and distribute the streaming video between the one or more electronic tag devices and the plurality of packages. The one or more electronic label devices may send activation triggers to the plurality of packages. An activation trigger may be sent when one or more of the electronic tag devices detect the presence of a user via a proximity sensor. The plurality of packages may each enclose a product, and the product may include a display screen. The one or more electronic tag devices may send an activation trigger to a display screen of the packaged product in each of the plurality of packages. When a user interacts with the one or more electronic tag devices, an activation trigger for a display screen of a product of one or more packages of the plurality of packages may be sent. The user can interact with the product's display screen through one or more electronic tag devices.

在一个示例中,该系统可以包括与产品货架竖直地邻近的第二产品货架和沿着第二产品货架的底部定位的第二电子标签装置,第二电子标签装置包括一个或多个电子显示器。产品货架的一个或多个电子显示器和第二产品货架的一个或多个电子显示器可以形成连续显示。该系统还可以包括连接到第二电子标签装置的第二多个包装,其中所述第二多个包装中的每一个被存储在第二产品货架上并且包括嵌入式显示器。产品货架的一个或多个电子显示器、第二产品货架的一个或多个电子显示器、多个显示器和第二多个嵌入式显示器可以形成连续显示。电子标签装置可以在通过接近传感器检测到用户的存在的情况下将流式视频输出到连续显示。在一个例子中,包装中的最前面的包装以及最前面的包装的向前面向的表面可以被确定为使得仅最前面的包装的向前面向的表面形成连续显示。In one example, the system may include a second product shelf vertically adjacent to the product shelf and a second electronic label device positioned along the bottom of the second product shelf, the second electronic label device including one or more electronic displays . The one or more electronic displays of the product shelf and the one or more electronic displays of the second product shelf may form a continuous display. The system may also include a second plurality of packages coupled to the second electronic label device, wherein each of the second plurality of packages is stored on the second product shelf and includes an embedded display. The one or more electronic displays of the product shelf, the one or more electronic displays of the second product shelf, the plurality of displays, and the second plurality of embedded displays may form a continuous display. The electronic tag device can output streaming video to a continuous display if the presence of the user is detected by the proximity sensor. In one example, the foremost package in the package and the forward facing surface of the foremost package may be determined such that only the forward facing surface of the foremost package forms a continuous display.

在一个方面中,提供了一种系统,用于沿着以下形成连续显示:沿着第一产品货架的底部定位的第一电子标签装置、沿着第二产品货架的底部定位的第二电子标签装置、存储在第一产品货架上并包括第一组电子显示器的第一组包装、以及存储在第二产品货架上并且包括第二组电子显示器的第二组包装。第一电子标签装置可以被配置为在第一电子标签装置、第二电子标签装置、第一组电子显示器和第二组电子显示器中的每一个之间分配流式视频。第一电子标签装置、第二电子标签装置、第一组电子显示器和第二组电子显示器中的每一个可以被配置为同时输出流式视频的不同部分。第一组包装和第二组包装中的最前面的包装以及最前面的包装的向前面向的表面可以被确定为使得仅最前面的包装的向前面向的表面形成连续显示。In one aspect, a system is provided for forming a continuous display along: a first electronic label device positioned along the bottom of a first product shelf, a second electronic label positioned along the bottom of a second product shelf A device, a first set of packages stored on a first product shelf and including a first set of electronic displays, and a second set of packages stored on a second product shelf and including a second set of electronic displays. The first electronic label device may be configured to distribute streaming video among each of the first electronic label device, the second electronic label device, the first set of electronic displays, and the second set of electronic displays. Each of the first electronic label device, the second electronic label device, the first set of electronic displays, and the second set of electronic displays may be configured to simultaneously output different portions of the streaming video. The forward facing surfaces of the foremost package and the foremost package in the first and second group of packages may be determined such that only the forward facing surface of the foremost package forms a continuous display.

在一个方面中,提供了一种方法,用于:在沿着第一产品货架的底部嵌入的第一电子标签装置上显示第一视频;在沿着第二产品货架的底部嵌入的第二电子标签装置上显示第二视频;通过第一电子标签装置,发送第一激活触发到存储在第一产品货架上并定位在第一产品货架的前部处的第一组包装;通过第二电子标签装置发送第二激活触发到存储在第二产品货架上并定位在第二产品货架的前部处的第二组包装;通过第一电子标签装置,在第一电子标签装置、第二电子标签装置、第一组包装和第二组包装中的每一个之间分配流式视频;以及通过第一电子标签装置、第二电子标签装置、第一组包装和第二组包装中的每一个同时显示流式视频的不同部分,使得第一电子标签装置、第二电子标签装置、第一组包装和第二组包装中的每一个形成连续显示器。第一电子标签装置可以响应于通过接近传感器检测到用户的存在而发送第一激活触发。第一电子标签装置可以通过接近传感器检测到用户的存在,并发送触发到第二电子标签装置。第二电子标签装置可以响应于从第一电子标签装置接收到触发而发送第二激活触发。In one aspect, a method is provided for: displaying a first video on a first electronic label device embedded along the bottom of a first product shelf; on a second electronic label embedded along the bottom of a second product shelf The second video is displayed on the labeling device; the first activation trigger is sent to the first set of packages stored on the first product shelf and positioned at the front of the first product shelf by the first electronic labeling device; by the second electronic label The device sends a second activation trigger to a second set of packages stored on the second product shelf and positioned at the front of the second product shelf; through the first electronic label device, at the first electronic label device, the second electronic label device , distribution of streaming video between each of the first set of packages and the second set of packages; and simultaneous display by each of the first electronic label device, the second electronic label device, the first set of packages and the second set of packages Different portions of the video are streamed such that each of the first electronic label device, the second electronic label device, the first set of packages, and the second set of packages form a continuous display. The first electronic tag device may transmit the first activation trigger in response to detecting the presence of the user through the proximity sensor. The first electronic label device can detect the presence of the user through the proximity sensor and send a trigger to the second electronic label device. The second electronic tag device may transmit a second activation trigger in response to receiving the trigger from the first electronic tag device.

在一个方面中,提供了一种商品显示系统,包括:多个货架,每个货架包括沿着零售商的货架的边缘定位的货架数字显示器以形成多个货架数字显示器;以及放置在所述多个货架上的多个包装,每个包装具有包装数字显示器以形成多个包装数字显示器;其中,所述多个货架数字显示器和所述多个包装数字显示器被配置为形成连续显示,其中,该连续显示被配置为形成统一的显示,以显示价格、广告或消息中的一个。包装数字显示器可以包括电子墨水。功率可以通过多个货架通过空中发送到多个货架数字显示器。多个货架可以被配置为与多个包装交互。所述多个货架可以限定前部和后部,并且其中从多个包装中确定一组最前面包装,并且其中最前面包装被配置为形成连续显示。可以确定一组最前面包装中的每一个的前表面用于形成连续显示。所述多个包装可以具有多个表面,并且表面中的每个可以具有包装数字显示器,使得包装可以以任何取向放置在货架上以形成连续显示的一部分。In one aspect, a merchandise display system is provided, comprising: a plurality of shelves, each shelf including a shelf digital display positioned along an edge of a retailer's shelf to form a plurality of shelf digital displays; and a plurality of packages on a shelf, each package having a package digital display to form a plurality of package digital displays; wherein the plurality of shelf digital displays and the plurality of package digital displays are configured to form a continuous display, wherein the The sequential displays are configured to form a unified display to display one of a price, an advertisement, or a message. Packaged digital displays may include electronic ink. Power can be sent over the air through multiple racks to multiple rack digital displays. Multiple shelves can be configured to interact with multiple packages. The plurality of shelves may define a front and a rear, and wherein a set of frontmost packages is determined from the plurality of packages, and wherein the frontmost packages are configured to form a continuous display. The front surface of each of a set of frontmost packages may be determined to form a continuous display. The plurality of packages may have multiple surfaces, and each of the surfaces may have a package digital display, such that the packages may be placed on a shelf in any orientation to form part of a continuous display.

在一个方面中,提供了一种用于引导用户到一个或多个物品的设备。该设备可以包括存储计算机可读指令的处理器和存储器,所述计算机可读指令在由处理器执行时使所述设备:存储一个或多个物品,用于购买或查看;确定设施内的与所述一个或多个物品相关联的一个或多个货架边缘电子显示器的位置;检测设施内的用户的计算装置并确定用户是否接近与所述一个或多个物品相关联的一个或多个货架边缘电子显示器,以及当用户靠近所述一个或多个物品时,通过改变所述一个或多个货架边缘电子显示器或改变所述一个或多个物品的电子显示器而引导用户到所述一个或多个物品。设备可进一步被配置为当所述用户接近所述一个或多个物品时,通过改变所述一个或多个货架边缘电子显示器或改变所述一个或多个物品的电子显示器而将用户引导到与所述一个或多个物品相似或有关的物品。设备可进一步被配置为确定所述一个或多个物品在存储在与所述用户相关联的移动装置上的购物清单上。In one aspect, an apparatus for directing a user to one or more items is provided. The device may include a processor and memory storing computer readable instructions that, when executed by the processor, cause the device to: store one or more items for purchase or viewing; the location of one or more shelf edge electronic displays associated with the one or more items; detecting the computing device of a user within the facility and determining whether the user is approaching one or more shelves associated with the one or more items an edge electronic display, and directing a user to the one or more items by changing the one or more shelf edge electronic displays or changing the electronic display of the one or more items as the user approaches the one or more items item. The device may be further configured to direct the user to a location with the one or more items by changing the one or more shelf edge electronic displays or changing the electronic display of the one or more items when the user approaches the one or more items. Items that are similar or related to the one or more items. The apparatus may be further configured to determine that the one or more items are on a shopping list stored on a mobile device associated with the user.

在另一个示例中,一个或多个非暂时性计算机可读介质,其具有存储在其上的指令,,当所述指令被执行时使得至少一个计算装置执行在此讨论的方法。In another example, one or more non-transitory computer-readable media having stored thereon instructions that, when executed, cause at least one computing device to perform the methods discussed herein.

上述各种特征仅仅是非限制性的示例,并且可以以任何期望的方式重新布置、组合、细分、省略和/或改变。这个专利的真正范围只能由后面的权利要求来定义。The various features described above are merely non-limiting examples and may be rearranged, combined, subdivided, omitted and/or changed in any desired manner. The true scope of this patent is to be defined only by the following claims.

Claims (33)

1. A merchandise display system comprising:
a product shelf having an electronic label device positioned along a bottom of the product shelf, the electronic label device comprising one or more electronic displays;
a plurality of packages connected to an electronic label device, wherein each of the plurality of packages is configured to be stored on the product shelf and includes a display;
wherein the one or more electronic displays and the display in each of the plurality of packages form a continuous display,
wherein the electronic label device receives the streaming video and distributes the streaming video between the one or more electronic displays and the corresponding display of each of the plurality of packages,
Wherein the electronic label device is configured to transmit user input received at a first electronic display of the electronic label device to a first display of a first package of the plurality of packages,
wherein the electronic label device is configured to receive data from the first display in response to communicating the user input to the first display, and
wherein the electronic label device is configured to output the data to the first electronic display.
2. The system of claim 1, wherein the electronic label device sends an activation trigger to one or more of the plurality of electronic displays.
3. The system of claim 2, wherein the electronic label device sends a trigger if the presence of the user is detected by a proximity sensor.
4. The system of claim 1, wherein each of the plurality of packages encloses a product, the product comprising a display screen.
5. The system of claim 4, wherein the electronic label device sends an activation trigger to a display screen of one or more packaged products of the plurality of packages.
6. The system of claim 5, wherein the electronic label device sends an activation trigger if a user interacts with one of the electronic displays.
7. The system of claim 6, wherein a user can interact with the display screen through one of the electronic displays.
8. The system of claim 1, further comprising a second product shelf vertically adjacent to the product shelf and a second electronic label device positioned along a bottom of the second product shelf, the second electronic label device comprising one or more electronic displays.
9. The system of claim 8, wherein the one or more electronic displays of the product shelf and the one or more electronic displays of the second product shelf form a continuous display.
10. The system of claim 8, further comprising a second plurality of packages connected to the second electronic label device, wherein each of the second plurality of packages is stored on the second product shelf and includes an embedded display.
11. The system of claim 10, wherein the one or more electronic displays of the product shelf, the one or more electronic displays of the second product shelf, the display in each of the plurality of packages, and the embedded display in each of the second plurality of packages form a continuous display.
12. The system of claim 9, wherein the electronic label device outputs the streaming video to a continuous display upon detecting the presence of the user through the proximity sensor.
13. The system of claim 1, wherein a front-most one of the packages and a forward-facing surface of the front-most package are determined such that only the forward-facing surface of the front-most package forms a continuous display.
14. The system of claim 1, wherein the one or more electronic displays and each display of the plurality of packages are configured to be changed to direct a user to one or more items stored on a user's computing device.
15. A merchandise display system comprising:
a first product shelf including a first electronic label device positioned along a bottom of the first product shelf;
a second product shelf vertically adjacent to the first product shelf, the second product shelf including a second electronic label device positioned along a bottom of the second product shelf;
a first set of packages stored on the first product shelf and connected to the first electronic label device, the first set of packages comprising a first set of electronic displays; and
A second set of packages stored on the second product shelf and connected to the second electronic label device, the second set of packages comprising a second set of electronic displays;
wherein the first electronic label device, the second electronic label device, the first set of electronic displays, and the second set of electronic displays form a continuous display,
wherein the first electronic label device is configured to transmit user input received at the first electronic label device to a first electronic display of a first package of the first set of packages,
wherein the first electronic label device is configured to receive data from the first electronic display in response to communicating the user input to the first electronic display.
16. The system of claim 15, wherein the first electronic label device distributes streaming video between each of the first electronic label device, the second electronic label device, the first set of electronic displays, and the second set of electronic displays.
17. The system of claim 16, wherein each of the first electronic label device, the second electronic label device, the first set of electronic displays, and the second set of electronic displays simultaneously output a different portion of the streaming video.
18. The system of claim 15, wherein the front-most package of the first and second groups of packages and the forward-facing surface of the front-most package are determined such that only the forward-facing surface of the front-most package forms a continuous display.
19. The system of claim 15, wherein one or more of the first electronic label device, the second electronic label device, the first set of electronic displays, and the second set of electronic displays are configured to be changed to direct a user to one or more items stored on a user's computing device.
20. A merchandise display method, comprising:
displaying a first video on a first electronic label device embedded along a bottom of a first product shelf;
displaying a second video on a second electronic label device embedded along a bottom of a second product shelf;
sending, by the first electronic label device, a first activation trigger to a first group of packages stored on the first product shelf and positioned at a front portion of the first product shelf;
sending, by the second electronic label device, a second activation trigger to a second group of packages stored on the second product shelf and positioned at a front portion of the second product shelf;
Distributing, by the first electronic label device, streaming video among each of the first electronic label device, the second electronic label device, the first set of packaging, and the second set of packaging;
simultaneously displaying, by each of the first electronic label device, the second set of electronic label devices, the first set of packaging, and the second set of packaging, a different portion of the streaming video such that the first electronic label device, the second electronic label device, the first set of packaging, and the second set of packaging form a continuous display;
receiving a first user input at the first electronic label device; and
transmitting the first user input from the first electronic label device to a first package of the first set of packages,
receiving, by the first electronic label device, data from the first package in response to transmitting the first user input to the first package.
21. The method of claim 20, wherein the first electronic label device transmits a first activation trigger in response to detecting the presence of a user via a proximity sensor.
22. The method of claim 20, wherein the first electronic label device detects the presence of a user through a proximity sensor and sends a trigger to the second electronic label device.
23. The method of claim 22, wherein the second electronic tag device transmits a second activation trigger in response to receiving a trigger from the first electronic tag device.
24. A merchandise display system comprising:
a plurality of shelves, each shelf comprising a shelf number display positioned along an edge of a shelf of a retailer to form a plurality of shelf number displays;
a plurality of packages placed on the plurality of shelves, each package having a package digital display to form a plurality of package digital displays;
wherein the plurality of shelf digital displays and the plurality of package digital displays are configured to form a continuous display, wherein the continuous display is configured to form a unified display to display one of a price, an advertisement, or a message, and
wherein a first shelf digital display of the plurality of shelf digital displays is configured to communicate user input received at the first shelf digital display to a first package digital display of the plurality of package digital displays,
wherein the electronic label device is configured to receive data from the first package digital display in response to communicating the user input to the first package digital display, and
Wherein the electronic label device is configured to output the data to the first shelf digital display.
25. The merchandise display system of claim 24 wherein the packaged digital display comprises electronic ink.
26. The merchandise display system of claim 24 wherein power is sent over the air through the plurality of shelves to the plurality of shelf digital displays.
27. The merchandise display system of claim 24 wherein the plurality of shelves are configured to interact with the plurality of packages.
28. The merchandise display system of claim 24 wherein the plurality of shelves define a front and a back, a set of front most packages is determined from the plurality of packages, the front most packages configured to form a continuous display.
29. The merchandise display system of claim 28 wherein a front surface of each of the front most packages of the group is determined to form a continuous display.
30. The merchandise display system of claim 24 wherein the plurality of packages have a plurality of surfaces and each surface has a package digital display such that packages can be placed on the shelf in any orientation to form part of the continuous display.
31. The merchandise display system of claim 24 wherein one or more of the plurality of shelf digital displays are configured to be changed to direct a user to one or more items stored on a user's computing device.
32. A merchandise display device comprising:
a processor; and
a memory storing computer-readable instructions that, when executed by the processor, cause the apparatus to:
storing one or more items for purchase or viewing;
determining a location of one or more shelf edge electronic displays associated with the one or more items within a facility;
detecting a computing device of a user within a facility and determining whether the user is proximate to one or more shelf edge electronic displays associated with the one or more items; and
directing a user to one or more items by changing the one or more shelf edge electronic displays or changing the electronic display of the one or more items when the user approaches the one or more items,
wherein the device is further configured to direct the user to items similar to or related to the one or more items by changing the one or more shelf edge electronic displays or changing the electronic display of the one or more items when the user is proximate to the one or more items.
33. The apparatus of claim 32, wherein the apparatus is further configured to determine that the one or more items are on a shopping list stored on a mobile device associated with a user.
CN201680041389.1A 2015-05-15 2016-05-13 System and method for commercializing electronic displays Expired - Fee Related CN107864679B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US14/713,809 2015-05-15
US14/713,809 US10357118B2 (en) 2013-03-05 2015-05-15 Systems and methods for merchandizing electronic displays
PCT/US2016/032328 WO2016187001A1 (en) 2015-05-15 2016-05-13 Systems and methods for merchandizing electronic displays

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
CN107864679A CN107864679A (en) 2018-03-30
CN107864679B true CN107864679B (en) 2022-06-28

Family

ID=56551501

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CN201680041389.1A Expired - Fee Related CN107864679B (en) 2015-05-15 2016-05-13 System and method for commercializing electronic displays

Country Status (6)

Country Link
EP (1) EP3295410A1 (en)
KR (2) KR102115612B1 (en)
CN (1) CN107864679B (en)
AU (3) AU2016263105A1 (en)
BR (1) BR112017024494A2 (en)
WO (1) WO2016187001A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (27)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB2562095B (en) * 2017-05-05 2020-07-15 Arm Kk An electronic label and methods and system therefor
AU2017438990B2 (en) * 2017-11-10 2023-10-26 Vusiongroup Gmbh Electronic shelf label system with positioned virtual shelf labels and a method of positioning said virtual shelf labels
PL3707591T3 (en) * 2017-11-10 2025-03-03 Vusiongroup Gmbh Electronic shelf label system with sectional control of display content
CN108830518A (en) * 2018-04-11 2018-11-16 厦门上特展示系统工程有限公司 Cargo stock's monitoring system and monitoring method
CN110415629B (en) * 2018-04-27 2022-07-26 新谊整合科技股份有限公司 Commodity display information display system and method
CN109034887B (en) * 2018-07-17 2022-03-29 北京旷视科技有限公司 Method, device and system for adjusting price of article
CN112639896B (en) * 2018-08-02 2023-02-03 斯威夫特有限公司 Dispenser for shelf products
CN110895898A (en) * 2018-09-13 2020-03-20 阿里巴巴集团控股有限公司 Information display method, device and equipment and electronic price tag
WO2020143923A1 (en) * 2019-01-12 2020-07-16 Ses-Imagotag Gmbh Electronic shelf label and shelf illumination devices
KR102773582B1 (en) * 2019-01-12 2025-02-25 부전그룹 게엠베하 Electronic shelf label with interactive interface
CN109933378A (en) * 2019-01-30 2019-06-25 北京无线体育俱乐部有限公司 Information configuration, display methods, equipment, system and storage medium
WO2020249232A1 (en) * 2019-06-14 2020-12-17 Ses-Imagotag Gmbh Method for locating an electronic shelf label
CN110364084B (en) * 2019-07-01 2022-02-25 苏宁云计算有限公司 Display control method and device for electronic tag
US11443365B2 (en) 2019-08-16 2022-09-13 Klick Inc. Apparatus, system and method for interactive packaging
JP7483365B2 (en) * 2019-12-17 2024-05-15 東芝テック株式会社 Shopper management device, information processing program, information processing method, and shopper management system
CN111082882B (en) * 2019-12-31 2022-02-08 温州职业技术学院 Method for shoe cabinet to display promotion information and intelligent shoe cabinet
KR102626535B1 (en) * 2021-06-30 2024-01-18 손승희 price display control device
JP7777148B2 (en) * 2021-07-02 2025-11-27 ヴジョングループ・ゲゼルシャフト・ミト・ベシュレンクテル・ハフツング How to direct people to your products
US12482440B1 (en) 2021-10-13 2025-11-25 Glass-Media, Inc. Interactive display apparatus and method of use
US12061830B1 (en) 2021-10-13 2024-08-13 Glass-Media, Inc. Interactive display apparatus and method of use
KR102811569B1 (en) * 2022-04-19 2025-05-21 손승희 Electronic price indicator control system
KR102811341B1 (en) * 2022-04-19 2025-05-21 손승희 A central control device communicating with a user terminal and a plurality of electronic price indicators
US12022964B1 (en) 2023-01-31 2024-07-02 Carter-Hoffmann LLC Heated display cabinet
US12446711B2 (en) 2023-01-31 2025-10-21 Carter-Hoffmann LLC Heated display cabinet
EP4553812A1 (en) * 2023-11-08 2025-05-14 Rep Ip Ag Label for attaching to an object
WO2025103770A1 (en) * 2023-11-15 2025-05-22 Vusiongroup Gmbh Merchandise display device having a display device
CN120013420A (en) * 2025-01-09 2025-05-16 广东瀚墨科技有限公司 Goods replenishment prompt method, device and storage medium based on electronic price tag

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101957904A (en) * 2002-01-09 2011-01-26 传感电子有限责任公司 Detect the system of RFID tag

Family Cites Families (21)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4830201A (en) 1988-04-11 1989-05-16 Rtc Industries, Inc. Spring-urged shelf divider system
US6124851A (en) * 1995-07-20 2000-09-26 E Ink Corporation Electronic book with multiple page displays
US6041720A (en) 1997-11-13 2000-03-28 Rtc Industries, Inc. Product management display system
ATE241821T1 (en) * 1998-09-11 2003-06-15 Alexander Gelbman INTELLIGENT ELECTRONIC LABEL WITH ELECTRONIC INK
US20020167500A1 (en) * 1998-09-11 2002-11-14 Visible Techknowledgy, Llc Smart electronic label employing electronic ink
EP1127309A1 (en) * 1998-11-02 2001-08-29 E Ink Corporation Broadcast system for display devices made of electronic ink
US7356952B2 (en) * 2002-06-17 2008-04-15 Philip Morris Usa Inc. System for coupling package displays to remote power source
US20050134461A1 (en) * 2003-09-03 2005-06-23 Alexander Gelbman Electronically updateable label and display
KR20050066397A (en) * 2003-12-26 2005-06-30 강용준 Device for advertizing goods by sensing approach of shopper and display stand equipped with the device
US9898712B2 (en) * 2004-02-03 2018-02-20 Rtc Industries, Inc. Continuous display shelf edge label device
US8938396B2 (en) * 2004-02-03 2015-01-20 Rtc Industries, Inc. System for inventory management
US9818148B2 (en) * 2013-03-05 2017-11-14 Rtc Industries, Inc. In-store item alert architecture
DE102004037365B4 (en) * 2004-07-30 2011-12-01 Deutsche Post Ag Containers with electronic labels; Use of an electronic label for labeling containers
JP2007284238A (en) * 2006-04-20 2007-11-01 Ishida Co Ltd Sorting system
US8092251B2 (en) * 2007-12-29 2012-01-10 Apple Inc. Active electronic media device packaging
US9361061B2 (en) * 2010-11-12 2016-06-07 The Sinclair Group, Inc. Electronic retail shelf pricing and promotional display modular system
US20120326849A1 (en) 2011-06-24 2012-12-27 Sensormatic Electronics, LLC Electronic price label system and method
CA2897770A1 (en) * 2013-01-11 2014-07-17 Tagnetics, Inc. Out of stock sensor
US20160132822A1 (en) * 2013-03-05 2016-05-12 Rtc Industries, Inc. System for Inventory Management
KR102375763B1 (en) * 2013-03-15 2022-03-16 알티씨 인더스트리즈, 인크. Continuous display shelf edge label device
KR101507380B1 (en) * 2014-06-16 2015-04-07 주식회사 바우드 Showcase to display the box on which the light emitting elements are arranged

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101957904A (en) * 2002-01-09 2011-01-26 传感电子有限责任公司 Detect the system of RFID tag

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
AU2019271906A1 (en) 2019-12-19
CN107864679A (en) 2018-03-30
BR112017024494A2 (en) 2018-07-24
AU2022202222A1 (en) 2022-04-21
KR102115612B1 (en) 2020-05-26
WO2016187001A1 (en) 2016-11-24
EP3295410A1 (en) 2018-03-21
AU2019271906B2 (en) 2022-01-13
KR20180008678A (en) 2018-01-24
KR102369205B1 (en) 2022-02-28
AU2016263105A1 (en) 2017-12-14
KR20200058603A (en) 2020-05-27

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN107864679B (en) System and method for commercializing electronic displays
US20240281760A1 (en) Inventory tracking systems
US11109692B2 (en) Systems and methods for merchandizing electronic displays
US10357118B2 (en) Systems and methods for merchandizing electronic displays
US20160132822A1 (en) System for Inventory Management
US12423740B2 (en) Crowdsourcing incentive based on shelf location
US9275361B2 (en) Out of stock sensor
US20160048798A1 (en) Inventory sensor
WO2017074891A1 (en) Inventory sensor
CN111356385A (en) system for inventory management

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
PB01 Publication
PB01 Publication
SE01 Entry into force of request for substantive examination
SE01 Entry into force of request for substantive examination
GR01 Patent grant
GR01 Patent grant
CF01 Termination of patent right due to non-payment of annual fee
CF01 Termination of patent right due to non-payment of annual fee

Granted publication date: 20220628